Electronic Counters / Controllers General Catalog Vol.3 KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. DIGITAL TACHOMETERS ELECTRONIC COUNTERS List of KOYO Electronic Counters Selection Guide B-2 B-4 KCV Single Preset Counters for Addition and Subtraction /Total Counters for Addition and Subtraction B-5 KCN-A Single Preset Counters for Addition/Subtraction B-19 KCN-S/KCN-W Single/Dual Preset Counters for Addition and Subtraction B-32 KCN-B Preset Counters for Addition and Subraction with Batch and Total Options B-54 KCN-T Small Total Counters B-63 KCY Small Electronic Counters for Addition, Addition/Subtration or Totalizing (Add/Sub) B-67 KCX- , M, D, DM Single Preset Green Counters for Addition B-77 KCX- W, WM Dual Preset Green Counters for Addition B-86 KCX- T Total Counters Green LED B-92 KCX-B Single or Dual Preset Counters for Fast Addition and Subtraction B-96 KCX-B T Fast Total Counters for Addition and Subtraction B-108 KCX- RN Presettable/Lead-out Counters for HighSpeed Addition and Subtraction B-118 KCH-B Counters for Display of High-speed Addition and Subtraction B-129 KCM-50-1/51-1 Multi-counter (Maintenance Counters) B-134 Product Related to Digital Counters B-142 How the tachometers work TC-V Series TC Series List of Digital tachometers Eight measurement mode and examples Merits Measurement mode TC-61 TC-6 TC-4L-G/H TC-41 TC-4 TC-4A TC-4B TC-4S/TC-4W Wiring Recommended applications C-1 C-2 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 C-19 C-24 C-27 C-29 C-33 C-36 C-38 C-40 C-42 C-43 DIGITAL TIMERS KT-V Series D-2 PROGRAMMABLE CAM SWITCHES List of KOYO Programmable Cam Switches FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C FC-80-C/FC-160/FC-320 FC-21 Application Examples Glossary Model Number Index E-2 E-3 E-12 E-24 F-1 F-5 F-9 Notation Used in This Catalog The following indications are used in this catalog to allow safe use of products. Symbols Warning Ignoring this indication and improperly handing the product can lead to a major malfunction possibly resulting in death or serious injury. Caution Ignoring this indication and improperly handing the product can lead to injury or physical damage to property. This symbol represents acts that are generally prohibited. This symbol represents items that are compulsory or prescribed. Safety Precautions The following safety precautions must be obeyed for handling of products noted in this catalog. Warning Do not use in an environment where there is a possibility of combustion or explosion. Doing so may lead to accident involving death or injury or a fire. Do not use this product for applications related to human safety. Use the product only for applications that will not lead to human injury even in the event of an accident or malfunction. Caution Use and manage the product within the environmental ranges (vibration, impact, temperature, humidity, etc.) dictated in the specifications. Improper use may lead to a fire or damage to the product. Thoroughly understand the product before using it. Understand your product well before use. Warning Do not use with a power-supply voltage other than that noted in the specifications. Doing so may lead to a fire, electric shock, or a malfunction. Do not mis-wire products. Doing so may lead to a fire or malfunction. Caution Use the wiring and configuration dictated in the specifications. Not doing so may lead to a fire or malfunction. Do not use wiring methods that subject wiring to stress. Doing so may lead to electric shock or a fire. Perform wiring with power to the power source cut off. Not doing so may lead to electric shock or a malfunction. Do not use screws other than those specified to be fixed to terminals. Doing so may lead to a fire or malfunction. A-1 Warning Do not touch terminals while the power is on. Doing so may lead to an accident resulting in a malfunction or electric shock. Do not use in methods other than as dictated in the specifications. Doing so may lead to an accident involving death or injury or a malfunction. Changing settings during operation may possibly lead to a major accident if operational procedures are not followed correctly and unintended settings are set when output is ON. Operate in ranges where safety for individuals and equipment can be maintained by licensed personnel. Do not place near combustibles. Doing so may lead to a fire. Do not insert metallic objects like a screwdriver in heat radiation slots. Doing so may lead to electric shock or a malfunction. Caution Do not insert inappropriate items in product openings. Doing so may lead to electric shock or a malfunction. Do not block heat radiation slots. Doing so may lead to a rise in internal temperature, fire, or malfunction. Caution Do not repair after disassembly. Doing so may lead to a fire, electric shock, or a malfunction. Maintenance and inspection should be performed with power to the power source cut off. There is a danger of electric shock when working with power supplied to the power source. Warning When disposing of a product, dispose of the product as industrial waste. There is a danger of the product rupturing which may lead to a fire or an accident involving death or serious injury. A Request Regarding Use Handling of our products is designed with the object of their use as general electronic equipment. Do not use products for applications where a high level of reliability is needed with regard to human life. In addition, please contact our Sales Division beforehand when considering use of the products in environments or under conditions other than those in specifications for general electronic equipment or for use in units related to safety and control of transportation equipment (trains, automobiles, etc.), traffic signal equipment, fire-fighting/fire prevention equipment, or the like. A-2 Corresponding CE Marking Conformity with the Low Voltage Directive and EMC Directive is as follows: (1) Low Voltage Directive Conformity Specification- EN6 1010-1 Conformity is provided by ensuring basic insulation with respect to the load side that is connected to contact output when switching voltage of contact output exceeds 150 V. (2) EMC Directive Conformity specification EMI: EN55011 EMS: EN50082-2* Conformity is provided by way of connection of an EMI/EMC filter (MR-2021 Tokin equivalent) to the power source when using a type with a DC power source. Please be advised beforehand that the contents of this catalog may change without warning due to product modifications. When exporting these products, fixed procedures must be followed in accordance foreign currency and export trade control laws. Acquisition of ISO9001 Certification We have been ISO9001 certified company sine November 7, 1995. Date of Accreditation November 7, 1995 Inspected Factories Headquarters and the Ohizumi Factory (Yamanashi Prefecture) Inspected Products Programmable Controllers Electronic Counters Digital Tachometers Programmable Cam Switches Proximity Switches Rotary Encoders Programmable Display Instruments Electronic Control Systems for Factory Automation (FA) Automotive and Electronic Control Instruments Inspecting Agency BVQI (Bureau Veritas Quality International) Applicable Scope of the ISO9000 Series In the ISO9000 series, 9001 includes the broadest range of industrial activities, as shown in this chart. ISO9001 Quality Assurance in designing, development, manufacturing, installation, and incidental services ISO9002 Quality Assurance in maunfacturing, installation, and incidental services ISO9003 Quality Assurance in final inspections and testing A-3 A-4 ELECTRONIC COUNTERS List of KOYO Electronic Counters Selection Guide B-2 B-4 KCV Single Preset Counters for Addition and Subtraction /Total Counters for Addition and Subtraction B-5 KCN-A Single Preset Counters for Addition/Subtraction B-19 KCN-S/KCN-W Single/Dual Preset Counters for Addition and Subtraction B-32 KCN-B Preset Counters for Addition and Subraction with B-54 Batch and Total Options KCN-T Small Total Counters B-63 KCY Small Electronic Counters for Addition, Addition/ Subtration or Totalizing (Add/Sub) B-67 KCX- , D, DM Single Preset Green Counters for Addition B-78 KCX- W, WM Dual Preset Green Counters for Addition B-86 KCX- T Total Counters Green LED B-92 KCX-B Single or Dual Preset Counters for Fast Addition and Subtraction B-96 KCX-B T Fast Total Counters for Addition and Subtraction B-108 KCX- RN Presettable/Lead-out Counters for High-Speed Addition and Subtraction B-118 KCH-B Counters for Display of High-speed Addition and Subtraction B-129 KCM-50-1/51-1 Multi-counter (Maintenance Counters) B-134 Selecting Socket B-142 B-1 Electronic Counters List List of KOYO Electronic Counters Category Dimensions (mm) 48 x 48 Single preset Display Numerical Input/ Output Addition Addition and Subtraction Red LED Addition and Subtraction LCD Addition/ Subtraction LCD Addition Green LED Addition and Subtraction Green LED 48 x 48 Addition and Subtraction Red LED 48 x 48 Addition and Subtraction LCD 72 x 72 Single Preset (with Predicted Output) Operation Dual Preset Addition Green LED Addition and Subtraction Green LED Green LED 72 x 72 External Preset 72 x 144 Addition and Subtraction Aggregate Counter 72 x 72 Addition Red LED Batch Counter 48 x 48 Addition and Subtraction LCD Addition LCD Addition and Subtraction Red LED 48 x 48 Total Counter 72 x 72 Addition Green LED Addition and Subtraction Counter for Positional Display B-2 72 x 144 Addition and Subtraction Red LED Model Number 1 Number of digits 2 3 4 5 6 8 Operational Speed Source Voltage Sensor Power 2 digits: 10 cps/1 kcps 4 digits: 10 cps/1 kcps G : AC100V H : AC200V DC24V, 15mA 30Hz 1kHz 2kHz 5kHz AC100/220V 50/60Hz DC24V, 15mA 30Hz 200Hz 1kHz 5kHz DC24V AC100/200V 50/60Hz DC24V, 15mA Selectable Optional DC24V - AC100/200V 50/60Hz 10Hz/20kHz AC100/200V 50/60Hz DC24V, 80mA 30Hz 200Hz 1kHz 10kHz AC100 to 240V DC24V, 60mA DC12V, 50mA Yes Yes DC12 to 24V AC100 to 240V 50/60Hz - AC100/200V 50/60Hz DC12V, 50mA 10Hz/20kHz AC100/200V 50/60Hz DC24V, 80mA 500Hz/20kHz AC100/200V 50/60Hz DC12V, 100mA - 30Hz/500Hz DC24V 30Hz/1kHz AC100 to 200V 50/60Hz DC24V, 60mA 4 digits: 30 Hz/1 kHz 6 digits: 30 Hz/5 kHz AC100/200V 50/60Hz DC24V, 15mA 30Hz 200Hz 1kHz 10kHz AC100 to 240V DC24V 4 digits: 10 Hz/1 kHz 6 digits: 10 Hz/5 kHz 8 digits: 10 Hz/10 kHz AC100/200V 50/60Hz 10Hz/20kHz AC100/200V 50/60Hz B-32 Individual digit keys can set for presetting. A large, backlit LCD for numerical display. Prescaling and decimal point display are also available. General-purpose preset counter. Green LED for numerical display. Prescaling and decimal point display are also available. The 4-digit model has a timer. Preset counter capable of both addition and subtraction. Comparative output operation available. B-19 B-78 B-96 General-purpose, dual preset counter B-86 Yes Dual preset capable of addition and subtraction. Comparative output operation available. B-96 Yes External preset, comparative output, and zero output Count writing and read-out B-118 Yes - Yes Yes Yes DC24V, 60mA Optional DC12 to 24V The number of digits can be selected for presetting. A large, backlit LCD for numerical display. Prescaling and decimal point display are also available. The 4-digit model has a timer. B-32 Optional - Switching B-67 The number of digits can be selected for presetting. A large, backlit LCD for numerical display. Prescaling and decimal point display are also available. Optional Selectable DC12 to 24V General-purpose, small present counter B-5 DC24V, 60mA Refer to page Remarks Setting of individual digit keys for presetting. Large, red LED for display Predicted output and adjustment for dual output Optional Switching 3/4 digits: 10 Hz/2 kHz 5/6 digits: 10 Hz/5 kHz 20kHz - Optional Selectable 1/2 digits: 10 Hz/200 Hz 3/4 digits: 10 Hz/1 kHz 5/6 digits: 10 Hz/5 kHz 30Hz 1kHz 2kHz 5kHz Memory Backup Upon Power Failure Includes 9 internal counters that are triple preset. Pre-prediction lamp, predicted output, and suspended equipment output Includes 8 internal counters that are triple preset. Arbitrary counter reset and timer functions are available. Includes two internal counters to allow switching between total counting and batch counting B-134 B-54 Large, backlit LCD for numerical display B-63 Large, red LED for display Positional display function B-5 General-purpose B-92 - DC12V, 50mA Yes DC24V, 80mA Positional display available. DC24V, 100mA Correction writing function and zone operation available. Yes B-108 twin B-129 B-3 Electronic Counters List Electronic Counters Electronic Counters Selection Guide Source Voltage Numerical Display Red/Green LED for display Operation Addition and Subtraction Addition/Subtraction With Backlight LCD display Size AC100 to 240V KCV-6S KCV-4S KCV-4S-C KCV-6S-C AC100V KCY-2D-G KCY-4D-G AC220V KCY-2D-H KCY-4D-H AC100 / 220V Relay output KCN-4SR DC24V Relay output KCN-4SR-C KCN-6SR-C Relay output KCN-A4SR KCN-A6SR Transistor output KCN-A4ST KCN-A6ST Relay output KCN-A4SR-C KCN-A6SR-C Transistor output KCN-A4ST-C KCN-A6ST-C AC100 / 220V Addition/ Subtraction Numbers with Model Numbers represent the number of digits DC12 to 24V 48mm Category With memory backup upon power failure With Backlight LCD display KCN-6SR DC24V Single Preset Addition Addition and Subtraction No display AC100V KCY-2-G KCY-4-G AC220V KCY-2-H KCY-4-H Green LED for display AC100 / 220V Green LED for display AC100 / 220V 72mm Addition Start No display AC100 / 220V AC100 to 240V 48mm Addition and Subtraction Addition/Subtraction With Backlight LCD display DC12 to 24V KCX-B4 KCX-B4M KCX-B6M KCX-1D -2D -3D -4D -5D -6D KCX-2DM -3DM -4DM -5DM -6DM KCX-1 -2 Green LED for display AC100 / 220V Addition Green LED for display AC100/ 220V Red/Green LED for display Addition With Backlight LCD display 48mm Total Counter Addition and Subtraction Addition 72mm -4 KCN-4WR KCN-6WR Transistor output KCN-4WT KCN-6WT Relay output KCN-4WR-C KCN-6WR-C Transistor output KCN-4WT-C KCN-6WT-C KCX-B4W KCX-B6W KCX-B4WM KCX-B6WM 72mm Addition and Subtraction Addition/Subtraction -3 Relay output Dual preset Addition and Subtraction KCX-B6 KCX-3W -4W -5W KCX-4WM KCX-6WM AC100 to 240V DC12 to 24V AC100 / 220V KCV-4T KCV-6T KCV-4T-C KCV-6T-C KCN-4T KCN-6T DC24V KCN-4T-C KCN-6T-C Green LED for display AC100 / 220V KCX-B4T KCX-B6T Green LED for display AC100 / 220V KCX-4T KCX-6T External preset, aggregate, batch, and other counters are provided as special counters. For details, refer to page B-2. B-4 -6W KCX-8T Electronic Counters KCV Single Preset Counters for Addition and Subtraction/Total Counters for Addition and Subtraction Hz/10 Hz (with Dipswitch selected) High-speed 30 200 Hz/1 kHz (with Set-up Mode selected) A preset counter that aggregates counts with functions that provide a large, two-color LED for display that is easy-to-read in a small DIN48x48 body. Dual output of predicted output and preset output can be set with settings for predicted output. CE Mark Merits Large, easy-to-see displa A large LED for display with character height of 12 mm (4 digits) and 10 mm (6 digits) is used in a small DIN48x48 body. Various types of counts [Prescaling] The input pulse can be converted to any values and displayed. [Dual phase addition/subtraction by individual input] The counting range can be from positive to negative. However, settings are in the positive range. [Addition-Subtraction] Counts can be selected for positive or negative display. Dual output with alarm output Dual setting is possible with alarm output. Alarm values are values prior to reaching preset values. Easy operation Setting and changing of preset values with individual setting keys has the feel of digital switches User configurabe digit number User can configure the no. of digit. Battery-less memory retention EEPROM is used to retain values in memory, so there is no need for battery maintenance. Removable terminals Maintenance has been reduced via terminals that can be removed. After wiring, the terminal cover provides a safe surface for worryfree use. High-speed response with 10 kcps The input response frequency for this class is a maximum of 10 kHz. Input operational speed can be adjusted to switch to 30, 200, 1 k, or 10 kHz. IP65 Membrane is used to protect from operation with wet or dirty hands, A special cover is also provided as an option to enhance the protective structure. Designed in compliance with CE and UL Tamper proof Key protection can be set for individual keys to prevent tampering. Power source for a large-capacity sensor (AC P/S type only) You can source the power for sensor from the built-in P/S 24VDC, 60mA. Free power supply for the AC type The operating AC voltage is wide as 85VAC 264VAC. B-5 Electronic Counters KCV Model number system List of Models Category Model Number Source Voltage Number of Digits KCV- Sensor Source Voltage DC24 V 60 mA - AC KCV-4S C: DC power Blank: AC power 4 DC KCV-4S-C Preset counter S Output T Total AC KCV-6S KCV 6 DC KCV-6S-C 4 4-digit 6 6-digit AC KCV-4T Series Name 4 DC KCV-4T-C KCN-A Total counter AC KCV-6T 6 DC KCV-6T-C KCN-S/W AC AC100 240V DC DC12 24V KCN-B Accessories: Installation Frame KCN-T 4-digit 6-digit General Specifications Specification KCX KCY Item AC power Source voltage AC100 240V Permitted power fluctuation AC85 264V Power consumption approx. 11 VA KCX-RN KCH-B DC12 DC10 DC24 V (20-28V) 60 mA (Max. 10%p-p ripple) Memory Backup upon Power Failure EEPROM (Writing Up to 100,000 times) 50 -20-70 Ambient humidity 35-85%RH (with no dewing) Withstand voltage AC 2kV for one minute (for AC input, 0 V, and relay interconnection) (for DC input, 0 V, and relay interconnection) Impact resistance Noise resistance 26.4V Memory Duration 10 years 10 Storage temperature Vibration resistance 24V approx. 4 W Sensor power Ambient temperature KCM DC power (with no freezing) Durable Displacement amplitude 0.5 mm Frequency 10-55 Hz along three axes No malfunction Displacement amplitude 0.35 mm Frequency 10-55 Hz along three axes Durable 490 m/s2 11 ms along three axes No malfunction 98 m/s2 11 ms along three axes AC power 1.5 kV between terminals (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns) DC power 1.0 kV between terminals (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns) Protective structure IP65 (front panel only) Weight Terminals Approx. 150 g Conforming wiring 0.25 Conforming crimped contact R1.25-3 Permitted torque B-6 0.5Nm 1.65mm Approx. 110 g 2 Electronic Counters KCV Performance Specifications Preset Counter Item Category Total Counter Addition and Subtraction Preset Counter Setting Addition and Subtraction Total Counter Single with alarm output Number of digits 4 or 6 digits 4 or 6 digits 4-digit: 12 mm (count)/7 mm (preset) 6-digit: 10 mm (count)/7 mm (preset) Counting range 4-digit : 0-9999 6-digit:-99999-999999 Setting range 4-digit : 0-9999 6-digit: 0-999999 KCV Display (LED character height) Operational speed: 30/200/1 k/10 kHz switching Input Negative logic 3.3 k (AC power)/1.8 k (DC power) KCN-A Input resistance: positive logic 15 k Inpult voltage: "L" 0-3 V "H" 7-30 V Max. signal amplitude 5 ms Automatic reset Responded in less than 100 Manual reset Responded in less than 0.1 s s s KCN-S/W Responded in less than 100 External reset Input gate duration during power failure 20 500ms Input gate duration during power recovery 50 500ms Output DC output: NPN open collector output 24 V 100 mA Withstand pressure 35 V residual voltage less than 1.5 V KCN-B Disabled count input Output mode One-shot/ Hold/Match Output duration 10-9990 ms every 10 ms Prescaling 0.001-99.999 (6-digit)/0.001-9.999 (4-digit) Decimal point Lamp for arbitrary places available Key protection Setting of arbitrary keys possible Installation Exclusively for embedding (terminal block connection) KCN-T Relay output: 1 transformer relay AC220V 2A (resistance load) KCY Setting of reset keys possible Prescaling is for 1x values. I/O Specifications Count input 200Hz 1kHz 10kHz Positive logic 15 k Input resistance Negative logic 3.3 k (AC power)/1.8 k KCX Input speed 30Hz (DC power) On delay: 0.1 ms Off delay: 0.1 ms Positive logic 15 k Input resistance Negative logic 3.3 k (AC power)/1.8 k KCX-RN L 0 3V Input voltage H 7 30V Input response Disabled count input (DC power) External reset input KCH-B L 0 3V Input voltage H 7 30V Input response On delay: 0.1 ms Off delay: 0.1 ms Input resistance Positive logic 15 k Negative logic 3.3 k (AC power)/1.8 k (DC power) Withstand voltage Transistor output Current KCM L 0 3V Input voltage H 7 30V Less than 35 V Less than 100 mA Residual voltage Less than 2 V Relay output Capacity AC220V 2A (resistance load) AC220V 0.5A (cos =0.4) DC30V 0.5A (L R=7ms) Lifetime more than 100,000 uses more than 200,000 uses more than 200,000 uses B-7 KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCV Output modes Mode Count Output Hold Continuous Hold One-shot Reset One -shot 10-9990 ms Match Continuous Match Can be set in milliseconds from 10 to 9990 ms (in Setup mode). Output mode diagrams One-shot output (reset count) KCN-S/W Hold output (continuous count) Addition mode Preset values DC output Relay output Subtraction mode Preset values Alarm values Alarm values Reset KCN-B Addition mode Subtraction mode 0 0 ON ON Reset OFF ON DC output OFF ON Relay output OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF KCN-T One-shot duration 100 ms (can be set from 10-9990 ms in Setup mode) Matching mode (continuous count) Addition mode Subtraction mode KCY Alarm values Preset values Alarm values 0 When alarm values are set to 0, output operations for DC output will be the same as for relay output. :Alarm value setting KCX ON Reset DC output Relay output OFF ON OFF ON OFF KCX-RN When displaying alarm output (DC output), the output LED will blink on and off. KCH-B Counting timing Dual input mode KCM Addition Input mode for addition or subtraction (during input of positive logic) Addition Subtraction " H" IN A " L" " H" IN A " L" Input mode for addition or subtraction (during input of negative logic) Subtraction Addition T/2 " H" IN B " L" T/4 T/4 T/4 T/4 T/4 T/4 T/4 T/4 T T During addition input, IN A can be either L or H. IN A " L" T/2 T/2 T " H" IN B " L" Subtraction " H" During addition input, IN A can be either L or H. T/2 T " H" During addition input, IN B can be either L or H. IN B " L" T/2 T/2 During addition input, IN-B can be either L or H. T/2 T/2 T T (Note) With B-8 or the required counting speed is (CPS)= 1 T sec Electronic Counters KCV Wiring Diagrams 2 0V INH 4 5 6 3 Sensor powerr Disabled count input INB 2 DC output OUT 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 Count input DC24V60mA INA R Reset input 3 0V INH 4 5 6 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 COM N.C. N.O. Relay input AC100-240 V power KCV-4S-C KCV-4T-C INB 0V INH 3 4 5 6 2 DC output OUT 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 COM N.C. N.O. Relay input 6T-C Disabled count input INA + R Reset input AC100-240 V power 6S-C Count input Disabled count input INB KCV Count input DC24V60mA INA Count input 2 R Reset input Disabled count input INA INB 0V INH 3 4 5 6 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 + - DC12-24 V power KCN-S/W Sensor power 6T KCN-A KCV-4T 6S R Reset input KCN-B KCV-4S - DC12-24 V power KCN-T Alarm output is used in combination with DC output (OUT terminal). I/O Circuit Diagrams DC24V + Internal 24 V ON during negative logic input 3.3k 12 5V 8 COM 1.8k 47k 10 N.O. INA 3 22k 47k 10 N.O. 22k 5V 5V 3.3k INB 4 1.8k 47k INB 4 22k 47k 22k 1 OUT 5V 47k 0V Reset 7 22k 5V 47k 22k 5 0V 47k 22k 5V 3.3k Disabled count 6 input OUT 1.8k 5 7 1 5V 3.3k Reset 8 COM KCX-RN 3 9 N.C. KCH-B INA Internal circuit ON during negative logic input 5V 11 9 N.C. KCX 2 KCM Sensor power DC24V DC power KCY AC power 1.8k Disabled count 6 input 47k 22k B-9 Electronic Counters KCV Input Wiring Examples Proximity switch with NPN open collector output Brown KCV Adding Black Input logic: Positive logic: (voltage input)(pos) Input mode: Input for addition or subtraction (Dip switch 2 ON) Brown 2 Sensor source ( DC24V) Adding 3 IN A 4 IN B Subtracting KCN-A Black Blue Recommended proximity switch: APS Black - -N Black Black 7 Reset input Black 6 Disabled count input Blue 0V 5 E Recommended proximity switch: APS DC 2-wire proximity switch 3 IN A 4 IN B - 6 Disabled count input 5 0V -E2 Input logic: Arranged with encoder output and set as positive or negative logic Input mode: Dual input (Dip switch 2 OFF) Red (brown) Adding 7 Reset input Rotary encoder Input logic: Negative logic (no-volt input)(neg) Input mode: Input for addition or subtraction (Dip switch 2 ON) KCN-B ( DC24V) 2 Sensor source Subtracting Black Black KCN-S/W Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output Input logic: Negative logic: (no-volt input)(neg) Input mode: Input for addition or subtraction (Dip switch 2 ON) Brown Subtracting 3 IN A 4 IN B Green (black) Blue 2 Sensor source (DC 24V) 3 IN A KCN-T 4 IN B White (white) 7 Reset input 5 0V Black (blue) 6 Disabled count input KCY 5 0V Recommended proximity switch: APS - -Z Recommended rotary encoder: TRD-J -RZ S TRD-N -RZ S With the DC type, please supply source voltage above 20 V. Switch or relay KCX Input logic: Negative logic (no voltage input)(neg) Input mode: Input for addition or subtraction (Dip switch 2 OFF) Operational speed: 30 Hz (Dip switch 1 ON) 2 Sensor power source (DC 24 V) 3 IN A Input logic: Positive logic (voltage input)(pos) Input mode: Input for addition or subtraction (Dip switch 2 ON) Operational speed: 30 Hz (Dip switch 1 ON) Addition KCX-RN Sensor power source (DC 24 V) 3 IN A Addition Subtraction Subtraction 4 IN B 4 IN B 7 Reset 7 Reset 6 Disabled count input KCH-B 2 5 0V 6 Disabled count input Input flow is heavy, so this connection is recommended. 5 0V There is no DC power source. Use a separate external power source. KCM Output Wiring Examples NPN open collector output Relay output COM 8 OUT 1 0V 5 Load power DC24V B-10 Load power Load N.C. 9 Load N.O. 10 Load Electronic Counters KCV Front Panel Layout and Description Panel guide Count value (red) OUT K/P KCV Digit keys 6 Key protection (red) Operating mode Blinks when key protection is ON (only when the key is ON). Setup Mode Displays key protection settings. 4 5 2 3 1 KCN-B RST Operating mode Allows changes in preset values After changing preset values, total key input is ineffective for about one second. Preset values then take effect. Setup mode Allows to configure the setups. KCN-A Preset values (green) Operating mode Displays preset values. Setup mode Displays set items. KCN-S/W COUNTER Operating mode Lit when output is ON. Blinks when alarm output is ON. RST key Operating mode Allows count values to be reset (0 for Addition and preset values for Subtraction). Setup mode Allows selection of set items. KCY The Total Counter has several lamps that differ with respect to the Preset Counter Output : None Key protection : None other than for display in compliance with RST key. Preset values : Not displayed in Operating mode. Digit keys : Not effective in Operating mode. KCN-T Output (red) Operating mode Displays count values. Setup mode Displays setting contents. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 After removing your finder from the key, the settings will be verified after about one second. 2. Resetting the count 1 Press the 1 key and the display changes to 124 2 Press the 2 key and the display changes to 134 3 Press the 3 key and the display changes to 234 KCX-RN 0 1 Example: When the counter is " " preset to 123 KCH-B 1.Changing preset values Press a digit key once to increase the corresponding digit by one: KCX Key strokes KCM Press the RST key to reset the currently displayed count. The count is reset within 0.1 second after the key is pressed. For example, the current count 0010 is reset to 0 for Addition. It is reset to the preset value for Subtraction. 3. Protecting the keys Turning the Dip switch ON disables the reset and digit keys. If disabled keys are pressed, the LED for the corresponding key will blink. If Key protection is selected to disable keys in Setup mode, Dip switch 6 will come ON. At factory setup, Key protection in Setup mode is completely disabled, so just turning Dip switch 6 ON will disable all keys. 6 RST 4 5 2 3 1 B-11 Electronic Counters KCV Configure dip switches Use the dip switch on the top of the counter to configure varions parameters and operation mode. Configure dip switches with power off. Operation with power up will have no effect. When dip switches are re-configured, you must press the Reset key in operating mode to reset the count values. ON Dip switch At the factory setups, all switches are OFF. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 KCN-A KCV 1 Selection of the operating mode Selection of key protection Selection of the output mode (with a Total counter, this slot is empty) Selection of count memory Selection of the operational mode (with a Total counter, Addition is fixed) Selection of the input mode Selection of counting speed Counting speed KCN-S/W The counting speed is selected with Dip switch 1. ON OFF Counting speed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 30Hz ON 10kHz OFF Input mode SW2 Factory setup KCN-B Input mode The input mode is selected with Dip switch 2. ON KCN-T OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON Dual input OFF Operational mode SW3 Factory setup Operational mode The operational mode is selected with Dip switch 3. ON OFF KCY Input for Addition or Subtraction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Addition ON Subtraction OFF Counting memory SW4 Factory setup Counting memory The counting memory is selected with Dip switch 4. KCX ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Memory upon power failure ON Power source reset OFF Factory setup KCX-RN Output mode The output mode is selected with Dip switch 5. Match output can be selected in Setup mode. ON KCH-B OFF Output mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW5 Hold output ON One-shot output OFF Factory setup Key protection With Dip switch 6, [Do not protect keys] can be selected to take effect for keys set in Setup mode using [Protect keys]. Setting for keys to protect can performed in Setup mode. At the factory setup, [Do not protect keys] is set. KCM ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Operating mode Key protection SW6 Settings in Setup mode take effect ON Do not OFF Operating mode SW8 Factory setup The operating mode is selected with Dip switch 8. ON OFF 1 2 3 Dip switch 7 is not used. B-12 4 5 6 7 8 Setup mode ON Run mode OFF Factory setup Setup mode Setting of prescaling values is with the digit key. (*1.000) Count values for display 1.0 Digit key 6 5 4 3 2 1 Setup mode Setting Dip switch 8 to ON and turning on the power will start the Setup mode. Setting Dip switch 8 to OFF and turning on the power will start the Run mode. 2. Operations in Setup mode 4-digit: 0.001-9.999 6-digit: 0.001-99.999 Press the Reset key to proceed. RST Prescaling settings 2 (scL2) Setting of the prescaling decimal point is with the digit key.(*1.000) Digit key: Displays count values. RST Input logic settings(si g) RST Output mode settings(c-op) Selection is with the digit key. Digit key: Displays count values. RST pos Selects positive logic. neg Selects negative logic.* Press the Reset key to proceed. Selection is with the digit key. Digit key: Displays count values. 1 2 Setting of the number of digits is with the digit key. The number of digits is displayed in accordance with the digit key. RST Press the Reset key to proceed. The display position of the decimal point is set with the digit key. The decimal place is displayed in accordance with the digit key. Digit key 1 will set no decimal place (*No decimal point). Decimal point settings(d. p) Count values for display 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Digit key 6 5 4 3 2 1 RST eq Selects matching output. di ps Selected with Dip switch 5.* Press the Reset key to proceed. KCN-S/W Press the Reset key to proceed. Alarm output settings(set) Setting is with the digit key(*0 ) Count values for display 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Digit key 6 5 4 3 2 1 Press the Reset key to proceed. Selection of disable or enable to set the Reset key is with the digit key. Reset key protection(rpro) Digit key: for K/P display *Disable 1 2 RST Enable Press the Reset key to proceed. Digit key protection (ppro) Selection of disable or enable to set the Reset key is with the digit key. (4digit 6digit Digit key: for K/P display *Disabled *Disabled *Disabled *Disabled *Disabled *Disabled 1 2 3 4 5 6 RST / Enabled / Enabled / Enabled / Enabled / Enabled / Enabled Press the Reset key to proceed to the final menu. di p1 Selects Dip switch 1.* Press the Reset key to proceed. 1 2 Selects 1x. Count values for display 6 5 4 3 2 1 Digit key 6 5 4 3 2 1 Digit key: Displays count values. 1000 Selects 1 kHz. 200 Selects 200 Hz. Selects 10x. Press the Reset key to proceed. Selection of number of digits(dgt) Selection is with the digit key. 1 2 3 Selects 1000x. Selects 100x. KCN-B RST 1 0 0 0 1 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 1.0 0 0 KCN-T 1 2 3 4 In Setup mode, the count can be initialized using the menu as follows: Represents factory setup. Counting speed settings(cps) 0 0 KCN-A Prescaling settings 1 (scL1) KCV Can be changed from 10-9990 ms Press the Reset key to proceed. RST RST Run mode 0 0s KCY 1. Switching Between Setup mode and Run mode Count values for display (Blank) 0. 1 Digit key 6 5 4 3 2 1 KCX 200/ 1 kHz, Dip switch 1 Positive or negative logic Match output, Dip switch 5 Duration of One-shot output can be set from 10-9990 ms (in 10-ms increments) 4-digit: 0.001-9.999 (5) Prescaling 6-digit: 0.001-99.999 (6) Prescaling factor The scaling factor can be set for values used in prescaling. 1x 10x 100x 1000x (7) Number of digits The number of counter digits for display can be set. 4-digit: 1-4 digits 6-digit: 1-6 digits (8) Decimal place An arbitrary digit can be set for display of the decimal point. (9) Predicted output Offset values can be set with respect to preset values. 4-digit: 0-9999 6-digit: 0-999999 (10) Resetting key protection Setting to disable the reset key can be performed. (11) Protecting digit keys Setting to disable an arbitrary digit key can be performed. With a Total Counter, items 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, and 11 are skipped. Output duration is set with the digit key. Digit key 1 to set in increments of 10 ms will be rendered ineffective (*100 ms). Digit key 1 Not used 1 Used KCX-RN (1) Counting speed (2) Input logic (3) Output mode (4) Output duration Output duration settings(outt) KCH-B Items that can be configured in Setup Mode K/P display Disabled with lamp on Enabled with blinking lamp off The number of digits selected for setting of digits will render effective the settings for the decimal place, alarm output, and key protection that follow. Only the selected number of digits is set. With the Total Counter, items marked with an * are skipped. When changing the setting of the number of digits selected, the decimal point will be removed, the alarm output will be set to 0, and preset values will automatically be changed to 5. After changing the default settings in Setup mode, press the Reset key in Run mode and reset count values. B-13 KCM Settings that cannot be selected with dip switches can be set in Setup mode. Electronic Counters KCV Electronic Counters KCV Operational Example (for KCV-6S) Run mode Changing preset values 1. Change the preset value from 120 to 240 Before changing KCV COUNTER COUNTER OUT OUT OUT K/P K/P K/P 6 KCN-A KCN-S/W KCN-B Change complete COUNTER RST 4 5 6 2 3 1 RST 4 5 3 OUT K/P 6 2 1 Press Digit key 2 twice. COUNTER RST 4 5 6 2 3 1 RST 4 5 2 3 1 Press Digit key 3 once. 2. The preset value will be 240, and operations will continue with the altered value. Preset values will take effect about 1 second after being changed. Positioning application example with encoder KCN-T Positioning of a conveyor can be done in increments of 0.1 mm. It sets the Alarm in 20mm prior to the preset value to stop the conveyor in accurate position. Pulley diameter 15 dia Encoder pulse count 1000P/R KCV-6S COUNTER Set item OUT KCY Counting speed Pulley K/P 4 6 RST 5 2 3 Input logic 1 Output logic Output duration KCX Encoder Alarm output (deceleration) Preset output (suspended) Prescaling Scale factor No. of digits KCH-B KCX-RN Control Box Motor 1. Prescale calculation KCM Prescale pulley diameter (mm) encoder pulse count 3.1416 15 1000 0.047-mm pulse B-14 Set item 10kHz Negative logic One-shot 100ms 0.047 10 6 Decimal point Between 1st and 2nd digit Alarm output 20.0 Represents factory setup. Electronic Counters KCV 2. Switching to Setup mode Turn Dip switch 8 ON and then turn power ON (Dip switches 1-7 are OFF). 3. Changing setting contents OUT These values are initial values. Set the scaling factor to 10. K/P Press the RST key to proceed. KCV The setting screen for Prescaling settings 2 is displayed. The setting screen for Counting speed is first displayed. OUT K/P Press the 3 key 1 time ans 10 will appear. KCN-A The setting screen for Input logic is displayed. OUT OUT Press the RST key to proceed. Press the RST key to proceed. The setting screen for Output mode is displayed. The setting screen for the Number of digits is displayed. K/P OUT These values are initial values. Press the RST key to proceed. Press the RST key to proceed. The setting screen for Output duration is displayed. The setting screen for the Decimal point is displayed. These values are initial values. OUT K/P Press the RST key to proceed. OUT K/P Press the 2 key and the decimal point will be displayed between the first and second digit. KCY The setting screen for Prescaling settings 1 is displayed. Set prescaling to 0.047. Press the 4 key 9 times. Press the 2 key 4 times. Press the 1 key 7 times, and 0.047 will appear. Display the decimal point between the first and second digit. K/P KCN-B OUT KCN-T These values are initial values. KCN-S/W K/P K/P OUT OUT K/P K/P Press the RST key to proceed. KCX These values are initial values. The setting screen for Alarm output is displayed. Set the alarm output to 20. K/P K/P Press the 3 KCX-RN Press the RST key to proceed. OUT key twice and 20.0 will appear. KCH-B OUT OUT K/P Press the RST key to proceed. KCM Setting is complete after this step. 4. Switching to Run mode Turn the power OFF after completing setting in Setup mode and turn Dip switch 8 OFF (Run mode) (When power is OFF, all the setups in Setup mode are saved in the memory). 5. Starting Run mode Be sure to turn power ON after changing the setups in Setup mode and press the RST key to reset the count values. B-15 KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCV Error Codes Common Errors Error Error type e21 Memory data error Decimal point blinking Counter Overflow Error Error details Corrective Action Preset values and Setup mode items have changed. Count values have exceeded the display range. Counter Overflow Error KCN-S/W count value will be set to 5000, and the Setup mode contents will be set to settings used at factory setup. Decimal point blinking Negative display Counter Underflow Error Count values are below the display range. Error display will be cleared by the " RST " key or when the count valup return to the count range. In the counter, correct calculation is in a range from - 2147483.648 to 2147483.647. All digits in the display turn to 0 OUT 1 K/P KCN-B Press the RST key to eliminate the error display. The OUT 1 K/P Decimal point blinking KCN-T Counter Underflow Error OUT Decimal point blinking OUT 1 K/P KCY Decimal point blinking OUT K/P Decimal point blinking Option Option Model Number Rubber packing KC-48P Front cover KC-48C Details Prevents water from entering the control panel by installing this between the installation panel and KCV. Protects the front panel from dirt and the like. KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX K/P Negative display 1 K/P OUT B-16 Material: Soft silicone rubber Key operation can be performed with the front cover as-is. Keep the wires away from power line. With regard to use in locations where extensive noise is generated, keep the KCV counter and wires away from the noise source to the extent possible. Empty terminals are not to be used as relay terminals. For connection, use of crimped contacts is recommended. When wiring the 1 and 7 terminals, do not install fork-shaped crimped contacts at an angle. Use a round crimped contact for angled installation. KCN-S/W KCN-A Fork-shaped crimped contacts For angled installation, connection with the contact is insufficient. Like in the illustration above, install the contact perpendicular to the horizontal. Round crimped contact KCN-B (1) With the DC power source, the 0-V terminal and the input common 0-V terminal are internally short-circuited. (2) Apply the rated voltage in one instant, not by gradually raising the voltage. (3) Always use negative input logic to set the DC 2-wire proximity switch. (4) During counting, changes to preset values will take effect about one second after key input of the change. In subtraction mode, key input takes effect when the count is reset valid preset value will be saved in the memory at loss of power. (5)It is recommended to use a sheet included in the package to keep the setups for the future maintenance. (6) Use in the following environments should be avoided: A location where the ambient temperature is above 50 or below 10 . A location where the ambient humidity is above 85% or abrupt temperature changes may cause condensation. A location with dust, iron fillings, corrosive gasses, or the like. A location exposed to direct sunlight. A location with significant vibrations or impact. (7) When conducting testing of insulation withstand voltage, insulation resistance, or the like, remove the KCV counter from control box. Precautions for Wiring Installation and Removal of the Main Body Installation Installation of the Terminal Block and Terminal Cover KCX KCY Insert the main body through the panel installation port. KCN-T Precautions for Use KCV Precautions Electronic Counters KCV Main body From the rear, mount the installation frame. Terminal block KCX-RN Fixing screw Terminal block cover KCH-B Do not use a screw other than the one used to fix the terminal block during shipping. Maintain a permitted torque of 0.3 Nm. Install the terminal block after wiring is complete. Installation frame: Can be installed vertically or horizontally. KCM Removal Holding the tabs, spread them 2-3 mm. While keeping the tabs spread, pull the device towards you. B-17 Electronic Counters KCV (in mm) External Dimensions 63 100 (AC power source) 48 60 (DC power source) KCN-S/W KCN-A 48 44.5 KCV Installation frame Depth Panel thickness 1-5 6 Detailed Diagram of the Terminal Block 50 10 480+0.2 Close installation possible 70 or more 55 or more KCX KCX-RN KCH-B 1 45+0.3 0 Square 6.5 KCN-T KCY 2.When the installation handle is vertical Hole 45+0.3 0 When aligning the front cover (KC48C and KC48P), line dimensions should be more than 55 mm. KCM 106mm 70 or more Installation frame Complying wiring : 0.25 1.65mm2 Complying crimped contact: R1.25-3 Permitted torque : 0.5Nm B-18 AC power source 30.48 9.5 KCN-B Terminal screw 66mm Boring Dimensions for Installation 1.When the installation handle is horizontal 4 7.62 7.62 6.5 1.12 DC power source Electronic Counters Single Preset Counters for Addition or Subtraction Maximum counting speed: 30cps/5kcps(selected by dip switch) 200cps/1kcps(selected in Setup mode) KCN-A With the DIN standard of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the full featured preset counter incorporates an easy to read LCD display. Just press keys to set values by digit, or change operation between addition and subtraction. KCN-A Merits Small body and easy to read display 13mm 10mm Count display Preset value Key Protection to lock keys individually On the front panel, each digit key and the Reset key can be locked to protect against erroneous operation. The digit keys can be also used to increment the corresponding digit values. Count reset key DC power as thin as 55 mm With minimum space requirement, the control board can be installed anywhere. 55mm AC power is 90 mm thick. KCX Displayed values are backlit to facilitate reading in darkness. KCN-T Keys for setting corresponding digits Backlit LCD integrated in all models KCN-S/W Easy operation. Values can be set and changed digit by digit simply by pressing the corresponding keys. KCN-B With its body of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the counter provides full screen display of either 4-digit or 6-digit numbers with the height of 13 mm or 10 mm. KCY KCN-A Keypad protection cover A series of models to meet all your needs All eight models include advanced functions such as prescaling and decimal display. These models can be combined appropriately to satisfy your requirements. EEPROM to eliminate cell replacement The counter uses an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells. The memory can store all counts, preset values and mode settings. Output options 1c relay output Either a sink or source can be used for DC output. Load Water proofed front panel The keypad on the front panel is completely coated (IP64) for insulation from dust and water. Load Isolated from internal circuit by photocoupler B-19 KCM 61mm KCH-B KCX-RN A keypad cover is also attached to provide additional protection . Switching between addition and subtraction Addition mode and Subtraction mode Addition mode In the Addition mode, the count increments by one for each pulse input. When the value has reached a preset value, the counter generates a signal. Preset value Count KCV Electronic Counters KCN-A 3 1 Pulse input Preset value In the Subtraction mode, the count decrements by one for each pulse input. When the value has reached zero, the counter generates a signal. Count KCN-A Subtraction mode KCN-S/W 2 4 RST Sensor 0 KCN-B Incremented to 990 Decremented to 10 2 4 RST Sensor 0 3 1 Pulse input Prescaling Converting the number of pulses to quantity or dimension KCN-T Quantity Multiplied by 4 3 RST 1 Prescaled at 4 KCY Four workpieces per pulse Roller for length measurement Cut length (in mm) Cutter KCX Can be set in a desired unit. KCX-RN You need not consider the roller's diameter when setting the counter value. 2 4 Rotary encoder RST 3 1 Prescaled at 0.8 0.8 mm per pulse Using a present scale, the count is converted to quantity or dimension. Easy operation Changing a preset value: On the front panel, press a digit key once to increment the corresponding digit by one. KCM KCH-B 2 4 Sensor Example: When the counter is preset to 123 2 4 RST 3 1 Pressing 1 key increments the first digit by one to 1 2 4 Pressing 2 key increments the second digit by one to 1 3 4 Pressing 3 key increments the third digit by one to 2 3 4 Each digit is preset upon change. B-20 Electronic Counters KCN-A Key Protection against erroneous operation All keys on the front panel can be locked to secure current settings. These keys can be protected individually. The digit keys can be also used to increment the corresponding digit. and the 0V KCN-A Example: Protecting the fourth digit of KCN-A4SR Counter (1)In the Setup mode, select the key to be protected. (2)Short circuit the Key Protection input In this case, choose the digit 4. pin . Protectable keys 2 3 1 KCN-S/W 4 RST KCN-A Short circuit Displaying a decimal point KCN-B A decimal point can be displayed at a desired location. Decimal point 2 5 3 1 KCN-T 4 6 RST Switching the input logic between positive and negative Device choices are expanded by two input logics available for positive (voltage) input and negative (no voltage) input. KCX KCY Relay Photoelectric sensor Relay output KCN-A SR KCH-B KCX-RN Proximity swith KCN-A ST Rotary encoder B-21 KCM DC output Electronic Counters KCN-A List of models Source voltage Model number system Sensor power Output Relay output DC24V only 6-digit counters KCN-A4SR-C KCN-A6SR-C KCN-A4ST-C KCN-A6ST-C KCN-A4SR KCN-A6SR KCN-A C: DC power Blank: AC power None DC output KCV 4-digit counters AC110V or AC200V DC24V 15mA Relay output Series R: Relay output T: DC output S:Single setting KCN-A 4: 4-digit 6: 6-digit General Specifications KCN-B KCN-S/W Item Source voltage Power consumption Sensor power Specification AC AC 85 115V, or AC 180 DC DC 20 28V (Max. 10%p-p ripple) AC Approx. 5VA DC Approx. 2W AC DC 24V (20 DC None KCN-T KCY Storage temperature Ambient/Storage humidity 10 50 20 70 35 (with no freezing) 85%RH (with no dewing) Withstand voltage AC AC 2kV for one minute (For each of AC input, OV and relay output interconnection) DC AC 2kV for one monute (between 0V and relay output) Insulation resistance AC Min. 20M at DC 500V (between AC input/0V/relay output) DC Min. 20M at DC 500V (between 0V and relay output) Vibration resistance Shock resistance KCX 28V) 15mA (Max. 10%p-p ripple) Memory backup at power failure EEPROM (Up to 100,000 writes) Either power-on reset or memory backup can be selected in Setup mode. Ambient temperature Noise resistance AC DC Coating KCM B-22 Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 55Hz with 0.5mm amplitude No error for one hour along three axes at 10 55Hz with 0.35mm amplitude Durable for 11 ms along three axes at 490 m/s2 (50G) (Shock applied three times in each case) No error for 11 ms along three axes at 98 m/s 1.5kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1 1kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1 s width and 1 ns rise time) s width and 1 ns rise time) IP64 for the keypad on the front panel against dust and splash. Installation Flush mounting Connection Terminal block Mass (weight) KCH-B KCX-RN 240V AC Approx. 220g DC Approx. 110g 2 (10G) Electronic Counters KCN-A Performance Specification Item Specification Addition or subtration (selectable) Setting Single Number of digits 4 or 6 digits Setting range 4 digits: 0 Counting rage 4 igits: Counting speed 30 cps or 5kcps (selected by Dip Switch 1) 200cps or 1kcps (selected in Setup mode) Input mode Addition or subtration (selected by Dip Switch 2) 9999 6 digits: 0 999999 9999 6 digits: 99999 999999 Negative (no voltage) or positive (selected in Setup mode) Responded within 0.2ms External reset input Minimum pulse width: 6ms Auto reset Responded within 0.2ms (14ms at 30cps) Manual reset Responded within 0.1 s Power reset Power shutdown: 1 s or more Reset duration: 1 s or less (until restart) Output NPN open collector or relay contact 1c (depending on models) KCN-A Input logic Count disable input Output mode One Shot (momentary output) or Hold (selected by Dip Switch 3), or Countup (selected in Setup mode) Output duration in One Shot mode 100ms, or 10 Key protection Both the Reset key and digit set keys, or individual key protection (selected in Setup mode) Zero setting Enabled or disabled (selected in Setup mode) Off delay Relay output On delay Off delay 14ms or less 15ms or less 24ms or less 24ms or less 2.5m or less 3.5ms or less 13ms or less 13ms or less 1kcps 1ms or less 2.5ms or less 11ms or less 11ms or less 5kcps 0.5ms or less 2ms or less 11ms or less 11ms or less Decimal point display Any location (selected in Setup mode) Prescaling 4 digits: 0.001 9.999 6 digits: 0.001 KCY 30cps 200cps KCN-T Open collector output On delay KCN-B 9990ms (selected in Setup mode) Maximum counting speed I/O response KCN-S/W 999 KCN-A Operation 99.999 (selected in Setup mode) Off delay time applies only to the Countup mode. Input speed 1kcps 5kcps L 0 3V H 7 30V KCX-RN Input voltage Count disable input 200cps Input Positive: 15k resistance Negative: 3.3k Input On delay: 0.2ms response Off delay: 0.2ms Input Positive: 15k resistance Negative: 3.3k Input voltage KCH-B Count input 30cps KCX I/O Specifications L 0 3V H 7 30V Input On delay: 6ms or less response Off delay: 6ms or less Input Positive: 15k resistance Negative: 3.3k Input voltage Withstand voltage DC output (Type T) Relay output (Type R) KCM External reset input L 0 3V H 7 30V Max. 35 V Current Max. 100 mA Residual voltage Max. 2 V Capacity AC220V 2A (resistance load) 100,000 Durability Min. contacts AC220V 0.5A (cos =0.4) Min. 200,000 contacts DC30V 0.5A (L R=7ms) Min. 200,000 contacts B-23 KCV Electronic Counters KCN-A Output modes Mode Count Signal output Hold Continued Held One Shot Reset Momentary (for 10 to 9990 ms ) Equal Continued Only when the count equals the preset value Can be set in 10 miliseconds from 10 to 9990 ms (in Setup mode). KCN-A Output mode diagrams Hold mode OUT: Held Count: Continued KCN-B KCN-S/W Addition One Shot mode Subtraction OUT: One Shot Count: Reset Addition SET Subtraction SET 0 0 Reset Reset OUT OUT KCN-T 100 ms in One Shot mode, or 10 to 9990 ms (can be set in Setup mode) OUT: Equal Equal mode Count: Continued Addition Subtraction KCY SET 0 KCX Reset OUT KCM KCH-B KCX-RN Only when the count equals the preset value Output duration depends on the counting speed. There is no DC output at 2kcps or relay output at 100cps or more. Counting timing Positive (voltage) input Negative (no voltage) input "H" "H" "L" "L" T T 2 T B-24 2 Note T T 2 T 2 or Counted at rising or falling edge. Minimum speed required (cps) 1 Tsec Electronic Counters KCN-A ut np ni tio tec KCN-A KCN-A Dimensions of Terminal block np ni ut tio np 8.5 10.55 5.2 1.7 Ke 6.3 yp ro tec ni mm o Co DC power DC24V ut OV in bl e IN isa t pu in Co u IN nt H d nt OUT KP t A6SR-C Co u AC200V DC output pu KCN-A4SR-C AC100V Reset input R KCN-S/W COM N.O Relay output ro Ke Reset input R N.C yp in p np ut OV Co mm on i le IN isa b ut in p Co u IN nt H d nt Ke Co u ow rp V ut A6ST-C er ut KCN-A4ST-C co yp inp mm ro ut on tec OV tio ni np ut KP A6SR Se n DC sor 24 pow V 15 er mA Co un ti np ut Co IN u IN nt H dis ab Se le n in p O so KCN-A4SR KP Wiring Diagrams Screw M3 7.62 1.32 6.3 1.32 N.C COM N.O Relay output KCN-T Wire section: 0.25 1.65mm 2 Conforming criped contact: 1.25-3 DC power DC24V I/O Circuit Diagrams ON for negative input ON 5V For relay output 2 9 N.C 11 N.O. 15k 5V 10 COM 3.3k Count input 3 11 N.O. 15k 5V 5V 3.3k 7 7 Reset 15k 15k 10 10 OUT 5V OUT 5V 3.3k 3.3k 0V 11 Count disable input 4 15k 5 0V 4 15k 5 5V Key protection input 6 KCM 11 Count disable input KCH-B 3.3k Reset 9 N.C 13 10 COM 3 Internal circuit ON for negative input ON KCX-RN 2 DC24V KCX For relay output Internal power source 24V 3.3k Count input DC Power KCY AC Power Sensor power source DC24V KCN-B Reset input R 5V Key protection input 6 B-25 Electronic Counters KCN-A Input Wiring Examples (count, reset and count disable) Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output Input logic: Positive (voltage) input(pos) DC24V power Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input(neg) Brown (Red) 24V 2 KCV Black (White) KCN-A Black (White) KCN-S/W 24V sensor power 0V Black (White) Blue (Black) Recommended proximity switch: APS - Brown (Red) 24V DC24V power Black (White) Black (White) 7 Reset input 24V sensor power 3 Count input 7 Reset input Black (White) 4 4 Count disable input Blue (Black) 5 0V -T E2 Recommended proximity switch: APS Count disable input 5 0V - -N E Rotary encoder Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input(neg) Input logic: Positive or negative to be set according to the encoder output 2 24V sensor power 3 Count input White DC24V power 24V 2 24V sensor power 3 Count input 5 0V 0V Red Black KCN-T 2 0V Count input 3 DC 2-wire proximity switch KCN-B Proximity switch with NPN open collector output 7 Reset input Count disable input KCY 4 Green Black 5 0V - Recommended rotary encoder: TRD-J -S(one-phase output) -Z Switch or relay Input logic: Positive (voltage) input(pos) KCH-B KCX-RN KCX Recommended proximity switch: APS Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input(neg) 2 24V sensor power 2 24V sensor power 3 Count input 3 Count input 7 Reset input 7 Reset input 4 Count disable input 4 Count disable input 5 0V 5 0V KCM This connection is preferable to accommodate high input current. Output Wiring Examples NPN open collector output Relay output Compatible with relay drive OUT 10 Load N.O 11 COM 10 MAX.100mA 0V 11 Load power rated at 24 V B-26 Load Electronic Counters KCN-A Front Panel Layout and Description KCN-A Front panel Count (zero-suppressed) ). Hz 6 Reset key 2 5 RST 3 1 "SET" indicates that a value is preset and displayed. KCY Resets initial settings in the Setup mode. 4 Measurement unit Displayed in the Setup mode Hz: counts per second ms: output duration in the One Shot mode KCN-B Output status "OUT" is displayed when output is enabled. KCN-T Preset value Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode. KCN-S/W KCN-A Character height: 13mm for 4-digit display 10mm for 6-digit display Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode. A negative count is preceded by the minus sigh ( Digit set keys KCX-RN Rear side KCX Use these keys to set or change a value. A preset value can be modified digit by digit. In the Setup mode, a preset value is replaced by initial settings. Array of four dip switches 4 1 10 6 setting 7 8 9 5 KCH-B 3 14 11 12 13 KCM 2 Connecting speed Input mode Output mode Operation mode B-27 Electronic Counters KCN-A 2. Operation in Setup mode Using the keys In the Setup mode, the counter can be initialized using the menu as follows: 1. Changing a preset value On the front panel, press a set key once to increment the corresponding digit by one. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Count speed(speed) Use the set key to select a value. Set key: Display 1 2 3 9 200 200cps. 1000 1kcps. dip1 Follows the setting of DIP switch 1.* KCV RST 6 RST 4 5 2 3 1 Example: When the counter is preset to 123 Pressing 1 key 124 Pressing 2 key 134 Pressing 3 key 234 Count memory(count) Input logic(signl) 2. Resetting the count Press the RST key to reset the currently displayed count. The count is reset within 0.1 second after the key is pressed. For example, the current count "0010" is reset to "0" in the Addition mode, and to the preset value in the Subtraction mode. RST Output mode(c-op) You can lock the RST key and the set keys by short circuiting the Key Protection input pin and the 0V pin . The keys to be protected can be selected in the Setup mode. RST Output duration(out-t) Standard initialization using the dip switches Use the dip switches on the rear panel to initialize the counter speed and modes. This initialization should be performed before you turn the power on. No. Dip switches 1 2 3 4 ON OFF All switches are set to OFF at delivery. Item ON/ indicated OFF by ON 30 1 Counting speed OFF 5K 2 Input mode OFF UP 3 Output mode OFF 4 Operation mode OFF RUN ON DWN ON ON SET RST KCX KCX-RN KCH-B 7)Decimal point: 8)Key protection: 30cps 5Kcps Subtraction Addition One Shot (100 ms) Hold Setup Run can initialize the counter to non200cps or 1kcps Off (power-on reset) Positive (voltage) input Countup Output duration in the One Shot mode can be set to 10 to 9990 ms in 10 ms increments. Four digits: 0.001 to 9.999 Six digits: 0.001 to 99.999 Can be displayed at any digit location. Reset key and/or any set keys can be RST Decimal point(point) KCM Use the keys to select a value. Set key: Display 1 pos Positive logic 2 neg Negative logic* Press the Reset key to proceed. Use the set keys to select a value. Set key: Display Run mode Rest key protection (r-pro) RST Set key protection (p-pro) 1. Set Dip switch 4 to ON then turn the power on to enter into the Setup mode. 2. Set Dip switch 4 to OFF then turn the power on to enter into the Run mode. Initial values set in the Setup mode are written to the memory * when the power is off. switch 3.* Press the Reset key to proceed. Use the set keys to set the output duration. The 1 key is invalid because the duration must be set in 10ms unites.(100ms *) Display Blank 1 0 0 ms 6 5 4 3 2 1 Set Keys Press the Reset key to proceed. 1. 0 0 0 6 5 4 .3 2 16 Press the Reset key to proceed. Use the set keys to set the decimal point place. The decimal point is displayed in the digit place for the specified set key. (Without decimal point *) Display 0. . 0 0. . 0 . 0 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Press the Reset key to proceed. Use the set keys to select a value Set key: Display 1 enab Enables the reset key. 2 disa Disables the reset key.* Press the Reset key to proceed. Use the set keys to set each set key to be enabled( o )or disabled( - ). (*4-digit type:---- 6-digit type:------) Set key: Display Output when the set value is 0(p0out) Setup mode selected for protection. eq Coincidence output dip3 Follows the setting DIP Set Keys RST RST 1. Switching between Setup mode and Run mode B-28 1 cler Power on reset. 2 retn Backup for power failure* Press the Reset key to proceed. (1.000*) Display Set Keys Mode selected Custom initialization in the setup mode 6)Prescale: Set key: Display Use the set keys to set the prescale. Prescale(scale) Set Dip switch 4 to the OFF position to start operation. In the Setup mode, you standard values. 1)Counting speed: 2)Count memory: 3)Input logic: 4)Output mode: 5)Output duration: Use the set keys to select a value. 1 2 3. Protecting the keys KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A RST Each digit is preset upon change. Press the Reset key to proceed. RST 1 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 1 2 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 2 3 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 3 4 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 4 5 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 5 6 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 6 Press the Reset key to proceed. Use the set keys to select a value. Set key: Display 1 disa Output disabled* 2 enab Output enabled Press the reset key to return to the count speed menu. Indicates a value set at delivery Important: Always press the Reset key in the Run mode after changing initial settings. When you enable key protection, short circuit the Notes Key Protection input pin 6 and the 0V pin 5. Keys not available for specific operation are inversely highlighted. Electronic Counters KCN-A Operation Example (for KCN-A4S) Run mode Changing the preset value 1. Change 20 to 30 as follows: After change KCN-A Before change 3 2 4 1 3 RST 1 KCN-S/W 2 4 RST KCN-A On the front panel, press 2 key once. The preset value is always zero-suppressed. 2. The new preset value 30 will be used for the subsequent operation. Setup mode KCN-B Set the prescale to 4 to count the number of workpieces processed as follows: Quantity 2 4 Sensor RST KCN-T Multiplied by 4 3 1 Prescaled at 4 KCY Four workpieces per pulse 1. Switch to Setup mode. Set Dip switch 4 to ON then turn the power on to enter into the Setup mode. On the counting speed screen, press Dip switch 1 to select the initial speed. KCX 2. Set or change the initial settings. On the Output duration screen, leave the initial setting (100 ms) unchanged. KCX-RN Press the RST key to proceed. Press the RST key to proceed. On the Prescale screen, press the 4 key three times to change the current setting to 4.000. KCH-B On the Count memory screen, press "2" key to select memory backup at power failure. Press the RST key to proceed. KCM On the Input logic screen, press "2" key to select negative logic. All necessary settings are now completed. Press the RST key to proceed. On the Output mode screen, press "2" key to select the mode selected by dip switch 3. 3. Switch to Run mode. Set Dip switch 4 to OFF, and turn the power off then turn it on again to enter into the Run mode. (Initial values set in the Setup mode are written to the memory when the power is off.) 4. Start up Run mode Press the RST key to proceed. Turn the power on after changing initial setups, and then press the RST key in the Run mode. B-29 Electronic Counters KCN-A List of Error Codes In Run mode Error code KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Count display Possible cause Description Preset display f f f f f f Preset Counter overflow Count has exceeded upper limit. - f f f f f Preset Counter underflow Count has decreased below lower limit. e r r (ERR) p s e t (PRESET) Preset memory data error Preset value divided by prescale exceeds count range. e r r (ERR) set Initial setting memory data error (SET) Solving errors For an overflow or underflow, press the RST key to reset the counter and clear the error code. For a preset memory error, press the RST key. The preset display returns to the initial value (5000). Change this value as necessary. When an initial setting error has occurred, switch to the Setup mode then restart the counter. One of the error codes listed below will be displayed, Initialize or change the corresponding item(s), and return to the Run mode then press the RST key. Simply press the RST key if no change is required. All items are reset to the initial values set at delivery. Error code KCX KCY KCN-T Count display Preset display Description e r r (ERR) s p e e d (SPEED) Counting speed memory data error e r r (ERR) c o u n t (COUNT) Count memory/reset data error e r r (ERR) s i g n l (SIGNL) Input logic memory data error e r r (ERR) c- op Output mode memory data error e r r (ERR) o u t - t (OUT-T) Output duration memory data error e r r (ERR) s c a l e (SCALE) Prescale memory data error e r r (ERR) p o i n t (POINT) Decimal point memory data error e r r (ERR) pro Key protection memory data error e r r (ERR) p 0 o u t (P0OUT) (C-OP) (PRO) Zero output memory data error Note: The counter is automatically checked for errors when its power is turned on. If an error occurs, counting and display are disabled except for overflow and underflow. KCM KCH-B KCX-RN Initial setting memory data errors Important For DC power source, the 0V power terminal and the 0V common input terminal are internally short-circuited. Always use negative input logic for DC 2-wire proximity switch. After changing initial settings, always press the RST key to activate the new values. During counting, any change to a preset value becomes effective when each digit key is pressed. For maintenance purposes, keep records of initial settings and preset values. Avoid using the counter in the environments where: (1) Ambient temperature is above 50 or below 10 . (2) Ambient humidity exceeds 85 , or abrupt temperature changes may cause dewing. (3) The operation may by affected by dust, metal chips, corrosive gases or other harmful objects. (4) The machine is exposed to direct sunlight. (5) You anticipate vibration or shock. Keep the following in mind when wiring: (1) The wiring of the counter should be separated from power line. (2) Keep the counter body and wiring away from noise source. (3) Never use a free terminal as a relay. Isolate the counter from the control circuit before testing insulation voltage and resistance. B-30 Electronic Counters KCN-A External Dimensions (in mm) 90(for AC power) KCN-A KCN-A 44.5 48 Bracket Protective cover 1 to 5 mm thick panel 45 (50.4) 6 10 Depth 55(for DC power) 63 DC power 61mm AC power 96mm KCN-S/W 48 Boring dimensions for Installation 45 +0.3 0 48 mm for tight alignment without the protective cover. 45 +0.3 0 KCY 48 +0.2 0 Square hole (Can be tight fit) KCN-B 55 mm or more 70 mm or more 70 mm or more Bracket 2. Vertically aligned handles KCN-T 1. Horizontally aligned handles KCX Protective cover KCM KCH-B KCX-RN How to remove the counter Hold the lever then pull it 2 to 3 mm in the direction shown. Pull the lever to your side. B-31 KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Maximum counting speed: 30cps, 1kcps, 2kcps or 5kcps (selected by digit keys) With the DIN standard size of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the full featured counter incorporates an easy to read LCD display. Integrating the latest technologies, the counter can be used for many purposes as measuring quantities, length and time. Other options include single preset for general purpose models, and dual preset setting for multifunction counters. Merits Easy operation Countup values can be set or modified independently from initial settings. Changes can be made easily and quickly on site. Small body and easy to see display With its body of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the counter provides full screen display of either four-digit or six-digit numbers with the height of 13 mm or 10 mm. KCN-B KCN-S/W Single/Dual Preset Counters for Addition and Subtraction Count display 10mm 13mm Preset value The currently selected digit flashes. KCN-T Stores a preset value. Increments the value of a selected digit by one. Select a digit to be preset. Switches between first preset mode or second preset mode. Backlit LCD integrated in al models darkness. Multifunction KCX-RN A complete series of models provide advanced functions such as dual preset nine output modes, count disable, large capacity sensor power (DC24 V, 60 mA) and AC 100 to 240 V user-selectable power source. Timer option Keypad protection cover A keypad cover is attached to prevent erroneous operation. KCH-B A series of models to meet all your needs All 16 models include advanced functions such as prescaling and decimal display. These models can be combined appropriate to satisfy your requirements. KCX KCY Displayed values are backlit to facilitate reading in DC power as thin as 55 mm With minimum space requirement, the control board can be The KCN-4S general purpose 4-digit counter can be used also as a precise digital timer. Addition,subtraction or both operations are available. installed anywhere. Twelve error codes quickly report error status. KCM 55mm AC power is 90 mm thick EEPROM to avoid cell replacement The counter uses an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells. The memory can store all counts, preset values and mode settings. Water proofed front panel 61mm B-32 The keypad on the front panel is completely coated (IP64) to insulate dust and water. Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Mode options Addition, subtraction and concurrent Addition mode and Subtraction mode Count Preset value Incremented to 990 KCN-A Addition mode In the Addition mode, the count increments by one for each pulse input. When the value has reached a preset value, the counter generates a signal. MODE RST ENT 0 KCN-A Sensor Pulse input Subtraction mode In the Subtraction mode, the count decrements by one for each pulse input. When the value has reached zero, the counter generates a signal. Decremented to 10 MODE RST ENT Sensor 0 KCN-S/W Count Preset value KCN-B Pulse input Addition and Subtraction Addition pulse and subtraction pulse can be entered separately or simultaneously. KCN-T Counting operation is not affected by any deviation of roller movement. Addition Roller for length measurement Subtration MODE Deviation RST ENT MODE RST ENT KCY Rotary encoder Two-phase signal KCX Prescaling Converting the number of pulses to quantity or dimension KCX-RN Quantity Multiplied by 4 MODE Sensor RST ENT Prescaled at 4 Roller for length measurement Cutter KCH-B Four workpieces per pulse Cut length (in mm) KCM Can be set to a rounded integer. MODE You need not consider the roller's diameter when setting the counter value Setting in inches Rotary encoder RST ENT Prescaled at 0.8 0.8 mm per pulse Either unit is selectable with the prescaling function Setting in meters Change in the mechanism are not required B-33 Displaying a decimal point A decimal point can be displayed at a desired location. KCV Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Decimal point MODE ENT Switching the input logic between positive and negative Device choices are expanded by two input logics available for positive (voltage) input and negative (no voltage) input. Relay KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A RST KCN-T Proximity switch Relay output Photoelectric sensor KCY KCN- R DC output KCN- T Nine operation modes The multifunction counter has nine operation modes, including Compare, Hold, Auto Reset and One shot Output. Ex. Count of the number of workpieces (Compare mode) KCH-B KCX-RN KCX Rotary encoder Addition (Mode 7) OUT1 C P1 Subtration KCM Photoelectic sensor at entry Photoelectic sensor at exit Conveyor The counter counts and displays the number of workpieces on the conveyor. The count is added to by input pulse generated by the photoelectric sensor at the entry, and subtracted from by pulse generated by another sensor at the exit. Addition and subtraction can occur at the same time. B-34 MODE RST ENT Timer option KCN-4SR-C/4ST-C/4SR/4ST Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W General Purpose 4-digit Counters These counters can be used also as timers from 0.01 second to 99 hours and 59 minutes 0.1s 1s 10s 99.99s 999.9s 9999s 99m59s 99h59m Five output modes for wide applications Quartz crystal oscillator assures the clock precision. On Delay Off Delay One Shot Flicker Accumulate KCX KCY KCN-T Digital clock for easy and error-free setting KCN-B KCN-S/W 1m KCN-A KCN-A 0.01s KCM KCH-B KCX-RN Either time elapsed or remaining can be displayed. B-35 KCV Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Counter/Timer Functions Two Categories of Models General purpose counters Single preset, One-Shot or Hold output, prescaling and decimal point display Source voltage Output type Sensor source 4-digit(and timer) 6-digit Relay output KCN-4SR-C KCN-6SR-C KCN-4ST-C KCN-6ST-C KCN-4SR KCN-6SR KCN-4ST KCN-6ST DC24V only KCN-A KCN-S/W KCN-B AC110V or AC220V Relay output DC output KCN-T KCY R Relay output T DC output S Single preset W Dual preset 4 4-digit 6 6-digit Multifunction Source voltage Output type Sensor source 4-digit 6-digit Relay output KCN-4WR-C KCN-6WR-C KCN-4WT-C KCN-6WT-C KCN-4WR KCN-6WR KCN-4WT KCN-6WT DC12 None 24V Relay output AV100V 240V DC24V 60mA General Specifications Item KCX C DC power Blank AC power Single or Dual preset setting, nine modes including One-Shot, Hold and Compare output, prescaling and decimal point display DC output KCX-RN - DC24V 15mA DC output KCH-B KCN- None DC output KCM Model number System Source voltage General Purpose AC Multifunction 240V AC90 p-p ripple) DC 10 AC 85 115V, or AC 180 DC DC 20 28V (Max. 10 264V 30V (Max. 10 Power consumption AC Approx. 5VA Approx. 5VA DC Approx. 2W Approx. 2W Sensor power AC DC 24V (20 DC None Memory backup at power failure 28V) 15mA (Max. 10 p-p ripple) DC24V (20 p-p ripple) 28V) 60mA (Max. 10 p-p ripple) None EEPROM (Up to 100,000 writes) Ambient temperature 10 50 Storage temperature 25 70 (with no freezing) Ambient/Storage humidity 35 Withstand voltage AC 2kV for one minute (For each of AC input, 0V and relay output interconnection) Insulation resistan 20M Vibration resistance Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude Shock resistance Durable for 11 ms along three axes at 490 m/s2 (50 G) No error for 11 ms along three axes at 98 m/s2 (10 G) 85 RH (with no dewing) or more at DC 500V (AC: For each of AC input, 0V and relay output interconnection) 1.5 kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1 Noise resistance Coating IP64 for the keypad on the front panel against dust and splash. Installation Flush mounting Connection Terminal block Mass s width and 1 ns rise time) AC Approx. 220 g Approx. 150 g DC Approx. 110 g Approx. 110 g Noise tests also include static discharge test and NEMA compliance tests. B-36 Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Counter Functions Performance Specification General Purpose (KCN-S) Multifunction (KCN-W) Addition and subtration Setting Single preset Number of digits 4 or 6 digits (depending on models) Setting range 4 digits: Counting speed 30cps, 1kcps, 2kcps, or 5kcps (selected by keys) For duty factors, see Counting Timing. Input mode Addition and/or subtraction or two-phase (selected by keys) Single or Dual prest (selected by keys) 9999 6 digits: 99999 999999 Positive (voltage) or negative (no voltage) (selected by keys) Minimum pulse width: 5 ms Auto reset Responded within 0.5 ms (2.5 ms at 5kcps) Manual reset Responded within 0.1 s Power reset Power shutdown: 1 s or more Output NPN open collector or relay contact 1a (depending on models) Output mode One Shot (momentary output) or Hold (selected by keys) Output duration 0 Reset duration: 1 s or less (until restart) One Shot (momentary output), Hold or Compare (selected by keys) Maximum counting speed Open collector output Relay output 30cps 14ms or less 19ms or less 1ms or less 6ms or less 2kcps 0.5ms or less 5.5ms or less 5kcps 2.5ms or less 7.5ms or less KCN-T 1kcps KCN-B 9990 ms (selected by keys in 10 ms increments) I/O response Decimal point display KCN-A Input logic Extermal reset input KCN-A 999 Any location (selected by keys) Prescaling 4 ditits: 0.001 Count disable input Not available 9.999 6 ditits: 0.001 KCN-S/W Item Operation 99.999 Responded within 2.5 ms KCY Output response delays only at 5k cps. Count disable input Input resistance Positive: 15k Negative: 3.3k Input voltage L 0 3V H 7 30V Input response On delay: Max. 5ms Off delay: Max. 5ms Input resistance Positive: 15k Negative: 3.3k Input voltage L 0 3V H 7 30V Input response On delay: Max. 2.5ms Off delay: Max. 2.5ms Input resistance Positive: 15k Negative: 3.3k Input voltage L 0 3V H 7 30V Withstand voltage NPN open collector Current output Residual voltage Relay output Capacity Durability (1.8k (1.8k for DC models) KCX-RN (1.8k for DC models) KCH-B Reset input 30cps/ 1kcps/ 2kcps/ 5kcps for DC models) KCM Pulse input Input speed KCX I/O Specifications Max. 35V Max. 100mA Max. 2V AC220V 2A (resistance load) AC220V 0.5A (cos 0.4) DC30V 0.5A (L/R 7ms) Min. 100,000 contacts Min. 200,000 contacts Min. 200,000 contacts B-37 Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Output modes KCN-S Mode No KCN-W (dual preset mode) Count 1 2 Signal output Continued Held Reset One shot 10 9990ms Count 2 Reset One shot* 10 9990ms 3 Continued KCN-S/W 4 Held C P 8 C P Signal output Held Reset One shot* 10 9990ms Continued Continued Held One shot 10 9990ms 6 7 C Held Continued Reset One shot* C P1 8 Held 7 Count Continued Held 3 5 Held Signal output 2 4 Continued Count OUT2 1 Signal output 1 OUT1 Mode No KCN-W (single preset mode) Mode No KCN-A KCV Counter Functions C C 9 P1 P1 P2 P2 C P2 C: Count P1: First setting P2: Second setting C: Count P: Setting Can be set in 10 ms increments from 10 to 9990 ms. KCN-B Output mode diagrams KCN-S general purpose, single preset Mode 1 (Hold) Out: Held Mode 2 (One Shot) Out: One Shot Addition Subtraction SET SET 0 0 Reset Reset OUT OUT Count: Reset Subtraction One Shot means signal output for short duration from 10 to 9990 ms KCX KCY KCN-T Addition Count: Continued Counting at 5kcps is disabled during reset in Mode 2 ,as 2.5 ms is required KCX-RN for auto reset. KCN-W Multifunction, single or dual preset Mode 1 OUT2: Held OUT1: Held KCM KCH-B Addition Count: Continued Mode 2 Addition Subtraction SET2 SET2 SET1 SET1 0 0 Reset Reset OUT1 OUT1 OUT2 OUT2 B-38 OUT2: One Shot OUT1: Held Count: Reset Subtraction Subtraction SET1 SET1 0 0 Reset Reset OUT1 OUT1 OUT2 OUT2 Addition Mode 6 SET2 SET1 SET1 Subtraction Reset OUT1 OUT1 OUT2 OUT2 OUT2: When the count is equal to or smaller than SET2. Mode 8 SET2 SET2 SET1 SET1 0 0 OUT1 OUT1 OUT2 OUT2 OUT2: When the count is equal to or larger than SET2. KCN-T Reset OUT2: When the count is equal to or larger than SET1, and when it is equal to or smaller than SET2. KCX Mode9 Count: Reset 0 0 Mode 7 OUT2: One Shot OUT1: One Shot Addition Subtraction SET2 Subtraction KCN-A SET2 OUT2: Held Count: Continued OUT1: One Shot Count: Continued Addition SET2 Mode 5 OUT2: Held OUT1: Held KCN-A Mode 4 KCN-S/W Addition Count: Continued KCN-B OUT2: One Shot OUT1: Held KCY Mode 3 Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Counter Functions SET2 SET1 KCX-RN 0 OUT1 KCH-B OUT2 are available only on dual preset mode. Single preset mode operate as described under SET2, OUT2. In One Shot mode, output duration ranges from 10 to 9990 ms. One Shot output turns off when reset signal is entered. In One Shot mode, another countup causes signal output for a set duration. Mode 6 , counting at 5k cps is interrupted for 0.5 to 2.5 ms between countup and next pulse input. In Mode 2 In both modes, counting at 2k cps is not affected by countup. Mode 6 Mode 9 KCM Mode 5 Signal output is controlled as follows regardless of the magnitudes and the signs of SET1 and SET2: In Hold mode, it generates and hold signal when the count equals preset value. In One Shot mode, it generates signal momentarily when the count equals preset value. In Compare mode, it generates signal when the count is equal to or larger (or smaller) than the preset value. B-39 Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Counter Functions Counting timing Addition and Subtraction mode Positive (voltage) input Subtraction Addition "H" Pulse can be counted either at rising edge or falling edge. INA KCN-A KCV "L" "H" Pulse can be counted either at rising edge or falling edge. INB "L" Negative (no voltage) input Subtraction Addition "H" Pulse can be counted either at rising edge or falling edge. KCN-B KCN-S/W INA "L" "H" Pulse can be counted either at rising edge or falling edge. INB "L" Note: Counting occurs at the rising edge or falling edge. Two-Phase mode Subtraction KCN-T Addition "H" "L" "L" "H" "H" "L" "L" INA INB KCY "H" Note: Counting always occurs at rising edge. Duty factors at 5kcps KCX INA and INB in Two-Phase mode: 50 T (200 s) "H" KCX-RN INA "L" "H" INB KCH-B "L" T T 4 4 T 4 T 4 (50 s or more ) (50 s or more ) KCM Counting speed (cps) B-40 1 (s) T Minimum width that enables counting. Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Wiring Diagrams General purpose (KCN-S) Multifunction (KCN-W) KCN-4 Sensor power DC24V IN-A 15mA IN - B 6WR Sensor power DC24V IN-A 60mA Sensor power 0V IN-B Sensor power 0V R Reset input Count disable input INH KCN-A KCN-4 6SR R Reset input AC 100V AC100V 240V OUT1 Relay output 1 AC 200V OUT Relay output OUT2 Relay output2 KCN-4 6ST KCN-A Counter Functions IN - B Sensor power DC24V IN-A 60mA Sensor power 0V IN-B Sensor power 0V KCN-S/W KCN-4 6WT Sensor power DC24V IN-A 15mA Count disable input INH R Reset input KCN-B R Reset input OUT1 DC output 1 OUT DC output AC100V 240V AC 200V OUT2 DC output 2 0V Common output KCN-4 6SR-C KCN-4 IN - B 6WR-C Common input 0V IN-A IN-B Common input 0V Count disable input INH KCY IN-A 0V Common output KCN-T AC 100V R Reset input KCX R Reset input OUT1 Relay output 1 KCN-4 6ST-C KCN-4 IN-A IN - B DC power DC12 24V KCX-RN OUT2 Relay output2 DC power DC24V 6WT-C Common input 0V IN-A IN-B Common input 0V Count disable input INH KCH-B OUT Relay output R Reset input R Reset input OUT2 DC output 2 DC power DC24V 8.5 1.7 6.3 Dimensions of Terminal Block 0V Common output DC power DC12 24V Wire section: 0.25 to 1.65mm2 Conforming crimped contact: 1.25-3 M3 screw 7.62 1.32 10.55 0V Common output 5.2 OUT DC output KCM OUT1 DC output 1 6.3 1.32 B-41 Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Counter Functions I/O Circuit Diagrams AC Power Sensor power source DC24V DC Power For relay output 2 For relay output DC24V 12 source 24VV 8 ON for negative input 13 KCV KCN-A 15k IN A 15k 11 KCN-S/W KCN-B Reset 4 IN B 4 15k 15k 8 5V OUT1 KCN-T 8 5V 3.3k 7 7 Reset 15k 15k 10 OUT2 10 OUT2 Count disable input OUT1 3.3k 5V 5V 3.3k Count disable input 6 15k 11 0V 0V 5 KCY 11 3.3k 3.3k 6 15k 11 0V 0V 5 For general purpose counters. 1.8 k for multifunction models. Input Wiring Examples (count, reset and count disable) Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output KCX OUT2 5V 3.3k IN B 10 3 OUT2 5V 9 3.3k 10 3 IN A OUT1 5V 9 3.3k 8 ON for negative input OUT1 5V Internal circuit Input logic: Positive (voltege) input (pos) Input mode: Addition and Subtraction separate inputs (ad. sb.) KCX-RN Brown (Red) Addition KCH-B Subtraction Black (White) Black (White) KCM Black (White) Black (White) Blue (Black) 2 24V sensor power 3 IN A Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg) Input mode: Addition and Subtraction separate inputs (ad. sb.) Brown (Red) 2 24V sensor power Addition Subtraction 4 IN B Black (White) 3 IN A 4 IN B Black (White) Black (White) 7 Reset 7 Reset 6 Count disable input Black (White) 6 Count disable input Blue (Black) 5 0V Recommended proximity swith: APS - B-42 Proximity switch with NPN open collector output 5 0V -T E2 Recommended proximity swith: APS - -N E Rotary encoder Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg) Input mode: Addition and Subtraction separate inputs (ad. sb.) Addition White 3 24 V sensor power Red Green (Blue) IN A Black Subtraction 4 2 24 V sensor power 3 IN A IN B White KCN-A 2 Input logic: Positive or negative to be set according to encoder output Input mode: Two-phase (quad) KCN-A DC 2-wire proximity switch Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Counter Functions 4 IN B 7 Reset 5 0V KCN-S/W Black 6 Count disable inpurt 5 0V -Z Recommended proximity switch: TRD-J -RZ 20V or more is required for multifunction DC source voltage. TRD-GK -RZ S KCN-B Recommended proximity switch: APS - R Switch or relay 2 24V sensor power 3 IN A 4 7 Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg) Input mode: Addition and Subtraction separate inputs (ad. sb.) Counting speed: 30cps 2 24V sensor power 3 IN A IN B 4 IN B Reset 7 Reset Addition 6 Count disable input 6 Count disable input 5 0V 5 0V KCX Subtraction KCX-RN Subtraction KCY Addition KCN-T Input logic: Positive (voltage) input (pos) Input mode: Addition and Subtraction separate inputs (ad. sb.) Counting speed: 30cps KCH-B This connection is preferable to accommodate high input current. Output Wiring Examples NPN open collector output Relay output OUT1 8 8 Load KCM May be driven by relay. Load OUT1 MAX.100mA OUT2 10 9 Load 10 Load OUT2 0V 11 11 Load power rated at 24 V B-43 Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Counter Functions Front Panel Layout and Description Front panel Preset value Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode. Output status OUT1: First preset output OUT2: Second preset output Measurement unit Hz: counts per second ms: output duratuin in the One Shot mode KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Count (zero-suppressed) Character height: 13 mm for 4-digit display 10 mm for 6-digit display Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode. MODE Reset key Resets initial settings in the Setup mode. Response time: 0.1 second RST ENT MODE key: Used to change display mode or operation key at the mode. Press this key and the same time to change operation mode between Run and Setup. Single/dual-preset mode display SET1: First setting SET2: Second setting. ENTER key: Used to write settings. KCX key: Used to select a digit or set its value. KCM KCH-B KCX-RN Right arrow key: Press this key to shift one digit to the right. B-44 KCN-S/KCN-W Electronic Counters Counter Functions Operating procedures 1. KCN-S General purpose counters Switching between Setup mode and Run mode Run mode Setup mode Press the MODE key and the key at the same time for at least 0.5 second. Press the MODE key and the key at the same time for at least 0.5 second, or leave the system in the Setup mode for one minute. * 0 1. 0 0 0 Select digit: Prescale scale KCN-A Power on Setting at 0" cannot be made. MODE Select number 0 Select new value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The minus sigh (-) can be selected only for the highest digit. 3 4 5 6 Select display range. Decimal point Store new value point 7 8 9 follows: Initializing the counter h h h h h digit before the decimal point is set. Select decimal point setting mode MODE Select counting speed n n n n n h. * h denotes the ones' h Counting speed 2 speed Select decimal point position MODE 5 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 * KCN-T ENT 1 9 (-) KCN-B Select digit KCN-S/W Go to the Run mode screen, and change the value as KCN-A Changing a preset value (CPS) .n .n .n .n .n .n Select input mode in MODE Select reset key mode Reset key mode * q u a d a . d s . b (two-phase) reset (addition or subtraction) * MODE Select count memory Count memory e n a b d i s a (enable reset key) (disable reset key) KCY Input mode count 1. After you change a current setting, always press the ENT key to store the new value. indicates a value set at delivery. 2. 3. After you change an initial setting, always press the RST key to reset the count. 4. The displayed count is determined by the prescale and the decimal point location. For example, if the prescale is set to 1.200 and the decimal point is set as nnn.nHn, each pulse input increments the count as follows: 0.012 0.024 0.036 0.048 0.060... Select operation mode Operation mode c-dtr MODE u p * d n (addition) (subtraction) Select input logic Input logic signl MODE * p o s n e g positive (voltage input) negative (no voltage input) Select output mode Output mode The following table lists the KCN series models and their initial settings: MODE 1 * (Mode 1) 2 Item (Mode 2) Model Counting speed out 0 1 0 0 ms * Select digit: Output duration Output duration can be set or changed only in Output Mode 2. The lowest digitI is fixed at 0", and cannot be changed. Setting at 0" cannot be made. MODE Select number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 KCN-6SR-1879 KCN-6SR-C-1770 KCN-6ST-C-1865 30cps 1kcps Count memory Addition or subtraction Backup at power failure Backup at power failure Operation mode Addition Input mode Input logic Positive Output mode Mode 1 Prescale 1,000 Decimal point No Reset key Enabled KCM c-op KCX Notes: r e t n KCX-RN * c l e r (power-on reset) (memory backup) KCH-B MODE Negative B-45 KCV Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Counter Functions 2. KCN-W Multifunction Single Preset Mode Switching between Setup mode and Run mode Power on Run mode Setup mode Press the MODE key and the key at the same time for at least 0.5 second. Press the MODE key and the key at the same time for at least 0.5 second, or leave the system in the Setup mode for one minute. Changing a preset value Go to the Run mode screen, and change the value as follows: out-t KCN-A Select digit KCN-S/W Output duration can be set or changed only in Output Mode 2 or 3. The lowest digit fixed at 0", and cannot be changed. Setting at 0" cannot be made. MODE Select new value ENT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (-) Select number The minus sigh (-) can be selected only for the highest digit. Store new value 0 1 In the Setup mode, the counter can be initialized using the menu as 2 3 4 5 6 KCN-T 5 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 * Select number Select input mode 0 in 1 q u a d KCY KCX 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a . d s . b (addition or subtraction) Select display range. Decimal point Select count memory point count * c l e r h r e t n h h h h h n n n n n h.* h denotes the ones' digit before the decimal point is set. (power-on reset) (memory backup) MODE Select operation mode Operation mode c-dtr MODE 2 * (two-phase) Count memory MODE * MODE (CPS) Input mode MODE 9 Setting at "0" cannot be made. speed MODE 8 scale Select counting speed Counting speed 7 0 1. 0 0 0 Select digit Prescale Initializing the counter KCN-B 1 0 0 ms * Select digit OUT2 Output duration u p * Select decimal point position The operation mode can be changed in the Output Modes 1 to 4. d n (addition) (subtraction) Select decimal point setting mode KCX-RN .n .n .n .n .n .n Select input logic Input logic signl MODE KCH-B n e g reset negative (no voltage input) MODE Select set mode between single and dual preset Setmode prset MODE 2 * 1 Select output mode KCM c-op MODE 1 * 2 3 4 7 Selecting Mode 7 or 8 changes the operation mode to Addition. B-46 * e n a b d i s a enable reset key disable reset key Notes: (dual preset) (single preset) Output mode Select reset key mode Reset key * p o s positive (voltage input)) 8 1. After you change a current setting, always press the ENT key to store the new value. indicates a value set at delivery. 2. 3. After you change an initial setting, always press the RST key to reset the count. 4. The displayed count is determined by the prescale and the decimal point location. For example, if the prescale is set to 1.200 and the decimal point is set as nnn.nHn, each pulse input increments the count as follows: 0.012 0.024 0.036 0.048 0.060... KCN-S/KCN-W Electronic Counters Counter Functions 3. KCN-W Multifunction Dual Preset Mode Switching between Setup mode and Run mode Setup mode key at the same time for at least KCN-A 0.5 second, or leave the system in the Setup mode for one minute. Changing a preset value MODE SET2 out-t SET1 Output duration can be set or changed only in Output Mode 2,3, or 6. The lowest digit fixed at "0", and cannot be changed. Setting at "0" cannot be made. MODE Select number OUT1 Output duration Select digit out-t Output duration can be set or changed only in Output Mode 5 or 6. 1 0 0 ms * 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MODE Select new value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (-) The minus sigh (-) can be selected only for the highest digit. ENT * 0 1. 0 0 0 Select digit Prescale scale Store new value Setting at "0" cannot be made. Initializing the counter MODE In the Setup mode, the counter can be initialized using the menu as follows: Select number Select counting speed Counting speed 0 speed MODE 5 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 1 Select input mode Input mode 4 5 6 Select display range. point in h * q u a d 7 8 9 a . d s . b h h h h h n n n n n . h* H denotes the ones' digit before the decimal point is set. (two-phase) (addition or subtraction) MODE Select count memory Count memory count MODE 3 [Hz] Decimal point MODE 2 * KCY Switch preset value display Select digit OUT2 Output duration KCN-A Select Dual preset in the Setup mode, then switch to the Run mode to change the value as follows: KCN-S/W key at the same time for at least KCN-B Press the MODE key and the 0.5 second. Press the MODE key and the KCN-T Run mode Select decimal point setting mode Select decimal point position * c l e r r e t n KCX Power on (power-on reset) (memory backup) .n .n .n .n .n .n u p * The operation mode can be changed in the Output Modes 1 to 4. d n (addition) (subtraction) Select reset key mode Reset key reset MODE Select input logic Input logic * e n a b d i s a enable reset key disable reset key signl MODE p o s Notes: negative (no voltage input) Select set mode between single and dual preset Set mode prset MODE * n e g positive (voltage input) 2 * 1 (dual preset) (single preset) Select output mode Output mode c-op MODE * 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. After you change a current setting, always press the ENT key to store the new value. 2. indicates a value set at delivery. 3. After you change an initial setting, always press the RST key to reset the count. 4. The displayed count is determined by the prescale and the decimal point location. For example, if the prescale is set to 1.200 and the decimal point is set as nnn.nHn, each pulse input increments the count as follows: 0.012 0.024 0.036 0.048 0.060... Selecting Mode 7 or 9 changes the operation mode to Addition. B-47 KCH-B MODE KCM c-dtr KCX-RN Select operation mode Operation mode Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Timer Functions Timer option KCN-4S Series General Purpose 4-digit Counters can be used also as high-precision timers. To use the timer option, connect the pins 5 and 6 before turning the power on. Performance Specifications Mode Timer range Display Specification Response On Delay, Off Delay, One Shot, Flicker or Accumulate (Use keys to select one of these modes.) 0.01 99.99 seconds (Use keys to 0.1 999.9 seconds select one of 1 9999 seconds 1 second 99 minutes and 59 seconds these modes.) 1 minute 99 hours and 59 minutes KCN-T Input resistance Input voltage Start signal input Response Input resistance Input voltage Withstand voltage Reset input Either time elapsed or remaining (Use keys to select either mode.) Error caused by voltage or tem- 0.005 perature variation or 15ms, whichever is larger Start On Delay: Max. 15ms Off Delay: Max. 15ms Reset On Delay: Max. 5ms Off Delay: Max. 5ms Output NPN open collector or 1a contact (depending on the model) KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Item I/O Specifications Open collector output Relay output On Delay: Max. 15ms Off Delay: Max. 15ms Positive: 15k Negative: 3.3k L: 0 30V 3V H:7 On Delay: Max. 5ms Off Delay: Max. 5ms L 0 3V H 7 30V Max. 35V Current Max. 100mA Residual voltage Max. 2V Capacity Negative: 3.3k Positive: 15k AC220V 2A AC220V 0.5A DC30V 0.5A (resistance load) (cos =0.4) (L/R=7ms) Durability Min. 100,000 contacts Max. 200,000 contacts Max. 200,000 contacts Notes: 1. Start signal is required for the timer to be activated. 2. The timer starts with a delay of up to one second when activated by power input. 3. The timer value is written to the internal EEPROM when the power is turned off of the ENT key is pressed. The EEPROM allows up to 100,000 writes. Avoid turning the power off more than necessary. Output mode diagrams Mode A On Delay Addition Mode B Off Delay Addition Subtraction SET 0 0 Subtraction KCY SET Start KCX Start OUT Mode C KCX-RN Reset Reset OUT One Shot Addition SET Mode D Subtraction Addition SET2 SET1 0 0 KCH-B Start Start Reset Reset OUT OUT KCM Mode E B-48 Accumulation Flicker Subtraction Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Timer Functions Wiring Diagrams KCN-4SR KCN-4ST Sensor power C/T 0V Sensor power 0V C/T Sensor power DC24V Start 15mA R Reset input AC 100V AC 200V AC 100V OUT Relay output AC 200V 0V Common output OUT DC output KCN-4SR-C KCN-A R Reset input KCN-A Sensor power DC24V Start 15mA KCN-4ST-C Common input C/T 0V Start KCN-S/W Common input C/T 0V Start R Reset input KCN-B R Reset input 8.5 Wire section: 0.25 to 1.65 mm2 Conforming crimped contact: 1.25-3 KCY 10.55 1.7 5.2 and the M3 screw 7.62 1.32 DC power DC24V To use the timer option, connect the 0V pin C/T pin before turning the power on. 6.3 Dimensions of Terminal Block 0V Common output OUT DC output DC power DC24V 6.3 KCN-T OUT Relay output 1.32 I/O Circuit Diagrams Sensor power source DC24V For relay output Internal power source 24V 2 ON for nagative input KCX DC Power For relay output DC24V 2 10 Internal circuit ON for negative input 10 OUT OUT 13 11 11 5V 3.3k Start 3 15k 15k 10 OUT 10 OUT 5V 5V 3.3k 3.3k 7 Reset 7 Reset 15k 0V 5 KCM 3 KCH-B 5V 3.3k Start KCX-RN AC Power 15k 11 0V 0V 5 11 0V B-49 Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Timer Functions Input Wiring Examples (start and reset) Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output Proxoimity switch with NPN open collector output Input logic: Positive (voltage) input(pos) Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg) 2 24V sensor power KCV Brown (Red) Black (White) Start Black (White) KCN-A Reset KCN-B KCN-S/W Black (White) Start 3 KCN-T Black (White) Reset 7 Reset signal input Start signal input 7 Reset signal input 0V 5 0V 6 Counter/Timer switch 6 Counter/Timer switch -T Recommended proximity switch: APS - E2 -N Input logic: Positive (voltage) input (pos) 2 24V sensor power 3 Start signal input Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg) 2 24V sensor power 2 24V sensor power Start switch Start switch 3 Start signal input 3 Start signal input 7 Reset signal input 7 Reset signal input 7 Reset signal input 5 0V 5 0V 5 0V 6 Counter/Timer switch 6 Counter/Timer switch 6 Counter/Timer switch Reset switch Reset Recommended proximity switch: APS - Reset switch -Z Output Wiring Examples KCM NPN open collector output Relay output Compatible with relay drive OUT 10 10 Load MAX.100mA OUT 11 0V 11 Load power rated at 24 V B-50 E Switch or relay Start KCX 3 5 Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg) KCX-RN 24V sensor power Black (White) Recommended proximity switch: APS - KCY Black (White) Start signal input DC 2-wire proximity switch KCH-B 2 Brown (Red) Load KCN-S/KCN-W Electronic Counters Timer Functions Front Panel Layout and Description Front panel Count (zero-suppressed) Character height: 13 mm Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode. Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode. KCN-A Preset value H:M: hours: minutes M:S: minutes: seconds S: seconds Output status Flicker mode: 1- or 2-step KCN-A Measurement unit Resets initial settings in the Setup mode. Response time: 0.5 second KCN-S/W Reset key MODE RST ENTER key: ENT Used to store settings. Used to change display mode or operation mode. Press this key and the key at the same time to change operation mode between Run and Setup. key: Used to select a digit or set its value. Right arrow key: KCN-T Press this key to shift one digit to the right. Operating procedures Switching between Setup mode and Run mode Power on Run mode Setup mode Initializing the timer Select operation mode Operation mode Press the MODE key and the key at the same time for at least u p MODE * KCY t-dtr 0.5 second. Press the MODE key and the KCN-B MODE key: d n addition subtraction key at the same time for at least 0.5 second, or leave the system in the Setup mode for one minute. Select input logic Input logic signl Mode A B C E Mode D KCX * p o s MODE Changing a preset value n e g negative power input positive power input Select output mode Output mode MODE * a MODE Press the MODE key to select SET2 or SET1. b c d KCX-RN t-op e Select timer range Timer range MODE Select digit n. n n n* n n n. n n n n . n nnnn nnnn S S S M:S H:M Select reset key mode Reset key KCH-B range reset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MODE 9 * e n a b d i s a enable reset key disable reset key KCM Select new value ENT Store new value Notes: 1. After you change a current setting, always press the ENT key to store the new value. 2. indicates a value set at delivery. 3. After you change an initial setting, always press the RST key to reset the count. B-51 Counter/Timer Functions List of Error Codes Error code Count display Description Preset display Preset value Counter overflow Count has exceeded upper limit. - f f f f f Preset value Counter underflow Count has decreased below lower limit. p s e t p s e t 1 p s e t 2 Preset memory data error Preset value divided by prescale exceeds count range. The error code is followed by 1 or 2 to indicate SET1 or SET2 error. s p e e d Counting speed memory data error e r r KCN-S/W KCN-A c - o p Output mode memory data error o u t - t 1 Output duration memory data error o u t - t 1 2 OUT1 output duration memory data error o u t - t 2 2 OUT2 output duration memory data error s c a l e Prescale memory data error p o i n t Decimal point memory data error t - o p 1 Timer output mode memory data error r a n g e 1 Timer range memory data error KCN-T KCN-B 1: KCN-S only Notes: Solving errors For an overflow or underflow, press the RST key to reset the counter and clear the error code. For any other errors, press the ENT key to clear the error code then make the current settings. Set value KCN-S KCN-W KCY KCX First setting 1000 Second setting 5000 30cps Counting speed Operation Addition/subtraction separate inputs KCX-RN Count memory Power-on reset Counter mode Addition Input mode Negative Preset mode Dual preset Output mode Mode 1 OUT 2 output duration 100ms KCH-B OUT 1 output duration 100ms Prescale 1.000 Decimal point nnnnnh. Reset key Enabled Timer Item Set value First setting 10.00 Second setting 50.00 Operation Addition Input logic Negative Timer mode Mode A Timer range n n. n n (s) Reset key B-52 Enabled The counter continues counting even after an overflow or underflow has occurred. This is performed in the range of -2147483.648 to 2147483.647. The counter is self-checked for errors when its power is turned on. When an error occurs, counting and display are disabled except for overflow and underflow. Important Counter Item A memory data error occurs when the current settings do not produce a meaningful result. 2: KCN-W only Settings at delivery KCM Possible cause f f f f f f KCV Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W Using a relay, bring the power voltage quickly to the rated level. The KCN-W counters integrate a switching source circuit. Starting the counter causes a surge current to flow into the circuit and may prevent counter operation. Use a power source with a sufficient capacity to prevent the surge current. Keep the source voltage in the 20 to 30 V range for DC 2-wire proximity switch. After changing initial settings, always press the RST key to reset the counter. To use the counter as timer, connect the common input (sensor power) terminal 5 to the Counter-Timer switch terminal 6 then turn the power on. After you change the timer range from " S" to " M:S" or " H:M", check that the second digit of the preset value is set to a number less than 6. If necessary, correct the value to prevent a preset error. When you switch the function from timer to counter, re-enter the initial settings and preset value. Any changed preset value during counting is enabled by pressing the ENT key. For maintenance purposes, keep records of the initial settings and preset values. During counting, any change to a preset value become. Avoid using the counter in the environments where: (1)Ambient temperature is above 50 or below 10 . (2)Ambient humidity exceeds 85 , or abrupt temperature changes may cause dewing. (3)The operation may be affected by dust, metal chips, corrosive gases or other harmful objects. (4)The machine is exposed to direct sunlight. (5)You anticipate vibration or shock. Keep the following in mind when wiring: (1)The wiring to the counter should be separated from power line. (2)Keep the counter body and wiring away from noise sources. (3)Never use a free terminal as a relay. Isolate the counter from the control circuit before testing insulation voltage and resistance. External Dimensions (in mm) 90 (for AC power) KCN-A 44.5 48 KCN-A Mounting bracket Electronic Counters KCN-S/KCN-W 48 45 (50.4) 6 DC power AC power 10 55 (for DC power) 61mm 96mm KCN-B 63 Boring dimensions for Installation Mounting bracket 2. Vertically aligned handles 55 or more 70 or more 48 mm for tight alignment without KCN-T 1. Horizontally aligned handles the protective cover KCY 45 +0.3 0 45 +0.3 0 70 or more KCH-B KCX-RN KCX Protective cover KCM 48 +0.2 0 May be aligned tight. Square hole KCN-S/W Depth 1 to 5 mm thick panel Protective cover B-53 KCV Electronic Counters KCN-B Maximum counting speed: Preset Counters for Addition and Subtraction with Batch and Total Options 30cps or 1kcps (selected by keys) In addition to individual counts, these counters provide batch option to allow a set of counts to be added and displayed. Countup values can be preset for both individual counts and batches. They serve also as total counters that accumulate different counts. KCN-A Total Input pulses 4- or 6-digit preset counter Batches 4- or 6-digit batch preset counter Batches output (Displayed only in the batch mode) KCN-S/W Process output Merits KCN-T KCN-B Small body and easy to read display With its body of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the counter provides full screen display of either four-digit or six-digit numbers with the height of 13 mm or 10 mm. EEPROM to eliminate cell replacement The counter integrates an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells. The memory can store all counts, preset values and mode settings. Backlit LCD integrated in all models Displayed values are backlit to faciliate reading in darkness. Water proofed front panel Easy operation Countup values can be set or modified independently from initial settings. Changes can be made easily and quickly on site. Addition, subtraction or both operations are available. KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX KCY The keypad on the front panel is completely coated (IP64) to insulate dust and water. B-54 List of Models Model number system Single preset, nine modes including One Shot and Hold mode, prescaling and decimal point display KCN-6BR Source voltage Output type Sensor source Relay output 6-digit DC24V 60mA KCN-6BR KCN-A AC100 240V Electronic Counters KCN-B KCN-A R: Relay output KCN-S/W 6: 6-digit Item Specification Power consumption AC Sensor power AC AC90 264V Approx. 5VA DC 24V (20 28V) 60mA (Max. 10 p-p ripple) KCN-T AC Memory backup at power failure EEPROM (Up to 100,000 writes) Ambient temperature 10 50 Storage temperature 25 70 (with no freezing) RH (with no dewing) Withstand voltage AC 2kV for one minute Insulation resistance 20M Vibration resistance Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude Shock resistance Durable for 11ms along three axes at 490m/s2(50G) No error for 11ms along three axes at 98m/s2 (10G) (AC: For each of AC input, 0V and relay output interconnections, DC: between 0V and relay output) 1.5 kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1 Coating IP64 for the keypad on the front panel against dust and splash. Installation Flush mounting Connection Terminal block Mass (weight) Approx. 150 g s width and 1ns rise time) KCH-B Noise tests also include static discharge test and NEMA compliance tests. KCM Noise resistance or more at DC 500V KCX 85 KCX-RN Ambient/Storage humidity 35 KCY Source voltage KCN-B General Specifications B-55 KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCN-B Performance Specifications Specification Item Model Addition and subtration counter with batch option / Addition and subtration counter with total option Setting One step for both normal mode and batch option Number of digits 6 digits Setting range 6 digits: Counting speed 30cps or 1kcps (selected by keys) Pulse input Separate, Concurrent or two-phase (selected by keys) Input logic Positive (voltage) or negative (no voltage) (selected by keys) External reset input Minimum pulse width: 5ms Auto reset Responded within 0.5ms Manual reset Responded within 0.1s Power reset Power shutdown: 1s or more Reset duration: 1s or less (until restart) Output Relay contact (1a) Output mode Nine modes including One Shot and Hold (selected by keys) One Shot mode Output duration in One Shot mode: 10 9990 ms (selected by keys in 10ms increments) 99999 999999 Maximum counting speed Relay output 30cps Max. 40ms 1kcps Max. 11ms I/O response Decimal point display Any location (selected by keys) Available only in normal mode and total mode with separate settings. Prescaling 6 digits: 0.001 99.999 (Available only in normal mode and total mode in the same range.) Count block Not available KCY I/O Specifications Input speed 30cps 1kcps Count input Positive: 15k Input resistance Negative: 3.3k KCX-RN KCX Input voltage External reset input normal and batch Relay output Input response Capacity for DC models) L: 0 3V H: 7 30V On delay: Max. 5ms Off delay: Max. 5ms Positive: 15k Input resistance Negative: 3.3k Input voltage (1.8k (1.8k for DC models) L: 0 3V H: 7 30V AC220V 2A AC220V 0.5A DC30V 0.5A (resistance load) (cos =0.4) (L/R=7ms) KCM KCH-B Durability Min. 100,000 contacts Min. 200,000 contacts Min. 200,000 contacts B-56 Output modes (Batch counter) OUT1 individual count OUT2 batch count Count Signal output 1 Continued Held 2 Reset Mode2 Mode3 OUT2: Held Count: Continued Subtraction Addition Signal output SET2 Held Continued One shot 10 9990ms KCN-A 0 Continued Held 4 Reset 5 6 One shot 10 9990ms Reset 2 Reset One shot 10 9990ms Continued Held 7 8 OUT2 Mode4 Continued One shot 10 9990ms Continued Mode5 Mode6 OUT2: One shot Count: Reset Reset 9 Subtraction Addition SET2 KCN-S/W Only Modes 1 to 3 of OUT1 are avairable for the Total counter. 0 Reset 2 Output mode diagrams OUT2 1) Normal counting (Only Modes 1 to 3 for Total counter) Mode7 Mode8 Mode9 OUT2: One shot Mode7 OUT1: Held Count: Continued SET2 Subtraction Addition SET1 0 0 Reset 2 KCN-T Mode4 Count: Continued Subtraction Addition Mode1 KCN-A 3 Count Mode1 KCN-B Mode No 2) Batch counting Electronic Counters KCN-B KCY OUT2 Reset 1 OUT1 3) Totaling (Accumulates normal counts) Mode5 Mode8 OUT1: One shot Count: Reset Subtraction Addition Mode1 SET1 Mode2 Mode3 OUT2: None Count: Continued Normal count Total count Addition KCX Mode2 Subtraction KCX-RN 0 SET1 Reset 1 0 OUT1 Mode6 Mode9 Addition SET1 OUT1: One shot Count: Continued Reset 2 KCH-B Mode3 Subtraction Note: 10 ms to 9.99s in One Shot mode KCM 0 Reset 1 OUT1 B-57 Electronic Counters KCN-B Counting timing Wiring Diagrams Two-Phase pulse input KCN-6BR Subtraction Addition Sensor power DC24V 60mA IN-A "H" IN-B Sensor power 0V RESET 1: reset normal count IN A "L" "H" RESET2 reset batch or total count IN B KCV "L" T T 4 T 4 4 T T 4 T 4 KCN-A T 4 T 4 T OUT1 relay output 1 for normal counting AC100V 240V OUT2 relay output 2 for batch counting Separate positive (voltage) input Addition Subtraction "H" In Subtraction mode, "IN A" pulse is counted either at rising edge or falling edge. IN A "L" KCN-S/W T 4 T T 2 2 T "H" IN B "L" In Addition mode, "IN B" pulse in counted either at rising edge or falling edge. T T KCN-B 2 2 T Addition "H" IN A "L" Subtraction In Subtraction mode, "IN A" pulse is counted either at rising edge or falling edge. T 2 2 IN B "L" In Addition mode, "IN B" pulse in counted either at rising edge or falling edge. 8.5 1.7 "H" 5.2 KCY T T T 2 1.32 KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX T Note: The counter can be set so as to count pulse either at rising edge or falling edge. B-58 Required speed (cps) 1 T sec Wire section: 0.25 to 1.65 mm2 Conforming crimped contact: 1.25-3 M3 screw 7.62 2 6.3 T Dimensions of Terminal Block 10.55 KCN-T Separate negative (no voltage) input 6.3 1.32 Electronic Counters KCN-B Front Panel Layout and Description Front panel Count (zero-suppressed) Preset value or count MODE Reset key RST ENT KCN-T Resets initial settings in the Setup mode. Response time: 0.1 second In the Count Display mode, individual count, batches or total is displayed. In the Preset Display mode, individual preset or batch preset is displayed. Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode. KCN-B Output status KCN-S/W KCN-A KCN-A Normal count, batches or total is displayed as selected in the Run mode. Character height: 10mm for 6-digit Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode. MODE key: ENTER key: Used to change display mode or operation mode. Press this key and the key at the same time to change operation mode between Run and Setup. KCY Used to store settings. key: KCX Used to select a digit or set its value. Right arrow key: KCM KCH-B KCX-RN Press this key to shift one digit to the right. B-59 KCV Electronic Counters KCN-B Operating procedures Switching between Setup mode and Run mode Power on Run mode Setup mode Press the MODE key and the key at the same time for at least 0.5 second. Press the MODE key and the key at the same time for at least 0.5 second, Select output mode Output mode c-op or leave the system in the Setup mode for one minute. Changing display mode in the Run mode MODE * 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Only Modes 1 to 3 are available for the Total option. Individual count Batch/total count Individual preset KCN-A out-t1 preset value is not (Adisplayed in the total counter. ) This output duration can be set or changed only in Output Modes 2,3,5,6,8 and 9. The lowest digit is fixed at "0", and cannot be changed. Setting at 0" cannot be made. MODE out-t2 This output duration can be set or changed only in Output Modes 4 to 9. 0 1 Select digit scale 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1. 0 0 0 Select digit Prescale 0 2 MODE Go to the Run mode screen, and change the value as follows: * (for individual or total counting) Setting "0" cannot be mode 9 (-) MODE The minus sign (-) can be selected only for the highest digit. ENT Select number OUT2 Output duration Batch/total count Changing a preset value Select new value KCN-T Individual count Individual count KCN-B KCN-S/W Batch/total count 0 1 0 0 ms * Select digit OUT1 Output duration Batch preset Select number Store new value 0 Initializing the counter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 KCY In the Setup mode, the counter can be initialized using the menu as follows: Select counting speed Counting speed point1 speed KCX MODE KCX-RN (for individual counting) h Decimal point point2 in h h h H denotes the one digit before the decimal point is set. (for total counting) Select decimal point position a . d s b. Two-phase h n n n n n h.* Select dicimal point setting mode * q u a d Separate MODE Select count memory Count memory h MODE Select input mode n. n. n. n. n. n. count MODE * c l e r r e t n Power-on reset Memory backup c-dtr MODE u p * d n Addition This selection is available only in Output Modes 1 to 6. Subtraction Select input logic signl MODE * p o s n e g Positive (Voltage input) Negative (No voltage input) Select Batch or Total option Batch/total option op MODE B-60 * b a o h Batch counter Select reset key mode Reset key reset MODE Select operation mode Operation mode Input logic KCM * [Hz] Input mode MODE KCH-B 1 0 0 0 3 0 Select display range Decimal point t o t 1 Total counter * e n a b Enable e n a 2 Enable only in batch or total mode e n a 1 Enable only in normal mode d i s a Disable Notes: 1. After you change a current setting, always press the ENT key to store the new value. 2. indicates a value set at delivery. 3. After you change an initial setting, always press the RST key to reset the count. 4. The displayed count is determined by the prescale and the decimal point location. For example, if the prescale is set to 1.200 and the decimal point is set as nnn.nHn, each pulse input increments the count as follows: 0.012 0.024 0.036 0.048 0.060... Count display Preset display f f f f f f - f f f f f Preset value Counter overflow Preset value Counter underflow Preset memory data error Preset value divided by prescale exceeds count range. The error code is followed by 1 or 2 to indicate SET1 or SET2 error. p s e t 2 p s e t 1 e r r s p e e d c - o p o u t - t 1 o u t - t 2 s c a l e Counting speed memory data error p o i n t 1 Decimal point memory data error (individual counting) p o i n t 2 Decimal point memory data error (total counting) Output mode memory data error OUT1 output duration memory data error OUT2 output duration memory data error Prescale memory data error For an overflow or underflow, press the RST key to reset the counter and clear the error code. For any other errors, press the ENT key to clear the error code then correct the current settings. Notes: The counter continues counting even after an overflow or underflow has occurred. This is performed in the range of -2147483.648 to 2147483.647. The counter is automatically checked for errors when is power is turned on. When an error occurs, counting and display are disabled except for overflow and underflow. KCN-A Solving errors Description KCN-S/W Error code KCN-A List of Error Codes Electronic Counters KCN-B KCN-B A memory data error occurs when the current settings do not produce a meaningful result. Important KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX KCY KCN-T For DC power source, the 0V terminal 13 and common input(0V) terminal 5 are short circuited. Using a relay, bring the power voltage quickly to the rated level. Always select negative (no voltage) input for DC 2-wire proximity switch. After changing initial settings, always press the RST key to reset the counter. During counting, and change to a preset value becomes effective when the ENT key is pressed. For maintenance purposes, keep records of the initial settings and preset values. A void using the counter in the environments where: (1)Ambient temperature is above 50 or below 10 (2)Ambient humidity exceeds 85 , or abrupt temperature changes may cause dewing. (3)The operation may be affected by dust, metal chips, corrosive gases or other harmful objects. (4)The machine is exposed to direct sunlight. (5)You anticipate vibration or shock. Keep the following in mind when wiring: (1)The wiring to the counter should be separated from power line. (2)Keep the counter body and wiring away from noise sources. (3)Never use a free terminal as a relay. Isolate the counter from the control circuit before testing insulation voltage and resistance. B-61 Electronic Counters KCN-B External Dimensions (in mm) KCN-A 48 44.5 KCV Mounting bracket 1 to 5 mm thick panel KCN-S/W Protective cover 80 48 (50.4) 6 10 90 (for DC power) Depth KCN-B 63 96mm Boring dimensions for Installation 1. Horizontally aligned handles KCN-T Mounting bracket 2.Vertically aligned handles 55 or more 70 or more 48 mm for tight alignment without the protective cover 45 +0.3 0 Hole 45 +0.3 0 KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX Protective cover B-62 70 or more May be aligned tight. 48 +0.2 0 KCY Sguare Maximum counting speed: Small Total Counters Electronic Counters KCN-T 30cps, 1kcps (4 digits) or 5kcps (6 digits) KCN-A KCN-A With the small body, the total counter features an LCD display as large as possible to facilitate reading. KCN-S/W List of Models Accessories: lnstallation frame, key protective cover. Small body and easy to see display With its body of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the counter provides full screen display of either four-digit or six-digit numbers with the height of 13 mm or 10 mm. Source voltage 4-digit 6-digit AC power KCN-4T KCN-6T DC power KCN-4T-C KCN-6T-C KCN-B Merits Backlit LCD display KCN-T Displayed values are backlit to faciliate reading in darkness. DC power as thin as 55 mm KCY With minimum space requirement, the control board can be installed anywhere. 55mm KCX-RN KCX AC power is 90 mm thick. 61mm EEPROM to eliminate cell replacement KCH-B The counter integrates an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells. All counts are stored in this memory. Water proofed front panel KCM The keypad on the front panel is completely coated (IP64) to insulate dust and water. Keypad cover to prevent erroneous operation A keypad cover is attached to protect the Reset key from being pressed during operation. B-63 KCX-RN KCX KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCN-T General Specifications Specification Item Source voltage AC 85 Power consumption Approx. 5VA Sensor power DC 24V (20 Memory backup at power failure EEPROM (Up to 100,000 writes) KCH-B 115V or AC 180 Ambient temperature 10 50 Storage temperature 25 70 DC 20 240V 28V (Max. 10 8V) 15mA (Max. 10 p-p ripple) None (with no freezing) 35 Withstand voltage AC 2kV for one minute between AC power and 0V Insulation resistance Min. 20M Vibration resistance Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.5mm amplitude No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.35mm amplitude Shock resistance Durable for 11ms along three axes at 490m/s2(50G) 85 RH (with no dewing) at DC 500V between AC power and 0V No error for 11ms along three axes at 98m/s2(10G) 1.5kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1 Noise resistance s width and 1ns rise time Coating IP64 for the keypad on the front panel againgst dust and splash. Installation Flush mounting Connection Terminal block Mass (weight) p-p ripple) Approx. 2W Ambient/Storage humidity Approx. 220g Approx. 110g Noise tests also include static discharge test and NEMA compliance tests. Performance Specifications Item Specification Model Total counters Number of digits 4-digit (KCN-4T and KCN-4T-C) / 6-digit (KCN-6T and KCN-6T-C) Count display Backlit LCD with character height of 13mm (4-digit) or 10mm (6-digit) Counting speed 30cps with terminals Counting direction Addition: Count increments when input signal to 0V terminal changes from High to Low. Input logic Negative: ON when input voltage is 0V External reset input Minimum pulse width: 5ms Manual reset Responded within 100ms Count disable Response time On delay: Max. 2.5ms Off delay: Max. 2.5ms to disconnected Input Specifications Counting speed Count input Input resistance Input voltage 4-digit: 30cps or 1kcps 6-digit: 30cps or 5kcps 3.3k between 24V and input ON: 0 3V OFF: 7 30V Response On delay: Max. 2.5ms time Off delay: Max. 2.5ms KCM DC power AC power Input Count disable resistance input Input voltage 3.3k between 24V and input ON: 0 3V OFF: 7 30V Response On delay: Max. 5ms time Off delay: Max. 5ms Input External reset resistance input Input voltage B-64 3.3k between 24V and input ON: 0 3V OFF: 7 30V 1kcps (4-digit) or 5kcps (6-digit) with terminals to connected Counting timing Pulse input L Ta Input circuit The count increments by 1 at the time indicated by the down arrow. H Tb Electronic Counters KCN-T 5V 24V 3.3 k T Input pulse 15 k KCN-A Counting speed (cps) 1/T(s). This formula should be modified to 1/2 Tb or 1/2 Ta if Ta is larger than Tb or vice versa. 0V common input KCN-A Count diagram KCN-S/W Pulse input KCN-B Reset KCN-T Count disable Count KCY Note: Each signal is ON at Low level, and OFF at High level. Wiring Diagrams Counting speed switch CNT SPEED IN-A Count disable input INH 0V common input Counting speed switch CNT SPEED KCX-RN 0V common input R Reset input R Reset input KCH-B Count disable input IN H AC 100V AC 200V KCM Sensor power DC24V IN-A 15mA KCN-4T-C KCN-6T-C KCX KCN-4T KCN-6T DC power DC24V B-65 Electronic Counters KCN-T List of Error Codes Error code Description f f f f f f Counter overflow KCV Solving errors For an overflow, press the RST key to reset the counter and clear the error code. Note: The counter continues counting even after on overflow has occurred. This is performed in the range of 0 to 2147483.647. For DC power source, the 0V terminal 13 and common input (0V) terminal 5 are short circuited. Using a relay, bring the power voltage quickly to the rated level. Avoid using the counter in the environments where: (1) Ambient temperature is above 50 or below -10 . (2) Ambient humidity exceeds 85%, or abrupt temperature changes may cause dewing. KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A Important (3)The operation may be affected by dust, metal chips, corrosive gases or other harmful objects. (4)The machine is exposed to direct sunlight. (5)You anticipate vibration or shock. Keep the following in mind when wiring: (1)The wiring to the counter should be separated from power line. (2)Keep the counter body and wiring away from noise sources. (3)Never use a free terminal as a relay. Isolate the counter from the control circuit before testing insulation voltage and resistance. KCN-T External Dimensions (in mm) 90 (for AC power) KCX 48 44.5 KCY Mounting bracket Protective cover Depth 1 to 5 mm thick panel KCX-RN 48 45 (50.4) 6 DC power AC power 10 55 (for DC power) 61mm 96mm 63 Boring dimensions for Installation KCH-B 1. Horizontally aligned handles Mounting bracket 2. Vertically aligned handles 55 or more 70 or more 48mm for tight alignment without the protective cover 45 +0.3 0 Protective cover B-66 70 or more 45 +0.3 0 May be aligned tight. 48 +0.2 0 KCM Square hole KCY Electronic Counters Small Electronic Counters for Addition, Addition/Subtraction or Totalizing (Add/Sub) Maximum counting speed: 2-digit: 10Hz or 1kHz 4-digit: 10Hz or 5kHz KCN-A With the DIN standard of only 48 mm by 48 mm, these counters integrate advanced functions. Operation modes include addition, addition and subtraction with or without manual reset, and totalling. Merits Easy setting Countup values can be easily set and confirmed any time. Changes can be made also when the power is OFF. Quick response KCN-B The front panel is completely coated to insulate dust and water. This cover also serves to prevent wrong operation. KCY-2/4 Addition Counters Relay output: AV250V 2A la relay contact Open collector: DC24V 30 mA (NPN output) 2- or 4-digit display with input and output indicators. One Shot output or Hold mode is available. KCN-T No voltage relay contact (1a) or open collector output KCN-S/W KCN-A DIN 48 48 small body for minimum space requirement KCY-4 Built-in 24V sensor source Memory backup at power failure Subtraction 0 ON Output Count Count Preset value 0 Preset value KCM Addition KCY-4D KCH-B The counter can be either flush mounting or wall surface mounting. KCX-RN A large volume capacitor is also integrated to assure memory backup of 100 hours or 4 days. It supports maximum security with minimum maintenance. ON Output Addition and subtraction Count Preset value Addition Subtraction 0 KCX 2- or 4-digit count display Addition, Subtraction or concurrent mode is available. Two-phase or separate pulse input for concurrent operation. Allows concurrent inputs of addition and subtraction. One Shot output option and Hold option are available. KCY KCY-2D/4D Addition and Subtraction Counters Each counter incorporates a DC24V 15 mA source available for a proximity switch or other external device. ON Output B-67 Electronic Counters KCY Specifications Addition Model number KCY-2-G/H Addition and Subtraction Counting speed KCV KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A External reset input Auto reset Output respomse time KCN-T KCY KCX 1 KCY-4D-G/H 2-digit 4-digit 10cps or 1kcps 10cps or 5kcps Input resistance 4.7k Input voltage "L"0 Response time On delay: 5ms Off delay: 5ms Input resistance 4.7k with pullup to 24V in negative mode 6V "H"16 30V On delay: 3ms Off delay: 3ms with pullup to 24V in negative mode Input voltage "L"0 Response time Max. 1ms NPN open collector NPN output: DC 24V 30mA Withstand voltage: 35V Residual voltage: Max. 1.5V Relay output 1a contact: AC 250V 2A Electrical durability 200,000 contacts Mechanical durability 50,000,000 contacts open collector 10cps: Approx. 30ms 1kcps: Approx. 200 s 10cps: Approx. 30ms 5kcps: Approx. 100 s Relay output 10cps: Approx. 40ms 1kcps: Approx. 10ms 10cps: Approx. 40ms 5kcps: Approx. 10ms Output Power-on reset Shutdown time Reset time 1 6V "H"16 30V Max. 0.2ms Min. 500ms 2 Min. 500ms Sensor power DC+24V 15mA Withstand voltage AC 2kV for one minute for each of AC input, 0V and relay output interconnections Vibration resistance (Complies with JIS C0911) Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.5mm amplitude No error for one hour along three axes 10 to 55Hz with 0.35mm amplitude Noise resistance 1kV (square wave pulse with 1 Source voltage KCY- Power consumption With count display: Approx. 6VA -G: AC 85 115V s width) KCY- Ambient temperature 10 50 C Storage temperature 25 70 C (with no freezing) Ambient/Storage humidity 35 85 -H: AC 180 240V Without count display: Approx. 5VA RH (with no dewing) Weight Approx. 200g Accessory Mounting bracket, protective cover 1 Time required for the internal circuit to detect power failure 2 Time requited for the counter to restart after its power is turned on. KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCY-2D-G/H Number of digits Count input KCY-4-G/H B-68 Electronic Counters KCY Terminal Assignment Terminal number 7 8 4 9 3 2 10 1 11 2 AC 110V power source (free on KCY- 3 Common negative input/output 4 DC 5 Count input IN B (Subtraction) (free on KCY- 6 Count input IN A (Addition) (free on KCY- 7 Reset 8 Open collector output (free on KCY-4T) -H) 24V 15mA sensor power 9 Relay contact output (free on KCY-4T) 10 Power source AC 0V 11 Relay contact output (free on KCY-4T) ) ) KCN-A 5 KCN-A 1 6 Function AC 200/220V power source (free on KCY- -G) Note: Terminals 1,2,5,8,9 and 11 may be left unused. Do not use them as relay terminals. KCY- KCN-B I/O Circuits KCN-S/W Rear side -D 4.7K Max. 30mA 33K IN A 8 6 Positive load power Load 24V Max. 24V 2.2K 33K IN B 5 24V 9 KCX Max. 6mA Internal circuit 4.7K KCY Max. 6mA KCN-T 24V 11 2.2K 4.7K Reset KCX-RN 33K 7 Max. 6mA 2.2K KCY- -G 24V 24V sensor power 4 24V AC V 2 AC100V 1 AC200 220V -H KCM KCY- 10 KCH-B 5V 3 Note: Terminal 5 is unused and Terminal 6 is "IN" on the KCY-2/KCY-4 addition counters. B-69 Electronic Counters KCY Operating procedures Mode selection To select the counter modes, use the four switches (or two switches on the addition counters) located on the left side of the counter. Note: The available dip switches are Switches 1 and 2 on the addition counters, and Switches 1,3 and 4 on the total counters. 2 3 Switch 4 Mode selected at position A at position B B 1 Counting speed 1kcps or 5 kcps 10cps A 2 Signal output One shot Hold Switch 1: Counting speed 3 Pulse count 4 Operation Two-phase Separate Addition Subtraction Switch 2: Signal output This switch is used to set or change the maximum counting speed. Turn the switch to Position A to select 1k cps for 2-digit counters, or 5k cps for 4-digit counters. Move it to Position B to select 10 cps for 2-digit and 4-digit counters. Position B is used for contact output, and Position A for no contact output. KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV 1 Use this switch to switch the output mode between One Shot and Hold. In the One Shot mode, the counter generates a signal upon countup, and turns it off after 100 ms. The count is reset upon countup. In the Hold mode, the counter generates a signal upon countup. Both the signal output and the count are retained until reset. The following charts compare the two modes of the addition counter. H L Relay contact Preset value Count KCY KCN-T Pulse input 0 Limit switch 1 2 3 4 KCX B Signal output ON OFF One Shot mode A 1 2 3 4 KCH-B KCX-RN B A H Pulse input L Proximity switch Preset value KCM Count 0 Rotary encoder 1 2 3 4 B A Signal output Reset ON OFF H L Hold mode 1 2 3 4 B A B-70 Electronic Counters KCY Switch 3: Pulse count (Unavailable on KCY-2 and KCY-4 counters) This switch changes the pulse count mode between Two-Phase (90 dephased) or Separate. Separate mode Addition Subtraction 3 4 Counted either at rising edge or falling edge L B A H Counted either at rising edge or falling edge IN B L KCN-A IN A 2 1 H Addition IN B 2 1 3 4 H L L B H H A L L KCN-S/W IN A Subtraction H KCN-A Two-Phase mode Switch 4: Operation (Unavailable on KCY-2, KCY-4 and KCY-4T counters) KCN-B This switch changes the operation mode between Addition and Subtraction. Addition mode H L Pulse input 1 Preset value 2 3 4 KCN-T Reset B 0 ON OFF H L KCY Output A KCX B Count Subtraction mode H L Pulse input Preset value 1 2 3 4 A Count Reset KCX-RN Output 0 ON OFF H L D Addition and Subtraction Counters Separate mode Addition Subtraction H IN A Counted either at rising edge or falling edge L KCM KCY- KCH-B Counting timing H Counted either at rising edge or falling edge IN B Two-Phase mode L Subtraction Addition IN A IN B H H L L H H L L On the KCY- Series counters, the only option is the Pulse input A in the Separate mode shown above. B-71 Electronic Counters KCY Pulse input requirements KCY- D, Addition and Subtraction Counters Separate mode IN A Repeated additions or subtractions H H IN A L KCV ta KCN-A KCN-S/W KCN-B KCN-T ta IN A IN B L L Both A and B can be counted at the same time if the pulse width and interval are equal to or longer than the specified time. H L ta tb tc td te and tf must be: 50 s or more for 4-digit counters 250 s or more for 2-digit counters H IN B tb H Two-Phase mode L tc On the KCY- td te tf Series counters, the only option is the Pulse input A in the Separate mode shown above. Reset input The reset signal input initializes the counter with negative input logic. This signal input resets the addition count to zero or the subtraction count to the preset value, and turns off the output signal. After reset, the counter must be restarted to resume operation. On the KCY-4T counter, the count can be manually reset to zero. Signal output KCY- KCY tb H IN B L Addition Counters Power One Shot mode Pulse input ON OFF H L Preset value KCX Count 0 KCX-RN Output Reset input KCH-B Hold mode Power Pulse input ON OFF H L ON OFF H L Preset value Count KCM 0 Output Reset input B-72 ON OFF H L 100ms 100ms KCY- Electronic Counters KCY D, Addition and Subtraction Counters Addition OFF H L Pulse input Hold mode Power H L Pulse input Preset value Preset value Count Count 0 ON Output OFF H Reset input L ON OFF KCN-A Power ON 0 ON OFF H Reset input L Output KCN-A One Shot mode Subtraction Power ON OFF H Pulse input L Hold mode Power KCN-S/W One Shot mode ON OFF H Pulse input L Preset value Count KCN-T H L KCY Reset input KCX Output KCX-RN H L 0 ON OFF KCH-B Reset input 0 ON OFF KCM Count Output KCN-B Preset value B-73 Electronic Counters KCY Connecting to input device Relay input Using KF-04 socket for wall surface mounting Using KB-04 socket for flush mounting INA INB KCN-A KCN-S/W 4 5 6 7 8 E(0V) 3 Using KF-04 socket for wall surface mounting INA White (Black) External power source Proximity switch Addition APS N KCN-T N The above colors apply to APS. White (Black) INA N INB White (Black) 8 7 Subtraction 6 5 4 4 5 6 7 8 APS 9 10 11 3 1 2 N E(0V) E(0V) 3 Black (Blue) KCY INA INA INB KCX KCX-RN KCH-B -RZ 24V External Two-phase rotary encoder 8 7 6 5 4 4 5 6 7 8 Red E(0V) 9 10 11 3 1 2 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 2 8 7 KB-04 6 5 4 4 5 6 7 8 KF-04 3 9 10 11 AC110V 3 1 2 KB-04 9 2 1 1110 AC210V Free terminals: 1 on Models B-74 9 2 1 1110 9 2 1 1110 AC110V 3 KCY- -H at 220V only 4 5 6 7 8 3 9 10 11 E(0V) -RZ Free terminals: 8,9 and 11 on Model KCY-4T, and 6 on Model KCY-2 and KCY-4 -G at 110V only KF-04 TRD-J Black 24V External Connecting to power source KCY- White External reset contact (reset when contact is ON) Black Green External reset contact (reset when contact is ON) Red TRD-J INB White Two-phase rotary encoder 9 2 1 1110 The above colors apply to APS. Black (Blue) Green External power source External reset contact (reset when contact is ON) External reset contact (reset when contact is ON) APS 24V Red (Brown) INB White (Black) APS Using KB-04 socket for flush mounting 24V Red (Brown) Subtraction KCM 9 2 1 1110 DC input Proximity switch Addition KCN-B Subtraction contact 3 1 2 9 10 11 E(0V) Addition contact 6 5 4 8 7 External reset contact (reset when contact is ON) INB External reset contact (reset when contact is ON) Subtraction contact Addition contact KCV INA -G, and 2 on Models AC210V -H. The KCY modes can count from 0 to 9999 for 4-digit output, and 0 to 99 in 2-digit output. In the One Shot mode, the count never exceeds these ranges. In the Hold mode, the count is not automatically reset upon countup. The counter continues to count input pulses in excess of the specified range. The signal output is held until reset. 0 Subtraction Addition 7500 (75) 2500 (25) During counting, a change to the preset value may cause the counter to generate a false signal. Before you make a change, always turn the power off, or reset the counter. Presetting to zero The counter may be preset to zero; "0000" on a 4-digit counter, or "00" on a 2-digit counter. In the Hold mode, the signal output is held upon countup. In the One Shot mode, however, the output signal "oscillates" and may affect subsequent processes. Pulse input During fast counting, the counter may erroneously count noises of contact relays. To avoid this, use DC input instead of contact relays. KCN-B 5000 (50) KCN-A Count overrange KCN-A Changing the preset value KCN-S/W Useful Information Electronic Counters KCY KCN-T (2-digit count in parentheses) KCY In the Addition mode, the count changes as follows when it has reached the upper limit: 4 digits KCX-RN KCX 2 digits In the Subtraction mode, the count changes as follows when it has reached the lower limit (except KCY-2 and KCY-4): KCH-B lower limit (except KCY-2 and KCY-4) 4 digits KCM 2 digits B-75 External Dimensions (in mm) 28 Bore dimensions for wall surface mounting (Socket F) 48 2- 4.5 hole or M4 screw 60 KCV Electronic Counters KCY KCN-A Socket F (option) 40 0.2 80.5 31 Bracket for wall surface mounting 48 6 Bore dimensions for flush mounting KCN-S/W Socket B (option) +0.3 0 KCN-T KCN-B 45 +0.3 0 51.5 45 10 Protective cover Specified sockets For wall surface mounting: KF-04 (applicable to DIN rails) 8 7 6 For flush mounting: KB-04 5 5 4 2– 47 3 31 10 11 3 2 1 2 40 KCX 8 9 26 9 7 4.5 60 KCY 4 6 1 11 10 45 28 48 KCX-RN Installation procedures Wall surface mounting using KF-04 KCH-B KF-04 socket Flush mounting using KB-04 Hook Bracket (Tighten screws with a torque of less than 4kg-cm.) KCM Protective cover When attaching the protective cover, you cannot make panel operation. B-76 KB-04 socket Addition and Subtraction Addition Dual preset (with numerical display) Addition and Subtraction Addition Total counter Addition and Subtraction 3 KCX-4 4 KCX-1D 1 KCX-2D 2 KCX-2DM 2 KCX-3D 3 KCX-3DM 3 KCX-4D 4 KCX-4DM 4 KCX-5D 5 KCX-5DM 5 KCX-6D 6 KCX-6DM 6 KCX-B4 4 KCX-B4M 4 KCX-B6 6 KCX-B6M 6 KCX-3W 3 KCX-4W 4 KCX-4WM 4 KCX-5W 5 KCX-6W 6 KCX-6WM 6 KCX-B4W 4 KCX-B4WM 4 KCX-B6W 6 KCX-B6WM 6 KCX-4RN 4 KCX-6RN 6 KCX-4T 4 KCX-6T 6 KCX-8T 8 KCX-B4T 4 KCX-B6T 6 DC12V 50mA AC90 132V AC180 264V 50/60Hz DC24V 80mA AC90 132V AC180 264V 50/60Hz DC12V 50mA AC90 132V AC180 264V 50/60Hz 10cps/ 1kcps 10cps/ 200cps 10cps/ 1kcps 10cps/ 5kcps 10cps/ 20kcps KCN-A KCX-3 10cps/ 200cps KCN-A 2 KCN-S/W Preset Counter 1 KCX-2 Source voltage 10cps/ 2kcps 10cps/ 5kcps 10cps/ 20kcps DC24V 80mA 500cps/ 20kcps DC12V 100mA 10cps/ 1Kcps 10cps/ 5Kcps 10cps/ 10Kcps DC12V 50mA 10cps/ 20kcps DC24V 80mA KCN-B Single preset Addition with numerical display KCX-1 Sensor power KCN-T Addition with I/O indicators Number Memry backup Operation of digits at power failure speed KCY Model number AC90 132V AC180 264V 50/60Hz KCX Category Electronic Counters series AC90 132V AC180 264V 50/60Hz KCX-RN KCX KCM KCH-B Accessory: Metal fitting(bracket) B-77 KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCX- , M, D, DM Maximum Counting speed 1- or 2-digit: 10cps or 200cps 3- or 4-digit: 10cps or 1Kcps 5- or 6-digit: 10cps or 5Kcps Single Preset Green Counters for Addition KCX-6 Counter with I/O indicators KCX-6D Counter with numerical display These counters feature an easy to read green LED screen to display one- to six-digit values, and operation modes and status. Advanced functions are also integrated, including dust insulation and power backup. Merits Green LED for easy reading Dust prevention cover On all models, a protective cover is attached to the front panel. The keys and buttons can be operated through this cover. Type A and Type B output options KCN-B KCN-S/W Each model features a green LED display to facilitate reading. Numerical values are displayed with the height of 8 mm. Cover With a small change to the connection, the output mode can be switched between One shot and Hold. Key KCN-T Six counter modes Any of the six combinations can be selected as described on page 78. KCY Wide range of source voltage You can choose source voltage of either AC90 to 132V, or AC180 to 264V. KCX Minimum space requirement In compliance with the DIN standard, all models are sized 72 mm (height) 72 mm (width) 103.5 mm (depth). Mounting KCX-RN Memory backup at power shutdown KCH-B Option to disable count input Nickel cadmium battery is supported for minimum maintenance work. During power shutdown, current consumption is kept as low as several microamperes allowing memory backup for up to 2,000 hours. Power failure is detected by an integrated circuit to activate emergency I/O gates. Input status before shutdown is stored so the counter can resume operation upon recovery. Any pulse input is ignored during power shutdown. The counter can be mounted onto the wall surface in either way, wall surface mounting or flush mounting. Use mounting bracket for the flush mounting and use terminal block (socket F) for wall surface mounting. Socket B (terminal block) or connector Bracket KCM Built-in sensor power A DC12V, 50 mA power source is included in all counters to allow direct connection to a proximity switch, photoelectric sensor or rotary encoder. Variable output duration On the front panel, you can control the duration of One shot (Type A) output. Using a dial, the output time can be adjusted between 50 ms and 1,000 ms. You can extend it to 10 seconds by adding a capacitor. B-78 Socket F (terminal block) Counter body I/O Standard indicators Model number Numerical Standard display backup memory KCX-3 KCX-4 KCX-1D KCX-2D KCX-3D KCX-4D KCX-5D KCX-6D KCX-2DM KCX-3DM KCX-4DM KCX-5DM KCX-6DM 1-digit 2-digit 3-digit 4-digit 5-digit 6-digit Type A: One shop output with auto reset Type B: Hold output External reset Auto reset Contact input Static input Contact input Static input Maximum count speed 10cps 200cps 10cps 1kcps 10cps 5kcps Minimum pulse width 50ms 2.5ms 50ms 0.5ms 50ms 0.1ms Input resistance 6k 12k 6k 12k 6k 12k Input voltage "L"0 Response time On delay: 20ms Off delay: 4ms Input resistance 6k Input voltage "L"0 Response time Max. 5ms Power shutdown Min. 0.2s Reset duration Min. 0.2s Output resistance 1.2k Output current Source: 2.5mA Sink:8.0mA Withstand voltage 45V Output duration Type A: Variable Capacity AC250V 2A Circuit One transfer circuit Output duration Type A: Variable Electrical durability Min. 1,000,000 contacts at AC250V resistance load) "H"6 2V 30V "H"6 On delay: 10ms Off delay: 2ms On delay: 5ms Off delay: 1ms Max. 1ms Max. 0.2ms 30V Mechanical durability KCN-T KCY Type B: Held Min. 10,000,000 contacts 10cps 200cps 10cps 1kcps Voltage output Approx. 10ms Approx. 4ms Approx. 10ms Approx. 0.8ms Approx. 10ms Approx. 0.15ms Contact output Approx. 20ms Approx. 14ms Approx. 20ms Approx. 10ms Approx. 10ms Time for charging Memory backup at power shutdown (Only models with battery) Type B: Held Approx. 20ms 5kcps 50hours 4 Backup duration Approx. 2,000 hours at 25 or 800 hours at 45 Response of emergency input gate 5 20 200ms (70ms typ) Response of input gete upon recovery 10cps 6 KCX-RN 3 (at no load voltage of 12V) 50 500ms (120ms typ) Sensor power DC 12V 2V 50mA Max. 10% (rms) ripple Withstand voltage AC 2kV for one minute (For each of AC power, pin E and relay contact interconnections) Insulation resistance DC 500V Vibration resistance (In compliance with JIC C0911) Source voltage AC 90 KCH-B Relay output KCN-B 1 2 I/O response 2V Min. 20M 132V, or AC 180 Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5mm amplitude No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35mm amplitude KCM Power-on reset Static input KCN-A Count input Contact input KCN-S/W Operation DC output KCX-2 KCX Number of digits KCX-1 KCN-A Specifications Electronic Counters KCX- , M, D, DM 264V (50/60Hz) Power consumption With numerical display: Approx. 5VA Ambient temperature (during operation) During power supply: 0 During memory backup: 40 10 ( 10 50 With I/O indicators: Approx. 3VA 50 with no risk of destroyed battery) B-79 Electronic Counters KCX- , M, D, Storage temperature With memory backup (included battery): Without memory backup: 20 55 Ambient/Storage humidity 35 Noise resistance 7 20 50 ( 20 70 during transportation of less than one week) 85%RH (with no dewing) 1kV (square wave pulse with 1 s width) Approx. 0.5kg Weight KCV DM Notes: 1. Power-on reset is available on the KCX-1 to 6 and KCX-1D to 6D, the models without the memory backup option (battery). "Reset time" is the time required for the counter to restart counting after the power is turned on. 2. DC output 3. Time required for the counter to generate signal after the last pulse is counted at the rising edge. A Relay input DC input DC output B D Relay output When connected to 12V Positive load A or B 12V C KCN-S/W KCN-A C KCX t1 Source 2.4k 6V or more t1: DC output response D t2 t2: Relay output response KCN-B Negative load 12 12V 14V 2k KCN-T Sink 5. Time for an internal circuit to disable pulse input and reset input after it detects power failure. Until this time, these signal inputs remain active. 0.8V or less KCY 24V 12V KCX Sink Vc KCH-B KCX-RN Vc is equal to or less than 3V at sink current of 20 mA. KCM 6. Time for an internal circuit to enable pulse input and reset input after it detects power recovery. 7. Noise tests also include static discharge, induced load switching, electromagnetic switch oscillation and other tests defined by KOYO. When connected to 24V B-80 4. Time required for the included battery to be fully charged. DM Electronic Counters KCX- , M, D, With memory backup Power The counter generates a signal upon countup, or when the number of input pulses has reached the preset value. Using a dial, the output duration can be adjusted between 50ms and 1,000ms. Upon countup, both the count and signal output are automatically reset. Count is reset to zero when the external reset terminal is activated. ON OFF Pulse input Preset value KCN-A Type A (One shot) output Count Output External reset KCN-A Output modes Count is reset by external reset. With memory backup Standard models ON OFF Pulse input Preset value Power KCN-S/W Power ON OFF t 0.2s Pulse input Preset value Output 1000ms Count Count is reset by external reset. Output KCN-T Approx. 50 External reset External reset Standard models Count is reset by external reset, or power shoutdown for 0.2 second or more. ON OFF 0.2s KCY t Pulse input Preset value External reset Approx. 50 1000ms Type B (Hold) output The counter generates and holds a signal upon countup, or when the number of input pulses has reached the preset value. On the counters with numerical displays, the terminals , and can be connected. In this case, the count is not reset upon countup, but continues to be incremented for each pulse input. When the terminal and are connected, the count is upon countup. (See "Switching between Type A and Type B" below.) 1 12V 2 IN 10cps 3 IN High speed 4 E 5 CH1 6 CH2 7 R Counter Count is reset by external reset, or power shoutdown for 0.2 second or more. Connect terminals and to select the Type B operation. The count is reset upon countup. If the terminals , and are connected, the count is not reset upon countup. It continues to be incremented for each pulse input. KCX-RN 0.2s KCH-B t Output KCX Switching between Type A and Type B Count Type B operation KCM Power KCN-B Count B-81 Terminal Assignment KCN-A KCN-S/W KCN-B KCN-T KCY Pulse input Teminal number Name 1. Relay input Description 1 12V 2 IN(10cps) Count input 3 IN High speed count input 4 E Grounding 5 CH One shot output/Hold switch (capacitor Sensor power output 1 1 2 IN 10cps (capacitor ) 2 Pulse (counted when relay is ON) ) 3 4 Not connected 7 R External reset input 5 8 OUT DC output 6 9 COM. 10 N.O. 11 N.C. 12 AC180 13 AC90 14 AC0V 7 R Relay output Reset (Reset for ON) 264V AC power input 132V 2. DC input With numerical display Teminal number Name Description 1 12V 2 IN(10cps) Count input 3 IN High speed count input 12V Sensor power output Max. 4.7 k 1 4 E Grounding 5 CH1 One shot output/Hold switch (capacitor 6 CH2 Auto reset/Not auto reset switch 7 R External reset input 8 OUT DC output 9 COM. 10 N.O. 11 N.C. 12 AC180 13 AC90 14 AC0V 2(capacitor 1 Count input ) Relay output 12V 2 IN (10cps) Counter ) 3 IN (High speed) High speed count input 4 E 5 12V 6 Max. 4.7k Reset 7 R Set 264V 132V AC power input 1. See Specifications. 2. Capacitor for output time extension Either count input or high speed count input can be selected as count rate. 3. Connection to open collector output 4.7k or less PLC KCH-B 12V 1 12V 2 IN (10cps) 3 IN (High speed) KCM 4 E 5 6 7 R Counter 4.7k or less B-82 Counter KCX Wiring Diagrams With I/O indicators 6 KCX-RN DM Counter KCV Electronic Counters KCX- , M, D, 2. DC output Source load 12V KCX 1 2 IN 10Hz OUT 8 2 9 3 10 Static output voltage 4 E 2.5mA or less KCN-A 1 2mA Counter 11 L: 0.8V or less H: 6V or more 5 12 6 13 7 14 Load Notes on relay input (1)On the circuit shown on the right, the input current to the relay is less than 2mA. Use a reliable relay that responds to such small current. Do not use an electromagnetic switch contact designed for large current and voltage. Electronic Counters KCX- , M, D, DM or more KCN-A 2.4k A Input voltage KCN-S/W (2)The following table lists the standard responses of Terminal at the pulse rate of 10 cps: B Input circuit Sink load A 9 3 10 Static output voltage 11 L: 2V or less 5 Input voltage On delay (ton) Off delay (toff) 6V 16ms 4ms 12V 8ms 8ms 30V 3ms 23ms 12 6 13 7 14 RL 45V or less E Electric current flows into the circuit when the output voltage falls to "L" level. Contrary to the open collector, the output rises to "H" level upon countup. KCX-RN These are the standard values. T1 and T0 should be at least three times longer than ton and toff. For example, when using the DC12V sensor power, T1 and T0 should be 24ms or more. 20mA or less KCY toff E Counter ton 8 2 4 B OUT KCN-B 1 KCN-T T0 KCX T1 Output Connection KCH-B 1. Relay output 8 COM 9 N.O. 10 N.C. 11 Load power Counter KCM Load A Load B 12 13 14 Upon countup, Load A is activated and Load B is deactivated. B-83 Electronic Counters KCX- , M, D, DM Connection Examples Direct connection to a sensor Pulse input Red (Brown) 1 3 IN (High speed) 4 E Black (Blue) Count disable 3 IN (High speed) 4 E Sensor 5 5 Red (Brown) KCN-S/W KCN-A Reset Counter White (Black) 12V 2 IN (10cps) 2 IN (10cps) High speed count input Proximity switch, photoelectric sensor or rotary encoder 1 12V Counter KCV Count input Count disable using a free terminal 6 6 White (Black) 7 R 7 R Black (Blue) Proximity switch, photoelectric sensor or rotary encoder Pulse count is disabled when the contact is closed to force input to the terminal . However, the count increments by 1 when the contact is closed while the sensor (terminal ) output is at "L" level. The 12V terminal should not consume more than 5 mA. Parallel Counters KCN-B 1. Relay input Count disable during signal output 12V 2 IN (10cps) Pulse input Counter KCN-T 1 1 1 KCX Counter KCX-RN 8 9 3 IN (High speed) 10 5 Sensor OUT 2 IN (10cps) 4 E 12V 2 IN (10cps) 12V Counter KCY 4 E 11 12 6 13 7 R 14 4 E For high speed pulse input, the sensor should be connected as shown by the dashed lines. Use Hitachi diodes IS2076 or equivalent. 2. DC input Connection to TTL logic gate 4 E R Counter KCH-B 5V 3 IN (High speed) 12V 1k to TTL Counter Pulse input 5V Count signal Static relay KTS-11L 3 8 7 KCM 1k 4 4 E Counter 3 IN (High speed) Reset input Pull-in current is 4mA on the KCX counter side (0.4V residual voltage). R B-84 12 (k N ) N: Numbers of counter that can be connected in parallel. RD4.7EB (NEC) Count disable Timing chart Connection KCN-A Type A operation Count Output KCN-A One shot Type B Operation Count Output - KCN-S/W Countup - KCN-B Extermal reset Countup Count Output KCN-T - Extermal reset KCY Not reset Countup Count Output or One shot KCX Upon countup Reset Countup Count Output Extermal reset KCX-RN One shot or - Held - KCH-B Output Held One of the following six combinations can be selected for the numerical display counters. Count Output Extermal reset or - KCM List of Counter Modes Electronic Counters KCX- , M, D, DM - When Terminal is connected to Terminal , the time for the count disable to be activated is the same as the response time of Terminal . B-85 Maximum count speed 3- or 4-digit: 10cps or 2kcps 5- or 6-digit: 10cps or 5kcps KCX-5W KCX-6WM These counters feature an easy to see green LED screen to display three to six digit counts and dual preset values. Other features include dust insulation and power backup. Merits Green LED for easy reading Each model features a green LED display to facilitate reading. Numerical values are displayed with the height of 8mm. Minimum space requirement In compliance with the DIN standard, all models are sized 72mm (height) 72mm (width) 103.5mm (depth). Dust prevention cover On all models, a protective cover is attached to the front panel. The keys and buttons can be operated through this cover. KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCX- W, WM Dual Preset Green Counters for Addition Output duration adjustor Count speed switch Mode switch 1 2 Cover A B KCY Switch 1 Mode Type A A operation Type B B operation Switch 2 Count speed 3 4W 2kcps 4WM 5 6W 5kcps 6WM 10cps KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX Option to disable count input Pulse input and count can be disabled by signal input to the count disable terminal. Memory backup at power shutdown The integrated nickel cadmium battery allows memory backup for up to 5,000 hours. Wide range of source voltage The counter accepts voltage of DC 4.5V to 30V from a source ranging from 5V to 24V. You can choose source of either AC 90 to 132V, or AC 180 to 264V. Integrated sensor power DC12V, 50 mA power source is included in all counters to allow direct connection to a proximity switch, photoelectric sensor or rotary encoder. Mounting The counter can be mounted onto the wall surface in either way, wall surface mounting or flush mounting. Use mounting bracket for the flush mounting and use terminal block (socket F) for wall surface mounting. Variable output duration On the rear panel, you can control the duration of One shot (Type A) output. Using a dial, the output time can be adjusted between 50 ms and 1,000ms. One shot output and Hold output options Using the selector on the rear panel, output type can be selected between One shot (Type A) output and hold (Type B) output. Slow Count and Fast Count options Using the selector on the rear panel, count speed can be switched between 10cps and 2kcps (5kcps for 5- or 6-digit counter). B-86 Socket B (terminal block) or connector Bracket Socket F (terminal block) Counter body Electronic Counters KCX- W, WM Specifications KCX-3W Standard models KCX-4W 3 digits 10cps (selected by switch) 5kcps Minimum pulse width 10cps 50ms 2kcps 0.25ms 10cps 50ms 5kcps 0.1ms Input resistance 6k Input voltage "L"0 Response time On delay Off delay Input resistance 6k 2V Response time Input resistance 6k Max. 0.25ms Max. 0.25ms "H"4.5 "L"0 Response time Max. 0.5ms Power-on reset (KCX-3 6W) Power shutdown Min. 200ms Reset duration Max. 200ms Output resistance 1.2k Output current Source: 2.5mA Withstand voltage 45V Output duration 50ms Capacity AC250V 2A Circuit One make contact Output duration 50ms Max. 4ms Max. 0.8ms 30V Max. 0.2ms (at no load voltage of 12V) Sink: 8mA KCY 1s 1s Electrical durability Min. 10,000,000 contacts Mechanical durability Min. 1,000,000 contacts (resistance load) Voltage output 10cps 10ms 2kcps 0.4ms 10cps 10ms 5kcps 0.15ms Contact output 10cps 20ms 2kcps 10ms 10cps 20ms 5kcps 10ms Time for charging 50h Backup duration 5000h(25 Response of emergency input gate Max. 200ms I/O response Memory backup at power shutdown (KCX-3 6WM) "H"4.5 On delay Off delay ) 2000h(40 ) Response of input Max. 200ms gate upon recovery Sensor power DC+12V Source voltage AC 90 Ambient temperature During power supply: 0 During memory backup: Storage temperature KCX-3 KCX-3 Ambient/Storage humidity 35 Weight 0.5kg KCH-B Relay output 2V Max. 0.1ms Max. 0.1ms 30V Max. 10ms Max. 2ms Input voltage On delay Off delay KCN-S/W "L"0 On delay Off delay 30V KCN-B Input voltage "H"4.5 KCN-T 2V KCN-A 10cps (selected by switch) 2kcps KCN-A Maximum count speed Auto reset DC output 6 digits KCX External reset KCX-6WM 5 digits 50mA 132V, or AC 180 6W: 6WM: 20 20 264V (50/60Hz) approx. 5.5VA 40 10 55 50 ( ( 10 50 20 50 with no risk of destroyed battery) KCM Count disable input 4 digits First preset: Type B (Hold output) only Second preset: Type A (One shot output) or Type B (Hold output) selected by switch on rear panel Operation Count input KCX-6W KCX-4WM With backup memory Number of digits KCX-5W KCX-RN Model number 70 during transportation of less than one week) 85%RH (with no dewing) Note: See pages 72 and 73 for withstand voltage, insulation resistance, vibration resistance, noise resistance and other related specifications. B-87 KCV Electronic Counters KCX- W, WM Operation Terminal Assignment Type A (One shot) output Type B (Hold) output Terminal number Selecting A or B Only Type B output is available for the first preset value. For the second preset value, either Type A or B can be selected by the switch on the rear panel. KCX KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A Variable Type A output For the second preset value, the duration of Type A output can be changed. Use the dial on the rear panel to select the desired time from 50ms to 1,000ms. 1 Sensor power output 2 IN Count input 3 INH Count disable input 4 E Grounding 5 OUT1 DC output 6 OUT2 DC output 7 R External reset input OUT1 Relay output (1a contact) OUT2 Relay output (1a contact) 8 9 11 The input speed of Terminal can be changed. Use the selector on the rear panel to select 10cps or 2kcps (or 5kcps for 5- or 6digit counter). Description 12V 10 Changing count speed Name 12 AC180 264V 13 AC90 14 AC0V 132V AC power input Type A (One shot) output (1) Count starts 0.2 second after the power is on. (2) Count is interrupted when the count disable terminal is activated by additional voltage of 4.5V to 30V. Count is restarted when the terminal is deactivated. (3) The counter generates a signal upon countup, or when the number of input pulses has reached the first preset value. For the first preset, signal output is held (Type B output). (4) The counter generates another signal when the pulse count has reached the second preset value. Upon countup, both the count and signal output are automatically reset. (5) The first signal drops to zero at the same time as the second signal. (6) Count is reset to zero when the external reset terminal is activated by additional voltage of 4.5V to 30V. Signal output is also reset if the count has previously reached the first and/or second value. (7) The KCX-3 to 6WM models integrates a backup memory for power shutdown. When the power is shut down, both the count and the output status are stored in this memory. (8) These models also have a power-on reset function. Count and signal output are reset when the power is off for 0.2 second then turned on. KCX-RN Standard models: KCX-3 to 6W Power t 0.2s Pulse input KCH-B Second preset value First preset value Count Count disable First output KCM 50ms Second output External reset B-88 1s t 0.2s Electronic Counters KCX- W, WM With memory backup: KCX-3 to 6WM Power Pulse input Second preset value First preset value KCN-A Count Count disable First output KCN-A 1s External reset Type B (Hold) output (5) Count and signal output are reset when the external reset terminal is activated by additional voltage of 4.5V to 30V. (6) (7) Same as the steps 7 and 8 of the Type A output KCN-B (1) (2) Same as the Type A output. (3) (4) The counter generates and holds a signal when the pulse count has reached the second preset value. KCN-S/W 50ms Second output KCN-T Standard models: KCX-3 to 6W Power 0.2s t 0.2s KCY t Pulse input Second preset value First preset value Count Count disable KCX First output Second output KCX-RN External reset With memory backup: KCX-3 to 6WM KCH-B Power Pulse input Second preset value First preset value KCM Count Count disable First output Second output External reset B-89 Electronic Counters KCX- W, WM Wiring Diagrams Pulse input Output Connection 1. Relay input 1. Relay output 1 8 12V Load power 9 Counter 3 4 10 Counter KCV 2 IN 10cps Pulse input (counted when contact is ON) Load power 11 12 KCN-A 13 6 14 7 R Reset (reset when contact is ON) KCN-S/W Load OUT2 5 KCN-B Load OUT1 Only the relay contact a is used for the first and second outputs. On the rear panel, set the speed switch to Low (10 cps). 2. DC input 2. DC output Source load 2 L: 0.8V or less H: 6V or more Max. 4.7k 1 Pulse input 4 E 2 IN Counter 3 KCY 3 12V 4 E 2.5mA or less Load 2.5mA or less Load Counter KCN-T 1 5 OUT1 6 OUT2 7 5 6 Max. 4.7k KCX 7 R 1 45V or less 2 B-90 1 12V 2mA KCX 3 8mA 20mA MAX. 8mA 20mA MAX. 2 IN 10cps 4 5 OUT1 6 OUT2 7 L: 0.8V or less 3V or less at sink current of 20mA. Counter Note on relay input On the circuit shown on the right, the input current to the relay is less than 2mA. Use a reliable relay that responds to such small current. Do not use an electromagnetic switch contact designed for large current and voltage. Load KCM Either pulse input or high speed pulse input can be selected as count rate. Load KCH-B KCX-RN Sink load Electronic Counters KCX- W, WM Count Disable Input Connections 1. Relay input 12V KCN-A 1 2 IN 10cps Counter 3 Count is disable when relay is ON 4 KCN-A Pulse input 5 6 KCN-S/W 7 KCN-B When count is disabled, only slow input is available. 2. DC input 12V KCN-T 1 Max. 4.7k 2 IN KCY 4 5 6 KCX-RN KCX 7 KCH-B Count is disabled when transistor is OFF Counter 3 KCM Pulse input B-91 Electronic Counters KCX- T Total Counters with Green LED Maximum counting speed KCX-4T: 10cps or 1kcps KCX-6T: 10cps or 5kcps KCX-8T: 10cps or 10kcps KCX-4T KCX-6T KCV The counters feature an easy to see green LED screen. Other features include variable voltage and power backup of 5,000 hours. Merits KCN-A Each model features a green LED display to facilitate reading. Numerical values are displayed with the height of 8 mm. KCN-S/W Green LED for easy reading Pulse input and count can be disable by voltage input to the disable terminal. KCY KCN-T KCN-B Option to disable count input KCX-8T Memory backup at power shutdown The integrated nickel cadmium battery allows memory backup for up to 5,000 hours. Wide range of source voltage The counter accepts voltage of DC 4.5V to 30V from a source ranging from TTL level to 24V. You can choose source of either AC 90 to 132V, or AC 180 to 264V. Latch option Count can be latched and displayed by signal input to the latch terminal. When the terminal is deactivated, the counter restarts from the current count. KCX Option to disable manual reset You can disable the Reset key on the front panel to prevent accidental reset. KCH-B KCX-RN Zero suppression The counter suppresses non-significant zeroes on the left to the count value. Built-in sensor power A DC 12V, 50mA power source is included in all counters to allow direct connection to a proximity sensor, photoelectric sensor or rotary encoder. Socket B (terminal block) or connector Bracket Minimum space requirement In compliance with the DIN standard, all models are sized 72mm (height) 72mm (width). KCM Mounting The counter can be mounted onto the wall surface in either way, wall surface mounting or flush mounting. Use mounting bracket for the flush mounting and use terminal block (socket F) for wall surface mounting. Dust prevention cover On all models, a protective cover is attached to the front panel. The keys and buttons can be operated through this cover. Cover B-92 Socket F (terminal block) Counter body Electronic Counters KCX- T Specifications Model number KCX-4T KCX-6T KCX-8T Number of digits 4 digits 6 digits 8 digits 10cps 50ms Input resistance 10cps 6k Input voltage "L"0 2V Response time On delay Max. 1ms Off delay Max. 1ms 1kcps 1kcps "H"4.5 0.5ms 12k 10cps or 5kcps 10cps or 10kcps 10cps 50ms 5kcps 0.1ms 10cps 50ms 10kcps 50 s 10cps 6k 10cps 6k 5kcps 12k 10kcps 12k 30V On delay Max. 0.2ms Off delay Max. 0.2ms On delay Max. 0.1ms Off delay Max. 0.1ms Count disable input Input resistance 6k Input voltage "L"0 2V Manual reset and ) Disabled by switch on the front panel (by short circuiting Terminals On delay Max. 0.1ms On delay Max. 0.5ms Response time Off delay Max. 0.1ms Off delay Max. 0.5ms On delay Max. 50 s Off delay Max. 50 s "L"0 2V "H"4.5 Time for charging 50h Backup duration Response of emergency input gate Response of input gate upon recovery 5000h(25 ) KCN-S/W 6k Input voltage 30V 2000h(40 ) Max. 200ms Max. 200ms Max.0.1ms Response time Max. 0.5ms Latch input Input resistance 6k Sensor power DC Source voltage AC 90 132V, or AC 180 264V (50/60Hz, 5.5VA) 40 ( 10 50 with no risk of destroyed battery) During power supply: 0 During memory backup: 10 50 Input voltage 20 Storage temperature Ambient/Storage humidity 35 50 Max.0.1ms 30V 50mA (Max. 5% rms ripple) ( 20 70 during transportation of less than one week) KCY Ambient temperature "L"0 2V "H"4.5 12V 2V KCN-B Memory backup at power shutdown Input resistance 30V KCN-T External reset "H"4.5 KCN-A 10cps or 1kcps Minimum pulse width KCN-A Count input Maximum count speed 85%RH (with no dewing) Approx. 0.5kg Weight See pages B-82 and B-83 for withstand voltage, insulation resistance, vibration resistance, noise resistance and other related specifications. 1 12V Description Terminal number Name Description Sensor power output 8 Not connected Count input 9 Not connected 2 IN (10cps) 3 IN(1kcps/5kcps/10kcps) High speed count input 10 4 E Grounding 11 5 INH Count disable 12 AC180 6 RD Manual reset prevention 13 AC90 132V 7 R External reset input 14 AC0V L Latch input Not KCH-B Name connected 264V AC power input KCM Terminal number KCX-RN Terminal Assignment KCX Note: B-93 Operation (1)Count starts 0.2 second after the power is on. (2)Count is reset to zero when the Reset key is pressed, or when the external reset terminal is activated by additional voltage of 4.5V to 30V. Only one zero is displayed on the first digit. (3)The minimum pulse width should be as follows: 50ms for all counters operating at 10cps 0.5ms for KCX-4T at 1k cps 0.1ms for KCX-6T at 5k cps 50 s for KCX-8T at 10k cps KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCX- T The counter total individual counts and displays the current total. The terminal should be used for 10 cps, and the terminal for 1k cps, 5k cps and 10k cps. (4)Count is interrupted when the count disable terminal is activated by additional voltage of 4.5V to 30V. Count is restarted when the terminal is deactivated. (5)Count is latched when the terminal is activated by input voltage of 4.5V to 30V. When the terminal is deactivated, the counter restarts from the current count. Timing Charts KCN-S/W Power Pulse input KCN-B Count Display Count disable KCN-T Manual reset Disable munual reset External reset KCY Latch Wiring Diagrams KCX Pulse input 2. DC input 1. Relay input 12V 12V 2 IN 10cps Relay input (counted when relay is ON) Max. 4.7k 3 4 Counter KCX-RN 1 1 2 IN (10cps) Count signal 3 IN (High speed) High speed pulse input 6 7 R 4 E 5 12V 6 Max. 4.7k KCM Reset input Reset signal 7 R Either pulse input or high speed pulse input can be selected as count rate. B-94 Counter KCH-B 5 Reset (activated when relay is ON) 12V Pulse input Note on relay input Latch Input Connections 1 Relay input 1 12V Counter 9 3 10 4 5 Count Disable Input Connections 1. Relay input Latch input 11 Count is latched when relay is ON. 12 6 13 7 14 12V 2 IN (10cps) Counter 3 4 KCN-B Pulse input KCN-S/W For relay input, only the pulse input can be used. 1 2. DC input 5 1 7 2 Pulse input 8 3 IN (High speed) 4 E 1 Max.4.7k Pulse input 12 6 13 7 14 Count is latched when transistor is OFF Either pulse input or high speed pulse input can be selected as count rate. 2 IN (10cps) 3 IN (High speed) 4 Max. 4.7k Counter 12V 10 11 Counter 5 2. DC input 9 IN (10cps) 12V KCN-T 6 KCX-RN Count is disable when relay is ON. 5 KCN-A 2 IN 10cps KCY Pulse input 8 12V KCN-A 1 2 IN 10cps KCX 2mA Counter On the circuit shown on the right, the input current to the relay is less than 2mA. Use a reliable relay that responds to such small current. Do not use an electromagnetic switch contact designed for large current and voltage. Electronic Counters KCX- T Disabling manual reset 8 1 Pulse input Manual reset disable input 2 IN (10cps) 3 IN (High speed) 10 4 E 11 5 9 KCM 7 Count is disable when transistor is OFF Either pulse input or high speed pulse input can be selected as count rate. KCH-B 6 12 6 RD 13 7 R 14 (disabled when relay is ON) B-95 KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCX-B Maximum counting speed: Single or Dual Preset Counters for Fast Addition and Subtraction 10cps or 20kcps The counter integrates a 4- or 6-digit green LED display, and provides Add, Subtract and Compare options. I/O logic can be switched between positive logic and negative. The counter can be connected to either a source or sink I/O device. Merits Addition and Subtraction KCN-S/W With the ability to count in the two directions, the counter can be used for precise control of a cutter or winder. Addition Subtraction P2 KCN-B P1 OUT1 OUT2 KCN-T Addition Subtraction P2 P1 KCY OUT1 OUT2 KCX Positive and negative I/O logics Choices of I/O devices are also expanded. The counter supports both positive and negative I/O logics. Relay DC output Relay output NPN proximity switch Source input PC 15mA MAX. KCX-B6W KCM KCH-B KCX-RN Sink input PC 30mA MAX. PNP proximity switch Motor AC250V 2A Rotary encoder B-96 Solenoid Specifications KCX-B6 KCX-B4M KCX-B6M Single preset External reset input Auto reset Input resistance Positive: 2.2k Negative: 4.7k Input voltage "L"0 Response time On delay: Max. 25 Off delay: Max. 25 Input resistance Positive: 2.2k Negative: 4.7k Input voltage "L"0 Response time On delay: Max. 5ms Off delay: Max. 5ms Input resistance Positive: 2.2k Negative: 4.7k Input voltage "L"0 Reset time Max. 50 6V "H"12 6V "H"12 6 digits 30V s s 30V 30V s Number of circuits 1 circuit Positive output Voltage: 16 28V (at no load vltage of 28V) Current: Max. 15mA Negative output Load voltage: Max. 35V Load current: Max. 30mA Residual voltage: Max. 1.5V Number of circuits One transfer circuit Capacity AC220V 2A (resistance load) Electrical durability Min. 200,000 contacts (resistance load) DC output Relay output "H"12 4 digits KCN-A 10cps (selected by switch) 20kcps KCN-A Count disable input 6 digits Maximum count speed 6V KCX-B6WM KCN-S/W Pulse input KCX-B4WM Dual preset 4 digits Number of digits KCX-B6W KCN-B Setting KCX-B4W 2 circuits KCN-T With backup memory KCX-B4 Two N.O. contacts KCY Standard Model number 10cps: Approx. 30ms 20kcps: Approx. 30 s Relay output 10cps: Approx. 40ms 20kcps: Approx. 10ms 6 6W ) Power shutdown Max. 500ms Reset time Max. 500ms Memory backup at power shutdown KCX-B4M ( KCX-B4WM 6M 6WM ) Time for charging 50h Backup duration 2000h(25 Response of emergency input gate 20 500ms Response of input gate upon recovery 50 500ms 24V (20 Sensor power DC Withstand voltage AC 2kV for one minute (For each of AC power, Terminal E and relay contact interconnections) Vibration resistance (In compliance with JIS C 0911) Noise resistance 1kV (square wave pulse with 1 Source voltage AC90 10 50 Storage temperature 20 50 Weight 80mA 132V,or AC180 Ambient temperature Ambient/Storage humidity 35 28V) ) ( 20 KCH-B KCX-B4 ( KCX-B4W 264V 70 Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.5mm amplitude No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.35mm amplitude s width) KCM Power-on reset KCX-RN DC output KCX Mechanical durability Min. 20,000,000 contacts I/O response Electronic Counters KCX-B 14VA during transportation of less than one week) 85%RH (with no dewing) Approx. 0.5kg Time required for the counter to restart counting after the power is turned on. B-97 Electronic Counters KCX-B Front Panel and Terminal Assignment KCX-B (M) T/N Name KCV 1 Count display (Character height: 8mm) KCN-A Output status Preset keys KCN-B KCN-S/W Pot. meter for adjusting output duration KCX-B 24V IN A Pulse count input A 3 IN B Pulse count input B 4 E Negative common I/O 5 IN H Count disable 6 Not connected 7 R External reset input 8 OUT DC output 9 COM Common Relay output 10 N.O. N.O. Relay output 11 N.C. 12 AC180 13 AC90 14 AC0V KCN-T KCY Count display (Character height: 8mm) Output status Name KCX 5 6 11 12 13 14 Description Sensor power 2 IN A Pulse count input A 3 IN B Pulse count input B 4 E Negative common I/O 5 OUT 1 DC output for the first value DC output for the second value External reset input Preset keys for the second value 8 IN H Count disable Pot. meter for adjusting output duration 9 COM Connected relay output 10 N.O.1 Relay output for the first value 11 N.O.2 12 AC180 13 AC90 14 AC0V 7 KCM 10 80mA R KCX-RN 4 KCH-B 3 24V OUT 2 Switch 5 B-98 Power input 6 Switches 1 to 4 9 132V 7 Preset keys for the first value 8 N.C. Relay output 264V W(M) 1 2 Description Sensor power 2 T/N 1 80mA Relay output for the second value 264V 132V Power input Electronic Counters KCX-B I/O Circuits (M) 24V Sensor power Pulse count input A DC output 24V Pulse count input A DC output for the first value 24V KCN-A 24V 24V 24V Negative common Not connected 24V Reset Reset Internal circuit Negative common Pulse count input B Internal circuit Pulse count input B DC output for the second value Common relay output 24V Common relay output N.O. Count disable Relay output for the first value 24V Relay output for the second value Count disable KCN-T N.C. KCN-A 24V KCN-S/W 24V Sensor power W (M) KCX-B KCN-B KCX-B 5V — 24V — 24V 24V — — KCX 24V Power input KCY 5V Power input 1. Mode selection To select the counter modes, use the four switches located on the rear side of the counter, and ten positions of the rotary switch. 1 2 7 8 6 5 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 4 3 4 Direction 4 I/O logic 2 3 1 2 Pulse count 0 B 1 3 Count speed 9 A Mode selected SW5 5 Position Value selected A 10cps B 20kcps A Separate B Two-phase A Subtraction B Addition A Negative B Positive KCM Switch KCH-B KCX-RN Operating procedures Signal output B-99 Switch 1 Count speed This switch used to set or change the maximum count rate. Turn the switch to Position A to select 10cps, and Position B to select 20kcps. Position A is used for relay input such as a switch or relay. Use Position B for DC input such s a rotary encoder or proximity switch. Switch 2 Count mode This switch selects the Two-Phase or Separate count mode. For a proximity switch or relay, set the switch to Position A to select the Separate mode. For a rotary encoder, set it to Position B to select the Two-Phase mode. Separate mode (Position A) Addition Subtraction H L IN A IN B Counted either at rising edge or falling edge H Counted either at rising edge or falling edge L Two-Phase mode (Position B) Addition Switch 3 Switch 4 Subtraction IN A H L H L IN B H L H L Direction This switch changes the count direction to Addition or Subtraction. Set the switch to Position A to select Subtraction, and set it to Position B to select Addition. When a reset signal is entered, the counter is reset as follows: In the Subtraction mode, the single preset counter is reset to the first preset value, and the dual preset counter is reset to the second preset value. In the Addition mode, both counters are reset to zero. Subtration Reset Increments Preset value Count Decrements 0 Addition Reset Increments Count Decrements 0 I/O logic Use this switch to select either positive or negative I/O logic. To select the negative logic (active at "L" level), set the switch to Position A. To select the positive logic (active at "H"), set it to Position B. Negative logic (Position A) KCH-B KCX-RN KCX KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCX-B Countup DC output Input Load NPN transistor K C X -B Load power Input H L KCM H ON Output L Positive logic (Position B) Countup DC output PNP transistor Load Input power Input L K C X -B Input H H Output L B-100 ON OUT 2 Signal output Count Signal output 0 Held 1 2 3 "OUT 2" applies to single preset counters. P2 is reset to the preset value, and P1 is reset to zero. Positions 0 to 5 are used to select the Countup mode. Positions 6 to 9 select the Compare mode. Held 4 6 C: Count P1: First preset value P2: Second preset value 8 9 50 1000ms Reset Continued 100ms 5 7 Continued Held Continued 50 1000ms Reset C C P1 C P1 P2 C C C P2 P2 C P1 KCN-A Count Use this rotary switch to select the output mode of the counter. Six modes are available for single preset counters, and ten modes for dual preset counters. Position 0 OUT 1 Position P2 0 KCN-A Signal output P2 Addition Maximum count Subtraction (4-digit: 9999,6-digit: 999999) Addition Maximum count Subtraction (4-digit: 9999,6-digit: 999999) KCN-S/W Switch 5 Electronic Counters KCX-B Second Preset value First Preset value KCN-B Count 0 O UT 1 O UT 2 Position 1 KCN-T Reset Second Preset value KCY First Preset value Count 0 OUT1 50 1000ms 50 1000ms KCX OUT2 Reset Position 2 Subtraction Addition KCX-RN Second Preset value First Preset value Count 0 OUT1 50 1000ms KCH-B 50 1000ms OUT2 Reset Position 3 Maximum count Subtraction (4-digit: 9999,6-digit: 999999) Addition KCM Second Preset value First Preset value Count 0 100ms 100ms O UT 1 O UT 2 Reset B-101 Electronic Counters KCX-B Position 4 Addition Subtraction Maximum count (4-digit: 9999,6-digit: 999999) Se co n d Pre se t va lu e F irst Pre se t va lu e Count 0 100ms 100ms OU T 1 50 1000ms 50 1000ms KCV OU T 2 Reset Addition Position 5 Subtraction KCN-A Se co n d Pre se t va lu e First Pre se t va lu e Count 0 KCN-S/W 100ms 100ms OU T1 50 1000ms 50 1000ms OU T2 KCN-B Reset Position 6 Se co n d Pre se t va lu e First Pre se t va lu e KCN-T Count 0 OU T 1 KCY OU T 2 Position 7 Se co n d Pre se t va lu e First Pre se t va lu e KCX Count 0 OU T 1 KCX-RN OU T 2 Position 8 Se co n d Pre se t va lu e KCH-B F irst Pre se t va lu e Count 0 OU T1 KCM OU T2 Position 9 Se co n d Pre se t va lu e F irst Pre se t va lu e Count 0 OU T1 OU T2 B-102 Maximum count (4-digit: 9999,6-digit: 999999) Electronic Counters KCX-B 2. Input Circuit The KCX-B Series counters can use either positive or negative input. To change the input mode, use Dip switch 4 on the rear panel. A A Positive Negative KCN-A B B Switch 4 at Position B Switch 4 at Position A 4.7k ON voltage: Max. 6V OFF voltage: 12 30V ON current: Max. 6mA ON voltage: 12 30V OFF voltage: Max. 6V ON current: Max. 14mA at 30V KCN-B 2.2k KCN-S/W 24V KCN-A Positive input equivalent circuit Negative input equivalent circuit (1) Pulse count mode Use Dip switch 4 to change the pulse count mode between Two-Phase (90 dephased) or Separate. KCN-T Input waveforms A Separate mode B Switch 2 at Position A Positive mode Addition Addition IN A H KCY Negative mode IN A L H L Counted either at rising edge or falling edge IN B Counted either at rising edge or falling edge IN A Subtraction Counted either at rising edge or falling edge IN A Subtraction Counted either at rising edge or falling edge IN B H IN B L KCX-RN KCX IN B H L A Two-Phase mode KCH-B B Switch 2 at Position B Positive mode Addition IN A IN A L IN B Addition H H L H IN B L H L Subtraction Subtraction H IN A L IN A H IN B L KCM Negative mode IN B H L H L B-103 Electronic Counters KCX-B Pulse count requirements Separate mode IN A Two-Phase mode H H IN A L L KCV IN B H IN B 12.5 s or more 12.5 s or more L H L Each interval must be 12.5 s or more KCN-A Repeated additions or subtractions IN A H L IN B H L KCN-S/W Both A and B can be counted at the same time if the pulse width and interval are equal to or longer than 12.5 s. In the addition mode, this signal resets the count to zero. In the subtraction mode, the count is reset to the first preset value on the single preset counters, and to the second value on the dual preset models. The reset input overrides the pulse input and the count disable input. (3) Count disable The disable signal suspends the pulse count. When it turns off, count restarts from the value at the time of suspension. 3. Output Circuit The KCX-B Series counters can use DC output or relay output. Either positive or negative logic can be selected. The 1c relay contact is used for the single preset models, and 2a relay contact for the dual preset models. KCX KCY KCN-T KCN-B (2) External reset A A Positive Negative B B KCX-RN Switch 4 at Position A 24V Negative Switching current: Negative Applied voltage: Negative Residual voltage: Positive Output voltage: Positive Output current: In the negative mode, the output terminal generates a voltage of 20V to 28V when signal output turns off. For the load input terminal, use a reverse current blocking diode that withstands 40V backward voltage and 40mA forward current. Max. 30mA Max. 35V Max. 1.5V 16~28V Max. 15mA KCM KCH-B Equivalent circuit Switch 4 at Position B Use a totem-pole structure for the DC output. Do not connect the circuit in parallel with other DC output. Relay output AC220V Single preset B-104 2A (resistance load) Dual preset COM COM N.C. N.O.1 N.O. N.O.2 (1) 6 digits (2) 4 digits When Switch 5 is between Position 0 to Position 5, the counter is set to the Hold mode or One shot mode. In the Hold mode, signal output is retained after countup. In the One shot mode, signal is generated for a short period upon countup. When Switch 5 is anywhere between Position 6 to Position 9, the counter operates in the Compare mode. When the count exceeds the above range, the counter retains the lower or upper limit. In the Addition mode, the count changes as follows when it has reached the upper limit: When Switch 5 is positioned to select the One shot mode, no signal is generated upon countup. When the count has exceeded the allowable range 100 times, it changes in the same way as the 6-digit models. 9999 000000 In the Subtraction mode, the count changes as follows when it has reached the lower limit: 000000 0000 In the Subtraction mode, the count changes as follows when it has reached the lower limit: 999999 0000 9999 KCN-B 999999 In the Addition mode, the count changes as follows when it has exceeded the upper limit 100 times: KCN-A The KCX-B models can count from 0 to 9999 (4 digits), or 0 to 999999 (6 digits). KCN-S/W 4. Count overrange KCN-A Electronic Counters KCX-B KCN-T Wiring Examples Pulse input Positive logic 2 INA Addition Subtraction 3 INB 1 1 2 3 4 Switch 1 at Position B Switches 2 and 4 at Position A 24V Addition 2 INA Subtraction 3 INB 4 E Sensor connected through NPN open collector gate 1 2 3 4 Switches 1 and 4 at Position B Switch 2 at Position A 4 E Sensor connected through PNP open collector gate Negative logic Positive logic 1 1 24V Addition 24V Addition 2 INA Subtraction 1 2 3 4 2 INA Switches 1, 2 and 4 at Position A Subtraction 3 INB 3 INB 4 E 4 E 1 2 3 4 KCX-RN Switch or relay 24V KCX 1 KCY Negative logic Switches 1 and 2 at Position A Switch 4 at Position B KCH-B Proximity switch or Photoelectric sensor Red Green White Black 1 KCM Rotary encoder 24V 2 INA 1 2 3 4 Switches 1 and 2 at Position B 3 INB 4 E On the TRD-J -RZ models, Switch 4 can be set to either Position A or Position B B-105 Electronic Counters KCX-B Count disable input Reset input Single preset in negative logic Single preset in positive logic 1 3 INB 1 KCV 4 E 2 3 4 24V 1 2 INA Switch 4 at Position A Negative logic 5 INH 3 INB 6 4 E 2 3 5 INH 6 NPN open collector or contact 5 INH NPN open collector 4 E 4 witch 4 at Position B PNP open collector KCN-A 7 R 1 2 3 4 KCN-S/W Switch 4 at Position A Dual preset in negative logic Dual preset in positive logic Positive logic 1 1 NPN open collector INH 8 24V KCN-B 2 INA 1 COM 9 3 INB N.O.1 10 2 INA PNP open collector 2 8 INH 24V 3 COM 9 3 INB 24V 4 N.O.1 10 5 4 E 1 2 3 4 Switch 4 at Position B 6 1 2 3 4 1 KCN-T Switch 4 at Position A 2 3 7 R 4 Switch 4 at Position B KCY DC output Relay output Single preset in negative logic Single preset in positive logic 16 24V 8 COM 9 Max. 30mA (Do not use relay drive.) 24V 2 INA 28V 8 15mA MAX. OUT 8 COM 9 Single preset COM 9 3 INB 3 INB Max. 35V load power KCX-RN 4 E Load power 4 E N.O. 10 N.C. 11 Load Load AC220V 2A Dual preset in negative logic KCM KCH-B 1 Load 2 INA OUT Load KCX 1 PNP open collector or contact Dual preset in positive logic 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 E 4 E Dual preset 8 COM 9 Load power 30mA MAX. Load 10 N.O.2 11 Load 15mA MAX. Load 5 N.O.1 5 N.O.1 Load AC220V 2A 35V MAX. Load 30mA MAX. B-106 N.O.1 6 N.O.2 15mA MAX. Load 6 N.O.2 Winder with one-step reduction gear PNP output proximity switch Timer The counter generates a stop signal when the number of turns has reached the second preset value. It generates a deceleration signal when the count has reached the first preset value. Select the Low count rate, Subtraction mode, Negative I/O logic and Separate pulse input. Switch 5 should be set to Position 0. When the pulse count has reached the first value, the reduction gear is activated to decelerate the motor. The bobbin stops completely when the count is decremented to zero. Cutter Disk shaped dog switch Brake Reduction gear Switches 1,2,3 and 4 at Position A 7 8 9 KCX-B Black (Blue) Decelerate Stop 4 W(M) INH 24V White (Black) Motor controller 3 IN A COM IN B N.O.1 E N.O.2 OUT 1 AC180 264V AC90 132V OUT 2 Brake power KCN-B Red (Brown) 2 4 1 2 3 Motor 0 1 5 6 Bobbin KCN-S/W Wire KCN-T AC100V R KCN-A Recommended applications KCN-A Electronic Counters KCX-B AC0V Reset KCY Start Stamper W(M) Red 24V Green White Black (Blue) OUT IN A COM IN B N.O. E Shield Solenoid power KCX KCX-B N.C. INH AC180 264V AC90 132V KCX-RN As the feed roller rotates, the workpiece is moved by a preset distance. The number of revolutions is converted to a pulse frequency by the rotary encoder, and counted by the electronic counter. When the count has reached a preset number, the counter generates a signal to activate the solenoid and the stamp. Use the dial on the counter panel to adjust the output duration. Select the Addition mode, Positive I/O logic, Two-phase input and High count rate. Switch 5 should be set to Position 2 or Position 5. AC100V R AC0V Reset 7 8 2 3 4 KCH-B 1 4 RZ 2 3 TRD-J- 0 1 5 6 9 Detect roller KCM Switches 1,2,3 and 4 at Position B Solenoid Stamp Preset interval Feed roller Feed motor B-107 KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCX-B T Fast Total Counters for Addition and Subtraction Maximum count speed: 10cps or 20kcps In addition to counting in two directions, these counters can use negative values. They are displayed on the easy to see green LED screen. Available options include count disable, reset prevention and negative or positive input logic. The counter can be used for positioning a moving object as shown below. Merits KCX-B6T Total counter as fast as 20kcps Using both addition and subtraction, the counter totals individual counts much more quickly than other similar products. With the option of 10cps, the counter can be used for many purposes. KCN-B Press Press count KCN-T KCY Two-phase input and separate input Limit switch With these options, the counter widens choices of input devices to rotary encoder, proximity sensors and relay contacts. It accepts simultaneous inputs for addition and subtraction. This is ideal for keeping track of variable quantities such as workpieces on a conveyor and cars in a parking lot. Rotary encoder Positive and negative input logics Table position KCX The choices of input devices are also expanded. Except for slow reset, positive or negative can be selected to allow the use of PNP or NPN open collector. KCX-RN Positive logic Ability to count negative numbers The count range is doubled by the ability to operate both in positive and negative numbers. Negative logic IN IN E E Relay input 24V KCM KCH-B KCX-B6T counter Negative 0 DC input Positive E 999999 999999 IN PNP open collector 24V IN E NPN open collector Fast reset and slow reset The two reset signals work as AND elements. They can be used to combine two different operations. For example, the counter can be reset only when the rotary encoder and the drilling machine are at their respective home positions. No additional circuit is required. Pulse input Phase A Phase B High-speed reset input Reset input B-108 Rotary encoder Phase Z Limit switch to detect home position Proximity switch Electronic Counters KCX Series Specifications KCX-B4T KCX-B6T 4 digits 6 digits Reset input Manual reset Memory backup at power shutdown Positive: 2.2k Negative: 3.3k "L"0 Response time On delay: Max. 25 Off delay: Max. 25 6V "H"16 Input resistance Positive: 2.2k Negative: 3.3k Input voltage "L"0 Response time On delay: Max. 25 Off delay: Max. 25 6V "H"16 Input resistance Positive: 2.2k Negative: 3.3k 30V s s 30V s s Input voltage "L"0 Response time On delay: Max. 50ms Off delay: Max. 50ms Input resistance Positive: 3.3k Input voltage "L"0 6V "H"16 6V "H"16 KCN-A Input voltage KCN-A Input resistance 30V 30V Manual reset is disabled by switch on front panel (by short circuiting terminals Time for charging 50h Backup duration 2000h(25 500ms Response of input gate upon recovery 50 500ms Sensor power DC+24V(20 80mA Withstand voltage AC 2kV for one minute (between AC power and Terminal E) Vibration resistance (In compliance to JIS C 0911) Noise resistance 1kV (square wave pulse with 1 s width) Source voltage AC90 132V, or AC180 14VA Ambient temperature 10 50 Storage temperature 20 50 Ambient/Storage humidity 35 ( 20 Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.5mm amplitude No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.35mm amplitude 264V 70 ) ) Response of emer 20 gency input gate 28V) and KCN-T High speed reset input Maximum count speed 999999 KCY Count disable input 999999 KCX Pulse input 9999 10cps or (selected by switch) 20kcps KCN-S/W 9999 Count range KCN-B Number of digits during transportation of less than one week) 85%RH (with no dewing) Approx. 350g Weight Character height on display: 8mm KCX-RN Model number Name 24V 80mA IN A IN B E IN H RD RH RL AC180 264V AC90 132V AC0V Description Sensor power Pulse count input A Pulse count input B Common input Count disable Manual reset prevention High speed reset input Reset input Not connected Not connected Not connected 1 Power input 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 Switches 1 to 4 9 10 11 12 13 14 B-109 KCM T/N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 KCH-B Terminal Assignment KCV Electronic Counters KCX-B T Operating procedures 1. Mode selection To select the counter modes, use the four switches located on the rear side of the counter. Switch Mode selected 1 IN A Count speed KCX-RN KCX KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A 2 Position IN B Count speed 3 Pulse count 4 Input logic Switches 1 and 2 Value selected A 10cps B 20kcps A 10cps B 20kcps A Separate B Two-phase A Negative B Positive A B 1 2 3 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 Count speed These switches are used to set or change the maximum count speed. Turn the either switch to Position A to select 10cps, and Position B to select 20kcps. Position A is used for relay input such as a switch or relay. Use Position B for DC input such s a rotary encoder or proximity switch. Pulse speed Switch 3 Separate mode (Position A) Addition This switch changes the pulse count mode between Two-Phase and Separate. For a Proximity switch or relay, set the switch to Position A to select the Separate mode. For a rotary encoder, set it to Position B to select the Two-Phase mode. IN A IN B Subtraction H L Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L). Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L). H L Two-Phase mode (Position B) Addition Subtraction IN A H L H L IN B H L H L Input logic Switch 4 Use this switch to select the input logic either Positive or Negative. To select the negative logic (active at "L" level), set the switch to Position A. To select the positive logic (active at "H"), set it to Position B. 2. Input logic selection A A Negative logic Positive logic KCH-B B B Switch 4 at Position A Negative logic input equivalent circuit Positive input equivalent circuit Input terminal Internal circuit KCM 24V Switch 4 at Position B 3.3k B-110 Internal circuit Input terminal ON voltage: Max. 6V OFF voltage: 16 to 30V ON current: Max. 9mA 2.2k ON voltage: 16 to 30V OFF voltage: Max. 6V ON current: Max. 14mA at 30V Electronic Counters KCX Series 3. Pulse count input Use Dip switch 3 to change the pulse count mode between Two-Phase (90 dephased) or Separate. Input waveforms A Separate mode KCN-A B Switch 3 at Position A Positive mode Addition Addition IN A L KCN-A IN A H H L IN B Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L). IN B Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L). IN A Subtraction Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L). IN A Subtraction Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L). H IN B L H L KCN-B IN B A Two-phase (90 dephased) mode B Negative mode Positive mode Addition Addition H IN A L H L L H L Subtraction Subtraction H IN A IN A L H IN B KCY IN B IN B L H KCX H L H L KCX-RN IN B KCN-T Switch 3 at Position B IN A Pulse count requirements Separate mode Two-Phase mode H IN A L H s or more 12.5 s or more IN B KCH-B L 12.5 IN B H H L L Each interval must be 12.5 s or more KCM IN A KCN-S/W Negative mode B-111 Electronic Counters KCX-B T 4. External reset input On the KCX-B T Series counters, reset and high speed reset are used as an AND gate. If you do not use both of them, keep the unused input at ON level. Pulse input KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Count 0 High speed reset input ON OFF Reset input ON OFF 5. Count disable input KCN-B The disable signal halts the pulse count. When it turns off, count restarts from the value at the time of halt. Input pulse KCN-T Count 0 ON OFF KCY Count block input KCH-B KCX-RN KCX Count overrange The KCX-B T models can count from-999999 to 999999 (6 digits) or-9999 to 9999 (4 digits). (1) Six digits In the Addition mode, the count is reset to 000000 when it has reached 999999. In the Subtraction mode, the count is reset to 000000 when it has reached -999999. (2) Four digits The counter displays only four digits, but internally keeps six-digit counts. The counter operates in the same way as the 6-digit model (KCX-B6T). KCM Disabling manual reset Connect Terminals 6 and 4 if you wish to disable the Reset button on the front panel. It allows you to prevent erroneous preset. B-112 Electronic Counters KCX Series Wiring Examples Pulse input Positive logic 1 24V Addition 2 INA Subtraction 3 INB 1 2 3 4 Switches 1 and 2 at Position B Switches 3 and 4 at Position A 24V Addition 2 INA Subtraction 3 INB 4 E Sensor connected through NPN open collector gate 1 2 3 4 Switches 1,2 and 4 at Position B Switch 3 at Position A 4 E Sensor connected through PNP open collector gate Negative logic KCN-A Switch or relay 1 Positive logic 1 1 24V Addition 24V Addition 1 2 INA 2 3 4 1 2 INA Switches 1,2,3 and 4 at Position A Subtraction KCN-A Negative logic Subtraction 3 INB 4 E 4 E 3 4 KCN-B 3 INB 2 Switches 1,2 and 3 at Position A Switch 4 at Position B KCN-S/W Proximity switch or photoelectric sensor Rotary encoder Green White Black 1 24V 2 INA 1 2 3 4 KCN-T Red Switches 1,2 and 3 at Position B 3 INB 4 E Count disable input KCY On the TRD-J -RZ models, Switch 4 can be set to either Position A or Position B Reset input Negative logic 4 E 3 INB 1 4 E KCX Negative logic 2 3 4 NPN open collector 1 5 Switch 4 at Position A 2 3 4 Switch 4 at Position A KCX-RN 5 INH 6 6 8 Reset input Positive logic (Fast reset) 1 24V 2 INA 1 1 2 3 4 24V KCM Positive logic KCH-B 7 High speed reset input NPN open collector PNP open collector 4 E Switch 4 at Position B 1 2 3 4 Switch 4 at Position B 3 INB 6 4 E 5 INH 7 High speed reset input PNP open collector NPN open collector 8 Reset input B-113 KCN-B KCN-T Changing the duration of Type A output In the One shot mode, output duration can be changed from 50ms to 1,000ms. For adjustment, use the dial on the front panel. (On the KCX- W and KCX- WM counters, the dial is located on the rear panel.) KCY T/B/B T) 6. In the following cases, 100 hours are required for charging the battery: When the counter is used for the first time When the battery is unused for a long time 7. Service life of battery When fully charged, the battery should be able to support memory for 2,000 hours (5,000 hours on the KCX- Turn the dial counterclockwise or clockwise to decrease or increase the duration. Turn it fully to either direction to select the minimum or maximum time. Electrolytic capacitor KCX- T models). It should be replaced when this period is years. It can serve longer if the ambient temperature is kept at 5 to 30 . 50ms 1000ms Protection against noise 4 E 5 CH1 6 CH2 Output duration Minimum Maximum 50ms 1s F 16V 100ms 2s 4.7 F 16V 150ms 3s 10 F 16V 250ms 5s 22 F 16V 500ms 10s None All of the KOYO electronic counters are tested for noise resistance. In addition to the standard tests, we perform special inspections to assure reliable performance. Use the following procedures for additional enhancement: 1. When you use a solenoid valve, clutch or brake near the counter, connect a surge absorbing circuit in parallel with its drive coil. This circuit should consist of a capacitor serially connected with a resistance of 100 (1/2W). Use an oilimpregnated capacitor or an MP capacitor of 0.1 to 0.5 F. Noise absorbing circuit R 100 1 2 W C 0.1 0.5 F Capacitor C R KCX-RN KCH-B Memory backup at power shutdown In some counters, a second battery is integrated to backup the count memory upon power shutdown. The battery can be fully charged in 50 hours. With only one hour charging, it can supply power for 40 hours, or 100 hours on the KCX- WM and KCXT models. Notes on memory backup 1. When power is shut down, the count display is cleared, and 2. In a noisy area, do not share the power line with a device that uses large electric current. Always shield the I/O signal cables, and connect the shielded cables between the sensor and the counter. If they are installed on separate frames, use a thick wire of at least 0.5mm2 to connect the frames. the sensor power drops to 0 V. 2. During Type B (Hold mode) operation, DC output also drops KCM WM and reduced to 50%. Normally, the battery can be used for five On the KCX single preset counters, you can extend the output time by adding a capacitor between the terminals and . 2.2 KCX KCX Series For optimum performance(KCX- , M, D, DM/ W, WM/ Counter KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters For optimum performance to 0V resulting in random signal. Upon the recovery of power, the signal output returns to the status before the power shutdown. Sensor Counter Shielded cable 12V OUT E 12V OUT E G 3. If the power is turned off during pulse input, the counter uses the battery to continue correct count. Thick wire 4. You cannot reset the count by shutting power down. 5. During power shutdown, the count is not reset by any external reset signal. B-114 Frame A Ground Frame B For optimum performance E E Ground the frame Other ground cable of large current Frame 4. Use a resistor of 470 (1/2W) if you add an electromagnetic relay to the slow pulse count terminal. Insert the resistor between the input terminal and the ground cable. This prevents incomplete contact, and helps improve reliability. 12V Electromagnetic contact Connecting the power On the KCX Series counters, the power transformer is set to 110V or 220V. Avoid the following connection: Electronic Counters KCN-A Presetting to zero The counter may be preset to zero (for example, to "000" on a 3digit counter). This may cause the counter to act as follows: It may generate a signal unless the input pulse is at "L" level and the reset signal is at "H" level. In the Type B mode, the counter may display 0,1,2,3 if a sequence of pulse signals are entered while the reset signal is at "L" level. KCN-T E 2 KCN-A Other device (1) Wrong AC 180 264V AC 90 132V W KCX 0V E AC 200 220V AC 100V KCX 2 0V KCX-RN 1 Correct AC 90 132V AC 180 264V KCX 0V KCX KCH-B 470 KCY IN 0V AC 100V AC 200/220V 0V 0V KCM Counter During operation, a change to the preset value may cause the counter to generate a false signal. Before you make a change, always turn the power off, or reset the counter. Otherwise, the counter generates no signal upon countup, or erroneously generates a signal before or after the count has reached the new value. KCN-S/W If you use a common ground for the counter and other devices, connect the ground cable to the counter frame. Use a thick and short ground cable, and isolate it from any other cable that grounds a large current. Changing the preset value KCN-B 3. Keep the minimum distance between Terminal E and the frames. KCX Series Other counters B-115 KCV Electronic Counters Cautions KCX Series Cautions Output relay contact The counter can be connected to an induced load. It may be an electromagnetic switch, control relay, AC solenoid or electromagnetic valve. The counter contains an output relay contact. Its service life is reduced if higher current or voltage flows to the contact. The following graph shows the relation between the durability of the contact and the magnitude of load: An effective means is to use a CR surge absorber or varistor. Connect such element in parallel with the load as shown below. Counter relay contact Counter relay contact R Load Load R KCN-A Relay durability curve AC 264V or less Machanical durability AC 264V or less Z: ZNR (Panasonic) ERZC05DK391 TNR (Marukon) TNR9G 431K Counter relay contact KCN-S/W 1000 AC 250V Resistance load 500 10E-2(IR) W60C (Hitachi) R Load DC 24V Coil load Times of contacts (in 100,000's) 50 AC 250V Resistance load DC 24V Coil load 10 KCN-T KCN-B 100 Surge absorbing circuit 0 1 2 3 Load current On the contact surface, carbide is produced by glow discharge of induced load being switched. This increases the contact resistance. The carbide produced can be eliminated by arc discharge that occurs at higher current. It keeps the contact surface clean with minimum resistance. At lower current or voltage, the contact cannot be switched properly because of the carbide. It becomes unserviceable before the number of contacts reaches the normal limit. Its life can be reduced to as short as one tenth or one hundredth of the time estimated from the above curve. If you use small voltage or current, action should be taken to prevent glow discharge. KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX KCY Under load conditions specified in JEM 1230 (1976) B-116 The induced load of the relay contact is 10% to 20% of the resistance load. The smaller the load is, the longer the contact can serve. With or without the memory backup, the status of DC output during power shutdown is undefined. That is, the output can randomly change between "1" and "0". On some models, certain numbers are displayed in different shapes as shown below. This is normal for such models. KCX-1D/2D/3D/4D KCX-B/KCX-B T Other models External Dimensions (in mm) Boring dimensions for wall surface mounting using Socket F 1-5 Thickness of panel for flush mounting Bracket (Tighten screws with a torque of less than 4 kg-cm.) 2-M4 84 75 60 ± 0.2 94.5 (118.5) 9 KCN-A 72 75 72 15 Dimensions with protective cover 61 57±0.2 0.7 0 0.2 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 72 20 22 External dimensions of Socket B (KB-03): Same as Socket F. KA-01, KF-03 and KB-03 are options. 68 0.7 0 KCN-T 18 21 68 60 84 38 2 1.5 10±0.2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Boring dimensions for flush mounting 4.5 hole Socket F (KF-03) for wall surface mounting Specified connector: KA-01 KA-01 KCN-S/W 72 Socket F or B KCN-B Protective cover KCN-A External Dimensions Electronic Counters KCX Series KCX KCY Notes: Use the screws provided to install the counter on Socket F (KF-03) or Socket B (KB-03). For the connector kit KA-01 and Socket B (KB-03), use screws sized as follows: For the connector kit (KA-01): 12mm or less For Socket B (KB-03): 30mm or less Do not use longer screws, as they may break the internal elements. Mounting hole dimensions KCX-RN 75 or more KCH-B 68 0.7 0 KCM 94 or more 68 0.7 0 Square hole When the protective cover is used, the mounting hole is 70 70mm. B-117 KCV Electronic Counters KCX- RN Maximum operating speed Presettable/Read-out Counter for High-speed Addition and Subtraction 20kHz This counter is equipped with a read-out function, setting input, and writing via full-digit static BCD code. In addition, size-matched output and zero output are provided in this addition and subtraction counter for high-precision position determination. 90 phase difference in operational input for addition and subtraction BCD load/preset Matched output Dual region counter for addition and subtraction Comparison circuit Load-directed input KCN-T KCN-B BCD input Zero output Control output KCN-S/W KCN-A Basic Composition Size output Preset input BCD output latch circuit KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX KCY BCD lead out The KCX-4RN and KCX-6RN consist of the following elements: 1) A counter with a positive and negative region for addition and subtraction. 2) Data input (load and preset use common terminals) for BCD coding. 3) Load-directed input for loading (writing) of BCD input data to a counter and presetting. 4) Output latch circuit for external output of count values in BCD code. 5) Comparison circuit for comparison of BCD preset data and count values. 6) Controlled output circuit that outputs matching, zero, and size signals using the logic circuit. Count operations Addition and subtraction counts can span both positive and negative regions. Load (writing) BCD data is written in the counter via the load-directed input. Presetting BCD input data is normally read by the comparison circuit. Output When count values=preset values/count values=0, respective controlled output is produced. B-118 Merits Load input (writing of count values)/setting input/read-out (read-out/output of count values) are provided by means of input and output functions for static signals via total digit static BCD coding. Thus, it can work obtaining count data and preset data from units like programmable controllers and computers is possible. 20 kHz high-speed operation It can correspond to an input signal with a 90 phase difference or addition and subtraction input to allow 20 kHz high-speed operation. To that end, high-speed control naturally prevents miscounts due to mechanical vibrations or backlash to allow highprecision control. Dual region positive and negative operation Counts are performed in both positive and negative regions for addition and subtraction. In addition, count values and preset values can also be loaded and preset in the positive and negative regions. With comparative output, matching, large, small, and zero outputs are provided, and comparison can be conducted in both positive and negative regions. Memory back-up upon power failure The counter has memory back-up upon a power failure via a secondary NiCd battery. When power is OFF, count values are retained. In addition, gates are provided for individual input to prevent malfunctions via the power source turning ON and OFF. Electronic Counters KCX- RN Specifications KCX-4RN(4-digit) Model number Maximum operational speed VIH VIL IIL Ton 25 s Ton 25 s VIH VIL IIL Latch input Response Input Response Toff 25 s 4.5V Min.(30V Max.) 1.0V Max. 5mA Max. Ton 25 s VIH VIL IIL Output-disabled input Toff 25 s 4.5V Min.(30V Max.) 1.0V Max. 5mA Max. High-speed Ton 25 s Toff 25 s Low-speed Ton 25ms Toff 25ms Reset input VIH VIL IIL 4.5V Min.(30V Max.) 1.0V Max. 5mA Max. VIH VIL IIL 4.5V Min.(30V Max.) 1.0V Max. 5mA Max. Ton 25 s Response BCD load-directed inpu (Notes 1 and 2) KCN-A Response Toff 25 s 4.5V Min.(30V Max.) 1.0V Max. 5mA Max. KCN-S/W VIH VIL IIL Toff 100 s Ton 25ms Toff 25ms (Note 7) Voltage input Ton 10 s Response VIH VIL Input resistance Toff 10 s 4.5 30V 2V Max. 6k KCY BCD input Minus sign Writing/setting input Open collector C=P Offdelay output Zero Offdelay output C P Output C P Output Output current 100 mA Max. (residual voltage 1.5 V) Relay drive possible (internal protective circuit for counter electromotive force) Response 50 (Note 6) s KCX Maximum permitted voltage DC45V Open collector Output current 30 mA Max. (residual voltage 1 V) Relay drive not possible Response 50 s KCX-RN Output C P output Zero output Maximum permitted voltage DC30V Voltage output 10-12 V (when +12 V is applied to LB1) Output resistance IOL Response 2.2k 20 mA (residual voltage 2 V) KCH-B No-load voltage BCD output C P Output 25 s Internal power source Preset OUT DC12V 30mA Load OUT DC12V 30mA DC 12 V 100 mA (+10-14 V) ripple 5% rms Sensor power source Memory backup upon power failure KCM Maximum permitted voltage DC45V Source output for digital SW common Memory duration Approx. 2000 hrs (25 C) Duration of input gate response upon power failure Duration of input gate response during power recovery 50 50 Notes: 1) Ton: Ondelay duration 2) Toff: Offdelay duration 3) VIH: High-level input voltage (non-operational) KCV 6k Response Disabled count input (Notes 3,4, and 5) KCN-B Input resistance 4.5V Min.(30V Max.) 1.0V Max. 5mA Max. KCN-T Count input KCX-6RN (6-digit) Dual phase : 20 kHz/500 Hz Addition and Subtraction: 20 kHz/500 Hz 200ms 500ms 4) VIL: Low-level input voltage (operational) 5) IIL: Low-level input current (current flowing from counter input terminals to an input device) 6) Output current: current that can flow to open collector transistors 7) When CH4(LB13) and E(LA5 and LB5) are short-circuited B-119 KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCX- RN KCX-4RN(4-digit) Model number Operational display Withstand voltage Vibration resistance Insulation resistance Source voltage Power consumption Ambient temperature Storage temperature Ambient humidity/storage humidity Weight Accessories KCX-6RN(6-digit) AC2000 V 1 minute between ground and power source terminals Durability: displacement amplitude 0.5 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes Conforms to JIS C 0911 No malfunction: displacement amplitude 0.35 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes DC500 V more than 20 M between ground and power source terminals AC90 132V AC180 264V 50/60Hz 16VA 10 50 (during transportation, -20-+70 is possible on the order of 1 week) 20 50 35-85% RH (with no dewing) 1.0kg Metal fittings for installation and a card edge connector Block Diagram KCN-B KCN-S/W Minus sign input BCD load input/preset input (common for load/preset and terminals) LB14 CH3 LA4 CH1 LA11 LB11 Switching between phase difference/addition and subtraction CH2 LA12 LB12 Switching between 20 kHz/500 Hz INA LB2 Count input BCD input circuit LED driver 1 KCN-T LB3 3 4 5 6 LA2 C P OUT OFF Delay LA8 C P OUT Zero Offdelay output LA3 Zero OUT OFF Delay Zero output LA6 Zero OUT C P Output LA7 C P OUT C P Output LA9 C P OUT Output for load selection LA13 Load OUT Output for preset selection LA14 Preset OUT Output for sensor power source LA1 0.1A 12V C P output Offdelay output Input processing Addition input INB 2 Up/Down counter Count input C P output Subtraction input INH LB4 Disabled count input RH LB7 High-speed reset output RL LB8 Low-speed reset output Latch LB6 BCD latch input OUT INH LB9 Output-disabled input CH4 LB13 Load IN LB10 Vcc LB1 E LA5 LB5 Gate KCY Comparison circuit KCX Setting input circuit KCM KCH-B KCX-RN 1 2 3 4 5 6 Output latch circuit Load-directed input LA10 BCD read-out C 0 OUT LB1 LA4 12V CH3 2.2k 12k 2.7k 12k 8.2 6.8k B-120 1.5k 2.7k output or zero output Offdelay output Zero Offdelay output Addition and subtraction counts are performed via an independent addition/subtraction signal or a dual-phase signal for a 90phase difference. Switching operational speed between 20 kHz/500 Hz is possible. Addition and subtraction counts are performed for counts in both positive and negative regions. After loading count values via BCD data, count signals are input and addition and subtraction counts are performed with this loaded data. Positive and negative display is indicated only with a minus sign. The minus sign input terminal and BCD input terminal data is loaded (written) into the counter or becomes preset data input depending on the Load instruction state. BCD input and minus sign input H Preset data is input L Loaded data is input Control output for load input terminals at the L level is locked out. Count input is given preference for loading (even when count input is added, forced loading will take place if the load-directed input is at the L level). If load-directed input is changed to BCD data and the like at the L level, the loaded data (count values) will also change accordingly. If load-directed input is at the H level, BCD data will become preset data. In this condition, changing the BCD data will change preset values accordingly. If the load-directed input is at the H level, preset data is usually compared to count values. When a load direction is via a relay, CH4(LB13) and E(LA5 and LB5) must be short-circuited. Controlled output Count values for load-directed input at the H level are usually compared to setting values. In this condition, the following controlled outputs are produced. C P output C P output C P output Zero output C: count values/P: setting values Note) These outputs are output only in conditions for count values and setting values. Note : Timing to perform latching of BCD data is a rise in BCD latch input terminals. When BCD latch input terminals reach the H level again, the BCD read-out and sign outputs will be output as current BCD data and sign data. Reset input Count values are reset to 0. When count values are loaded, they are given preference in loading and count values will become 0. KCN-S/W KCN-B –3 KCN-T –2 KCY –1 Operational chart Addition input Subtraction input Load values KCX 0 Preset values KCX-RN 1 BCD latch input terminals at the L level, count display, BCD readout data, and minus sign data are latched (retained). At this time, count values and minus sign values will change if there is count input. However, these outputs and count displays are latched as-is. 0 Reset input Load input output Zero output KCH-B 2 Loading and presetting Load-directed input Count values are usually output via BCD coding. In addition, minus sign data is usually output. These data outputs have a latch function and are held (latched) via BCD latch terminals at the L level. As a result, count data can be easily input into a programmable controller, computer, or the like. output output output Offdelay Output ZeroOffdelay Output approx. 50 ms approx. 50 ms KCM Input signal 3 All controlled output is in open collector format. BCD latch input Ex.: Substraction count 4 Offdelay BCD read-out/minus sign output Counting operations Display approx. 50 ms KCV Setting input KCN-A Operations Electronic Counters KCX- RN Outputs other than the 4 outputs above are the C=P Offdelay output and the zero Offdelay output. B-121 Electronic Counters KCX- RN Terminal Arrangement Name Sensor power source KCV KCN-A 1 Name Vcc IN Name Zero OUT OFF Delay 3 3 INB Switching to BCD input format CH3 4 4 INH Ground E 5 5 Zero OUT 6 6 Latch Latch input C P OUT 7 7 RH High-speed reset input C P OUT 8 8 RL Low-speed reset input C P OUT 9 9 OUT INH Output-disabled input C 0 10 10 Load IN Load-directed input CH1 11 11 Switching between 20 kHz/500 Hz CH2 12 12 Load OUT Selected output for digital SW common Preset OUT 13 13 15 15 6A 6D 16 16 6B 17 17 18 19 19 20 20 Empty terminals 21 21 AC power source 22 22 Empty terminals AC power source AC90 132V AC0V 1 A1 D1 2 2 B1 C2 3 3 A2 D2 4 4 B2 Disabled count input C3 5 5 A3 D3 6 6 B3 C4 7 7 A4 D4 8 8 B4 3rd digit 4th digit C5 9 9 A5 D5 10 10 B5 C6 11 11 A6 D6 12 12 B6 1C 13 13 1A 1D 14 14 1B 2C 15 15 2A 2D 16 16 2B 3C 17 17 3A 3D 18 18 3B 4C 19 19 4A 4D 20 20 4B 5C 21 21 5A 5D 22 22 5B 5th digit 1st digit Switching load input IN Minus sign input 2nd digit 6th digit read-out 3rd digit 4th digit 5th digit Name 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd digit 4th digit 5th digit 6th digit 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd digit BCD read-out 6C AC180 264V 1 2nd digit CH4 14 18 AC power source C1 6th digit 14 Empty terminals Signal Count input BCD lead-out 6th digit read-out UB 1st digit INA Switching between dual phase/addition and subtraction input UA Read-out voltage input 2 Controlled output Signal BCD load/setting input KCN-S/W 1 Signal BCD load/setting input KCN-B LB 2 Minus sign output KCN-T 12V LA C P OUT OFF Delay Offdelay output KCY Signal 4th digit 5th digit Note: The signal ABCD in BCD input and BCD read-out corresponds to 1, 2, 4, and 8 codes in respective BCD codes. KCX Input operating mode/Output operating mode Input Output Active Low input KCM KCH-B KCX-RN Category Terminal number Active High input Category Active Low output Terminal number Category Terminal number LB2 C LB3 C P Offdelay output LA2 LB4 Zero output LA6 High-speed reset input LB7 Zero Offdelay output LA3 Low-speed reset input LB8 C P output LA7 BCD latch input LB6 C P output LA9 INA Count input (dual phase) INB LB2 Disabled count input LB3 Output-disabled input LB9 Load-directed input LB10 B-122 INA Count input (addition and subtraction) INB P output Active High output Category LA8 BCD read-out BCD input UA1 12 (load/preset) UB1 12 Minus sign input LB14 Terminal number Minus sign output UA13 22 UB13 22 LA15,16 LB15,16 LA10 Terminals/Explanation of Their Functions LA 1 12V Explanation Reference diagram Sensor power source 100 mA C 3 Zero OUT OFF Delay Open collector format 100 mA internal protective circuit for counter electromotive force C=P OUT OFF Delay When output is ON(L), the C=P lamp lights up. 3 4 CH3 The E terminal or a +12 V terminal must be connected for the format output from an input device for BCD input. 4 5 E Ground (0 V common) 6 Zero OUT Open collector format 30 mA relay drive not possible. 5 7 C P OUT Open collector format 100 mA internal protective circuit for counter electromotive force When output is ON(L), the C>P lamp lights up. 3 8 C P OUT Open collector format 30 mA relay drive not possible. 5 9 C P OUT Open collector format 100 mA internal protective circuit for counter electromotive force When output is ON(L), the C>P lamp lights up. 3 10 C 0 OUT Minus sign output Voltage output format. 11 CH1 12 CH2 Input speed is 500 Hz via connection with the E terminal. 2 13 Load OUT Output for selection of setting devices for loading (H level for load-directed input L). 6 14 Preset OUT Output for selection of setting devices for presetting (H level for load-directed input H). 6 15 6C 4 6th digit read-out 16 6D 8 6th digit read-out When open, 90 phase differential input format/connection with the E terminal for addition and subtraction input. 2 KCN-B P OUT OFF Delay KCV 2 17 18 KCN-A Signal KCN-S/W Terminal number Electronic Counters KCX- RN AC source input AC180-264 V 19 21 22 LB 1 AC source input AC0 V Vcc IN Terminal that provides BCD read-out output voltage/connected to LA1(12 V) for output voltage of 12 V 1 Count input Dual phase/combined addition and subtraction 2 2 IN A 3 IN B 4 INH 5 E Ground (0 V common) 6 Latch BCD latch input Latches BCD lead-out and minus sign output. When input is ON(L), the Latch lamp lights up. 7 RH High-speed reset input 8 RL Reset input 9 OUT INH When output-disabled input is added, controlled output is disabled. 10 Load IN Load-directed input When input is added, BCD data is loaded in the counter. When input is ON(L), the Latch lamp lights up. 11 CH1 Input format Terminal for switching between dual phase/addition and subtraction (same as LA11). 2 12 CH2 Operational speed Terminal for switching between 20 kHz/500 Hz (same as LA12). 2 13 CH4 Switching load-directed input When open, breakless input/connection with the E terminal for relay input. IN Minus tally input Minus tallies are loaded for load input. When input is ON(H), the -P lamp lights up. 15 6A 1 6th digit read-out 16 6B 2 6th digit read-out KCX Disabled count input When input terminals are at the L level, counting is disabled. KCH-B 14 KCY KCN-T AC source input AC90-132 V KCX-RN 20 17 AC source input AC180-264 V KCM 18 19 20 AC source input AC90-132 V 21 22 AC source input AC 0V B-123 Terminal number Signal UA 1 1 C1 Terminal number Signal "4" 2 D1 "8" 3 C2 "4" 4 D2 "8" 5 C3 "4" 6 D3 "8" 7 C4 "4" 8 D4 "8" 9 C5 "4" 10 D5 "8" 11 C6 "4" 12 D6 "8" 13 1C "4" 14 1D "8" 15 2C "4" 16 2D "8" 17 3C "4" 18 3D "8" 19 4C "4" 20 4D "8" 21 5C "4" 21 5D "8" A1 "1" 2 B1 "2" 3 A2 "1" 4 B2 "2" 5 A3 "1" 6 B3 "2" 7 A4 "1" 8 B4 "2" 9 A5 "1" 10 B5 "2" 11 A6 "1" 12 B6 "2" 13 1A "1" 14 1B "2" 15 2A "1" 16 2B "2" 17 3A "1" 18 3B "2" 19 4A "1" 20 4B "2" 21 5A "1" 21 5B "2" 2nd digit 3rd digit BCD input 4th digit 5th digit 6th digit 1st digit 2nd diguit BCD read-out 3rd digit 4th digit 5th digit Explanation UB 1 1st digit Treatment of Vcc IN terminal LB1 2 When the output voltage for BCD read-out is 12 V, the connection is per the following diagram (however, supply of DC12 V to the external load is not possible in this instance). Vcc IN LB KCX-RN Explanation 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd digit BCD input 4th digit 5th digit 6th digit 1st digit 2nd diguit BCD read-out 3rd digit 4th digit 5th digit Note: BCD load input and BCD preset input use common terminals. KCX KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCX- RN 1 BCD read-out circuit Count input signals 1) Dual-phase input 90 late phase IN B 90 early phase IN A Subtraction 90 early phase 90 late phase IN A Addition LB1 2 2.2 k IN B LA 1 Counts with an 2 in timing. 12V Vcc IN KCH-B LB 1 0V 2) Addition and subtraction timing Residual voltage 5 2.2 k DC5 14V Addition: Input in INA (INB is for the L level) Subtraction: Input to INB (INA is for the L level) Power 2.0V KCM 20mA Note: With dual-phase input at a 90 phase difference and count input for addition and subtraction, operating modes will differ so exercise caution. When VccIn (LB1) is open, use is possible. In this case, output will be an open collector type. B-124 3) Count input: switching between dual-phase input/addition and subtraction input 3 Composition of controlled output (1) C Dual-phase input Leave CH1 terminal LA11 open. P output C P output Load 100mA 8.2 1.5V E 4 4) Switching between count input 20 kHz/500 Hz 20kHz Leave CH2 terminal LA12 open. LA LA CH2 12 3 CH3 E 4 5 KCN-B E 5 Treatment of CH3 terminal LA4 1) When the signal source that is added to BCD input and IN input is voltage output 500Hz Connect CH2 terminal LA12 and E terminal LA5. KCV Residual voltage These outputs form the circuit structure in the figure. KCN-A 11 C KCN-S/W 5 8.2 Offdelay output Power source CH1 Output circuit ffdelay output E Addition and subtraction input Connect CH1 terminal LA11 and E terminal LA5. LA P Zero E Electronic Counters KCX- RN LA4 12k KCN-T 12k 2.7k LA5 Input circuits (common input circuits) BCD input circuit Form of voltage output 12V KCY KCX-RN 2.7 k 2) When the signal source that is added to BCD input and IN input is an open collector 1.5 k 12V LA 1 CH3 E 4 5 KCX 6.8 k KCX-RN 5) Conditions for count input Phase-differential input Permitted operational range for input phase 90 45 IN A LA1 KCH-B LA4 12k IN B 12k IN B KCM 2.7k LA5 Input for addition and subtraction IN A Ta IN B Tb E Ta 12.5 s Tb 12.5 s Tc 12.5 s KCX-RN BCD input circuit Note: Treatment of step 1) or 2) must be performed. With CH3 open, data will become unstable. To this end, 1 will be input when it is open. Short-circuit output that is not used to E(LA5). Tc B-125 KCV Electronic Counters KCX- RN 5 C P output Zero output Output circuit These outputs form the circuit structure in the figure. This is not a protective circuit for counter electromotive force. Residual voltage Load Power source KCN-A 30mA KCN-S/W Memory backup upon a power failure Composition of controlled output (2) 1V 6 Composition and operation of the selected output for setting devices 1) 180 12V LA13 Load OUT A secondary battery is internally mounted, so count values can be retained in memory even during long-lasting power failures. The internal battery is charged while power is supplied to the power source (charging requires approx. 50 hrs). In this condition, the duration of memory retention when power to the power source is interrupted is approx. 2000 hrs (a standard value). Battery lifetime: When the duration of memory retention drops to 1000 hrs, this point is specified as the end of the battery's lifetime. In addition, having ambient temperature on the order of 5-30oC for the counter tends to prolong battery lifetime. Connection examples Sending signals to count input terminals Proximity switch/photoelectric sensor IN A IN B KCN-B LB LA14 Preset OUT 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 12V LA KCN-T E 2 LOWER 180 12V 1 1 11 Setting device, common for presetting 2) Setting device, common for loading Proximity switch Load OUT KCY LA Preset OUT 13 14 LB 1 2 E Load IN 5 10 B A Photoelectric sensor Subtraction Addition KCX Rotary encoder IN A IN B Load input LB 1 E 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 LOWER 12V KCH-B KCX-RN LA Preset OUT Load OUT L L H H H L Note: Even when Load OUT and Preset Out are at the L level, exercise caution since there is no current flow capacity. 7 KCM Load input Explanation of CH4(LB13) When load-directed input is breakless, open CH4(LB13). When load-directed input is relayed, connect CH4(LB13) and E (LB5 or LA5). LB B-126 E CH4 5 13 1 Red Green White Black 11 Open TRD-J TRD-GK Sending signals to a disabled count input gate DC output signal (general) 4 5 6 RH RL 7 8 LB 4 E Latch 5 6 LB 7 LOWER LA 4 5 6 7 6 5 6 LOWER LA 8 Latch 4 5 6 LA 7 KCV LOWER E 5 0V Relay signal DC output signal LB RH RL 4 5 6 7 8 4 5 6 7 8 E KCN-A DC output signal LOWER LB E OUT INH 5 9 LOWER E OUT INH 5 9 5 9 LOWER LA Switch, relay, etc. LB 5 LA 9 0V Relay signal Relay signal DC output signal LB IN H E 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 7 KCN-T LA KCN-S/W E LB KCN-B Sending signals to reset input terminals Electronic Counters KCX- RN DC24V R2 Relay coil 2 3 12 4 KCX 1 DC output signal C POUT ZeroOUT OFF Delay Application example Application to a multiplex preset counter D1 Digital switches LA TRD-GK -R Dn LB 1 1 Green 2 2 White 3 3 4 4 5 5 Black D3 LA D1 BCD input D2 Diode Driver KCX-RN C P output Circuit for selection of setting devices 8 2 KCM Red D2 When aligned with a setting device as in the diagram on the left, diodes as shown in the illustration are required. KCX-RN LA R1 KCH-B LA KCY LOWER C P Off delay output BCD input B-127 Digital switches for BCD data input Setting devices for loading Output for selection of setting devices When a digital switch is used as BCD data, L OUT (terminal LA13) and P OUT (LA14) serve as the voltage power source that is applied to common terminals and are interlocked with the load-directed input (terminal LB10). When load-directed input is at the H level, voltage is produced for P OUT. At this time, L OUT becomes 0 V. Digital switch data for settings is input as setting values to the counter. When load-directed input is at the L level, the reverse occurs and voltage is produced for L OUT while P OUT becomes 0 V. When load-directed input is at the L level, loading (writing) is possible. Thus, digital switch data for loading is loaded into the counter. If load-directed data is at the H level, the counter is ready for setting again. At this point, previously loaded values will not change even if load-directed input is at the H level. Setting devices for setting 6th digit CH3 LA4 E LA5-LB5 KCN-B Load input External Dimensions (in mm) 9 Metal fittings for installation (Screw clanp torguei 5kg-cm or less) 134 KCX 0 144 -0.5 67 0 72 –0.5 0.2 1-5 panel thickness KCY KCN-T LOUT LA13 LA14 POUT 2nd digit LB10 Load input UA12 UA11 UB12 UB11 1st digit 12V LA1 UA4 UA3 UB4 UB3 KCN-S/W UA2 UA1 UB2 UB1 KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCX- RN Square holes for embeddable installation KCH-B 68 +0.7 0 KCX-RN 0 137.8 –0.2 138 +10 The character height of the numerical display device is 12.7 mm. KCM Connector accessories B-128 Upper Lower Multi-connector with 17-18 keys 220D-44B-208 Multi-connector with 6-7 keys AB19/21 excluded 220D-40/44B-207 Counters for Display of High-speed Addition and Subtraction Maximum operating speed KCH-B Electronic Counters KCH-B switches to write settings 20kHz Used in industrial machinery, end-measuring devices, and the like, this electronic counter is exclusively for display. It is used to display items like movement distances for tables, the length of an item being tested, and thickness. KCV KCH-B6RN Merits KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A Displays dual + and - zone values. It comes equipped to write offset values. When measuring object length, height, or the like, values for start points with which you can set threshold at any value (+ values only). Input format is for both 90 phase differential input and addition/subtraction input. A built in DC power supply is provided for proximity sensor and encoder. Applicable for either wall-mounting or panel-cut-mounting. Application examples KCY KCN-T Positional display for the cutting block of a lathe Movement of the cutting block is retrieved as pulses from a rotary encoder connected to the motor. These pulses are used for counting/display with the counter for addition and subtraction display and indicate the position of the cutting block. +1958 KCH-B KCX + Numerically set position Wiring (5-digit) with external digital Digit output Bit input 1 2 4 C 8 1st 2nd digit digit COM 1 3rd digit 4th digit Digital switches (BCD) 5 Diodes 20 5th digit COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 1 2 4 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 KCH-B External Relay Configuration Diagram to write settings KCM This counter can also be used in other machines like milling machines and drill presses for display of the table position, display of cutting width for shearing machines, and to display length and thickness for digital micrometers, digital endmeasuring devices, and thickness-measuring devices. KCX-RN Rotary encoder B-129 Electronic Counters KCH-B Specifications Model number KCH-B4RN KCH-B6RN Number of digits 4-digit 6-digit Maximum operational speed Input resistance KCV Counting input KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A Writing-directed input Input format 6k 6 16V Addition/subtraction signal or dual-phase (90 ) signal Input pulse amplitude "1" "0" Responsiveness Ondelay duration: less than 0.2 ms Offdelay duration: less than 0.2 ms Input resistance 6k Digit output Setting input 25 25 6 s s 16V Written (last 4 digits) as writing-directed input for digital switch connection Bit input Responsiveness Ondelay duration: less than 5 ms Offdelay duration: less than 1 ms Input resistance 6k External reset Power source reset 20kHz Duration of power source interruption Reset duration 6 16V Must be less than 0.2 s Less than 0.2 s (the duration of count inoperability while power is supplied) Sensor power source DC +12 V 100 mA below 3% (ripple/effective values) Withstand voltage AC1500 V 1 minute between ground and power source terminals Vibration resistance Conforms to JIS C 0911 Insulation resistance DC500 V more than 20 M Source voltage AC100V(90 132V) AC200/220V(180 264V) Lifetime No output circuit, so not specified in particular Ambient temperature 10 50 Storage temperature 20 70 Ambient humidity/storage humidity 35 85 Durability: displacement amplitude 0.5 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes No malfunction: displacement amplitude 0.35 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes between ground and power source terminals 50/60 Hz approx. 12 VA (with no freezing) RH (with no dewing) Weight Approx. 1 kg Accessories Metal fittings for installation, card edge connector KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX With writing directions, send a signal of more than 1 ms to write-directed terminals. B-130 Written (last 5 digits) as writing-directed input for digital switch connection Wiring example Sending signals to count input terminals Photoelectric sensor Proximity switch Black (blue) Photoelectric sensor A Proximity switch A For addition and subtraction input, terminal 2 (INA) is for addition input and terminal 3 (INB) is for subtraction input. For 90o phase differential input, a signal input in terminal 3 (INB) that proceeded a 90 phase via terminal 2 (INA) is added. When this order is reversed, the signal is subtracted. When an addition input signal and subtraction input signal are added at the same time, a miscount occurs, so have a time difference of at least 50 s for timing of the rising edge of the Red Green White (green) Black Photoelectric sensor B Proximity switch B Sending signals to reset input terminals DC signal (general) E Relay signal 12V R R 12V DC output signal 5.6k addition input signal and subtraction input signal. It starts counting in 0.2s or more after power up. Applying a voltage +6 to +16V onto write-command terminal will display the value that is set with the external setting Switch, relay, etc. c b e Sending signals to write-command input terminals device. When resetting the display, push the reset button, apply voltage of a voltage +6 to +16 V to terminal 6 or interrupt the power E KCV White (black) Red rown) IN B KCN-A CH 12V IN A E KCN-B E IN B KCN-S/W 12V IN A Rotary encoder KCN-T Connection of terminals (E) and (CH) is for addition and subtraction input; when not connected, the counter is ready for 90 phase differential input. DC signal (general) supply for at least 0.2 s. The POSITION display lamp lights up when sending a 1 input Relay signal Write-directed E input Write-directed input 12V KCY Operations Electronic Counters KCH-B signal to the write command input terminal. In addition, it goes DC output signal 12V KCX out when the counter is reset. 5.6k b Switch, relay, etc. c KCX-RN e 0.2s or less 0.2s or more ON Power source OFF Terminal arrangement Addition input Terminal number Connection Terminal number 1 12V (sensor power source) 12 1st digit 2nd digit Display values 0 Set writing values Reset (external button pushed) Write-command Operations Chart The chart is for when the input format is dual signal input for addition/subtraction. IN A 13 KCH-B 2 3 IN B 14 3rd digit 4 Write command 15 4th digit 5 E (ground) 16 5th digit 6 R (Reset) 17 Not connected 7 Ch (switching) 18 AC 200/220 V power source 8 "1" 19 Not connected 20 AC 100 V power source 21 Not connected 22 AC 0 V power source 9 "2" 10 "4" 11 "8" Digital switch digital switches KCM Subtraction input Connection B-131 Electronic Counters KCH-B External Dimensions (in mm) Wall-mounting using a designated socket (F) Boring dimensions for installation Boring dimensions for installation of a designated socket F or B 1-5 panel thickness for embedded installation 4 100 0.2 67 100 100 KCN-A 10 0 72 –0.5 KCV 2-M4,P=0.7 119 9 119 134 160 0 144 -0.5 KCN-S/W 0.2 KCN-B 68 +0.7 0 0 137.8 -0.2 KCN-T 138 +10 Installation Diagram KCY Embedded installation Wall-mounting installation Exclusive socket (B) use Socket KF-12A Metal fittings for installation Tightening torque of less than 0.5 Nm Metal fittings for fixture Socket KB-12-0 Spring washer KCX-RN KCX Spring washer M4 x 8 screw M4 x 25 screw Spring washer Multi-connector use KCH-B M4 x 25 screw Metal fittings for installation Multi-connector KCM Tightening torque of less than 0.5 Nm Metal fittings for connector control M4 x 12 screw Spring washer B-132 Notes: 20 1 It is recommended to use Chuo Musen 120 -B-102 multi22 connector with key for the DIN standard size (72 144mm) counter. 2 Designate our multi-connector metal fittings when ordering separately. 3 When ordering the multi-connector connector metal fittings and screws as one set, designate the kit model number. 100 1 2 W 0.1 0.5 F Capacitor C E 2 KCV E 1 E KCN-A Frame ground Ground that flows some other large current Frame When sending a relay signal for a magnetic relay to a relay input terminal, a resistor (470 1/2 W) should be provided. Malfunctions due to poor contact can be prevented and the degree of reliability will increase further. Noise prevention circuit R C Other device Counter R KCN-S/W When a voltage of more than +2 V is applied to the reset terminal, counting cannot be performed. Momentarily applying voltage to the reset terminal during counting or interrupting the power supply may lead to the resetting of count values. When the setting value is 0 and a setting device is operated while the counter is operating, output is produced so avoid operating a setting device during operation whenever possible. Changes in settings should be performed with power off or with external resetting. When using the counter near a solenoid valve, clutch, brake, or the like, a capacitor (0.1-0.5 F condenser) aligned with the driving coil, resistance (100 1/2 W), and a surge absorption element in a series circuit should be connected to prevent noise. When the counter's ground and ground wires for other devices are used in common, the ground wire should be as thick and short as possible and connected to the housing in at least one location. The counter's ground wire and other ground lines flowing other large currents should be differentiated. KCN-B Important Electronic Counters KCH-B 12V Electromagnetic contact device KCN-T The power source transformer has antistatic shielding to prevent noise, so the G terminal (ground) that is at the drawing opening for the shielding wire should be connected to the control panel (housing). IN 470 1 2 W E KCX KCY When using the counter in locations with substantial noise, using shielding wire and avoid wiring the counter's commercial power source and input/output wiring other than relay output together with heavy electrical wiring in order to avoid malfunctions. The shield casing of shielding wires should be connected to the counter's E terminal (ground) and the housing with other terminals open. Sensor KCX-RN In addition, a heavy lead wire (better than 0.5 mm2) should be used for connection to the frame when the sensor and counter are installed separately in the frames. KCH-B Counter Shielding wire 12V IN E Connected with a thick lead wire Frame A G KCM 12V OUT E Frame ground Frame B B-133 Multi-counter (Maintenance Counters) The KCM-50 series has 9 counters aggregated into one unit, while the KCM-51 series has 8 counters (timers) aggregated into one unit). These devices can indicate tool replacement for machining centers, NC industrial machinery, and the like as well as maintainance periods for multiple tools. Tool management: Replacement notification/warning Whetstones for grinding: Maintenance notification Quantity management: Total counters/preset counters Time management: Integration timers KCM-50 series KCM-51 series KCM-50/KCM-50-1 KCM-50P/KCM-50P-1 KCM-51/KCM-51-1 KCM-51P/KCM-51P-1 This counter is equipped with 9 units for count input/presetting/independent alarm output (increased count output). The counter produces output when an individual unit reaches set values for equipment halt. This counter is equipped with 8 units for count input/presetting/independent alarm output (increased count output). The counter produces output when an individual unit (timer) reaches set values for equipment halt. Open collector output: KCM-51 (Surface sheet in Japanese) KCH-B Open collector output: KCM-50 (Surface sheet in Japanese) KCM-50-1 (Surface sheet in English) KCM-51-1 (Surface sheet in English) KCM KCX-RN KCX KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters KCM-50-1/51-1 Voltage output: KCM-50P (Surface sheet in Japanese) Voltage output: KCM-51P (Surface sheet in Japanese) KCM-50P-1 (Surface sheet in English) B-134 KCM-51P-1 (Surface sheet in English) KCM-50 series Basic operations Timing chart Merits KCM-50/50-1 Electronic Counters KCM-50-1/51-1 Nine 5-digit preset counters are aggregated into one unit Current values (count values) Counter No. 1 Equipment halt settings KCV Battery-less Alarm settings Independent alarm (preset) output from 9 circuits Counter input 1 Green Orange Green Orange Red Pre-alarm/alarm display Color-differentiated display pre-alarm (green)alarm (orange)-equipment halt (red) The pre-alarm is provided to indicate when alarm values are being approached. KCN-A Pre-alarm settings Equipment halt display Alarm output Equipment halt output H (OFF) L (ON) Reset (external or key input) KCN-S/W Retention of set values and count values is maintenance-free thanks to use of EEPROM. Equipment halt output KCN-B Over-values are set with respect to set alarm values for individual counters. Equipment halt (displayed in red) is output whenever a counter reaches over-values. KCN-T These 9 preset counters can also be used as a total counter KCY The counters can be preset (alarm setting) independently to output preset values (displayed in orange) when counts are input. Oil-resistant front operation panel Small (DIN 72 x 72mm) KCX The counter's depth is 82 mm, which makes it thin enough for a control panel. KCX-RN Application example: Tool maintenance for multiaxial industrial machinery KCH-B Processing count input 1 2 9 3 9 KCM 1 2 Equipment halt output Lamp/buzzer/equipment halt, etc. Notes 1: Counters 2-9 operate in the same manner. 2: When counters 1-9 reach a set value for equipment halt, the equipment halt output and display come ON. Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 9 B-135 Electronic Counters KCM-50-1/51-1 KCM-51 series Merits Basic operations Timing chart Eight 5-digit preset counters (timers) are aggregated into one unit Current values (count values/time keeping values) KCM-51-1/51-1 Counter/timer No. 1 KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Setting 1 or 3 Setting 2 Battery-less Retention of set values and count values is maintenance-free thanks to use of EEPROM. Independent alarm (preset) output from 8 circuits Counter/timer input 1 Green Orange KCX KCX-RN Green Orange Red Setting 1/ Setting 2 display Color-differentiated display for counters (timers) upon reaching set values Setting 2 output OR output Setting 1 (green)-Setting 2 (orange)- Setting 3 (red) Reset (external or key input) OR output Output is produced by any of the counters (timers) upon reaching Setting 1 values or Setting 3 values. These 8 preset counters can also be used as a total counter or integrated timer Use of counter and timer functions can be mixed. Any counter /timer can be reset with an external signal. Oil-resistant front operations panel Small (DIN 72 x 72) The counter's depth is 82 mm, which makes it thin enough for a control panel. Application example: Tool maintenance for multiaxial industrial machinery Processing count input Timekeeping input 1 2 KCH-B Setting 1 1 2 8 3 8 Notes 1: Counters/timers 2-8 operate in the same manner. 2: When counters (timers) 1-8 reach Setting 1(Setting 3), the OR output comes ON. B-136 Lamp/buzzer/equipment halt, etc. KCM OR output Setting 2 output 1 Setting 1 output 2 Setting 2/output 8 H (OFF) L (ON) Electronic Counters KCM-50-1 Front Panel Layout and Description Count-up display (green-orange-red) Key Current value display Displays pre-alarm/alarm equipment halt if present in Setup mode. When no displays are lit, the counter is in Run mode. Displays the current value of the counter displayed by Counter No. In Run mode, zeroes for higher digits are not lit. Set value display Counter No. display Displays the set value (alarm, pre-alarm, or equipment halt) of the counter displayed by Counter No. In Run mode, zeroes for higher digits are not lit. Key (Digit Selection Key) Used for selection of digits during set value input. 5th digit 4th digit 1st digit In Run mode, unused counters are not displayed. The selected digit flickers. Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the display will automatically advance. Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the display will automatically advance. MODE Key Key (Value Advancement Key) Switches between Run mode and Setting modes. The number of the digit selected is advanced with this key. Setting modes Run KCH-B Switches the counter's Current value display and Set value display. 1 2 3 8 9 Alarm Pre-alarm 0 1 2 8 9 Equipment halt When no key input continues for longer than 1 minute, the display automatically switches to Run mode. KCX-RN Key Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the display will automatically advance. SET Key This key sets values as set in memory in Setting mode. Once set, a portion of the Set value display will blink 3 times, which represents input. B-137 KCM CNT No. KCX Displays the selected Counter No. When counters are counting up (set alarm values), this display switches to the Counter No. with an increased count. KCN-S/W Mode display KCN-B Displays counters that have reached equipment halt settings. KCN-A Equipment halt display (red) KCN-T Resets values currently displayed. When multiple counters are counting up, operating Reset switches to the next counter display. KCY Reset KCV Green: Represents reaching prealarm set values. Orange: Represents reaching alarm set values. Red: Represents reaching equipment halt settings. Electronic Counters KCM-50-1 Input and Output/Specifications DC24V IN COM Block Diagram KCM-50 Count input Increased count display Equipment halt display 5V 1 1 2 Power source circuit 0V COM 2 Equipment halt output 3 Alarm output 1 Current value display 4 2 Count No 5 Display 3 Set value display 4 6 5 KCV 7 OR 8 9 Operational speed switching input Count No. selection input 7 Preset counter 9 8 9 KCN-A CH OUT COM DC24V DC24V IN COM Count input Increased count display Equipment halt display 1 Power source circuit CPU normal Alarm output 1 Current value display 4 2 Count No. 5 3 Set value display Display 4 6 5 KCN-T KCN-B 7 9 KCY Count No. selection input 7 Preset counter 9 8 Reset input 9 Run output CPU normal OUT COM Explanation of functions Specifications Regardless of Run mode/Setting mode, the current values of the counter are added (+1). Current values proceed from H L, L H, and L H (positive logic). Operational speed switching input OFF 30Hz ON 500Hz 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 15, 16, 17 Alarm output 1 9 Output when set alarm values are reached with independent output for counter Nos. 1-9. 4 Equipment halt output Output when equipment halt settings are reached with output for any counter from Nos. 1-9. 11 Run output ON for CPU normal/OFF for CPU abnormal Count No. display Displays the Counter No. selected via the Counter No. selection key or external counter no. selection input. Switches to the Counter No. (in order of preference) with an increased count when counters are counting up. Order of preference: Equipment halt alarm pre-alarm 18 26 KCX Operational speed switching input 6 5-digit, 3-stage CH 5, 6, 7, Count input 12, 13, 14, 1 9 19, 20, 21 25 KCH-B KCX-RN OR 8 I/O KCM-50 5V 24V Alarm output Equipment halt output Run output KCM Input OUT COM 0 V COM Max. DC45 V/0.1 A 3.3k 5V Input circuit 2.2k Input B-138 Output circuit KCM-50P Input voltage (Positive logic) ON: 0-6 V OFF: Input open (Negative logic) ON: 16-27.6 V OFF: 0-6 V Input resistance: 2.2 k Duration of input response: 30ms 30Hz 10ms 500Hz Notes 1: IN COM and 24 V are connected internally to the counter. 2: OUT COM and 0 V COM are connected internally to the counter. 24V OUT COM IN COM KCM-50 Input voltage ON: 0-3 V OFF: more than 16 V Input resistance: 3.3 k Response duration ON : After power supply less than 1.5 s OFF: After abnormality sensing less than 10 ms Output circuit IN COM KCM-50P Operational speed 30/500Hz Switching with source ON edge Ondelay: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Counter selection input Count No. 30ms Counter No. advances with H L and L H (positive logic). Offdelay: selection input In Run mode, unused counters are not selected. 30ms Ondelay: Current values of the counter specified by Counter No. are reset. 0.1s Reset input When input for Counter No. selection and reset are input together within Offdelay: approx. a 5-seoncd interval, all counters are reset. 0.1s Input circuit 10 0V COM 2 3 Terminal number 10 24V 5V 1 2 1 Positive logic 2 Negative logic DC24V 15 Or 2 KCN-S/W Run output CPU normal 0V COM KCM-50P 6 5-digit, 3-stage Reset input 1 10 24V Alarm output Equipment halt output Run output Note: OUT COM and 24 V are connected internally to the counter. Electronic Counters KCM-51-1 Front Panel Layout and Description Count-up display (green-orange-red) KCV Green: Represents reaching Setting 1 values. Orange: Represents reaching Setting 2 values. Red: Represents reaching Setting 3. Key Mode display Current value display Displays Setting 1/Setting 2/Setting 3 if present in Setup mode. When no displays are lit, the counter is in Run mode. KCN-T Displays the current value of the counter/timer displayed by Counter /timer No. In Run mode, zeroes for higher digits are not lit. Set value display C/T No. display Displays the set value (Setting 1, Setting 2, or Setting 3) of the counter/timer displayed by Counter /timer No. In Run mode, zeroes for higher digits are not lit. KCX Displays the selected Counter/ timer No. When counters/timers are counting up (Setting 2), this display switches to the Counter/Timer No. with an increased count. KCN-S/W Differentiates timekeeping units by color for display during timer operation. Green: Seconds Orange: Minutes Red: Hours KCN-B Resets values currently displayed. When multiple counters are counting up, operating Reset switches to the next counter display. KCN-A Timekeeping unit display (red) KCY Reset Key (Digit Selection Key) Switches the counter's Current value display and Set value display. 1 2 3 8 Used for selection of digits during set value input. 5th digit 4th digit 1st digit In Run mode, unused counters/timers are not displayed. The selected digit blinks. Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the display will automatically advance. Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the display will automatically advance. Key (Value Advancement Key) MODE KCX-RN Key KCH-B C/T No. Key 0 1 2 KCM The number of the digit selected is advanced with this key. Switches between Run mode and Setting modes. 8 Setting modes Run Setting 1 Setting 2 Setting 3 Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the display will automatically advance. When no key input continues for longer than 1 minute, the display automatically switches to Run mode. SET Key This key sets values as set in memory in Setting mode. Once set, a portion of the Set value display will blink 3 times, which represents input. B-139 Electronic Counters KCM-51-1 Input and Output Functions/ Specifications 1 or 2 DC24V 15 DC24V IN COM Increased count/time display 1 2 Block Diagram KCM-51-1 0V COM 2 OR output 3 4 Power source circuit 5V 1 C/T input Count No. 1 Current value display C 5 2 T No Display 3 Set value display 4 6 5 KCV 7 OR 8 C/T No. Selection 5-digit, 3-stage 7 B1 Preset counter x 8 (timers) 8 BA KCN-A Run output CPU normal Reset input OUT COM 3 Or 4 KCM-51P-1 6 B0 B2 1 Positive logic input 2 Negative logic input DC24V DC24V IN COM KCN-S/W Increased count/time display Timer display 1 0V COM 2 OR output 3 4 Setting 2 output 1 Current value display C 5 2 T No Display 3 Set value display 6 4 7 5 OR KCN-B 8 C/T No. Selection B0 B1 B2 KCN-T KCY KCX KCX-RN KCH-B KCM 6 5-digit, 3-stage 7 Preset counter x 8 (timers) 8 Total C/T No. selection BA BA I/O 15 15 24V Power source circuit 5V 1 2 Terminal number DC24V 15 C/T input 3 Positive logic input 4 Negative logic input 15 24V Timer display Run output CPU normal Reset input OUT COM Explanation of functions Specifications Regardless of Run mode/Setting mode, the count (timekeeping) of the counter (timer) is performed. When used as a counter, current values proceed from OFF ON Operational speed 30 cps/500 cps Min. pulse amplitude 16.6 ms/1 ms 5 6 7 12 13 14 19 20 C/T input 1 8 21, 26, 27 C/T No. Selection input Specifies 3 inputs (B0, B1, and B2) for the counter/timer No. that is to be reset. 18 C/T No. Selection input Input is ON when during reset input for all timers and counters to be selected. 25 Reset Current values of the selected Counter/timer No. become 0. 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 15, 16 Setting 2 output 1 8 Output when Setting 2 values are reached with output for any counter/timer from Nos. 1-8. 4 OR output 11 Run output ON for CPU normal/OFF for CPU abnormal. Counter/timer No. display Displays the Counter/timer No. selected via the Counter/timer No. selection key or external C/T No. selection input. When used as a timer, timing starts OFF ON. Timekeeping is continuous when ON. Timing is halted with ON OFF. Timekeeping range Hours 1-99999 hrs Minutes 1-99999 mins Seconds 1-99999 s Input voltage (Negative logic) ON: 0-6 V OFF: Input open (Positive logic) ON: 16-27.6 V OFF: 0-6 V Input resistance: 2.2 k Ondelay: 30 ms Offdelay: 30 ms Duration of input response: 30 ms (30-Hz timer) Output when Setting 1 (Setting 3) values are reached with output 10 ms(500 Hz) for any counter/timer from Nos. 1-8 Response duration ON: After power supply less than 1.5 s OFF: After abnormality sensing less than 10 ms Default settings: Pressing the Mode key and + key at the same time has the counter enter Default Setting Mode, and default setting of the following data is performed.1)Counter/timer selection 2)Setting of operational speed/timekeeping units 3)Selection of Reset key disable or enable 4)Set value selection with respect to OR output (Setting 1 or Setting 3) KCM-51-1/51P-1: Input circuit KCM-51-1: Output circuit 5V IN COM Input 2.2k B-140 0V COM KCM-51P-1: Output circuit Setting 2 output OR output/Run output Open collector 24V OUT COM Voltage output Setting 2 output OR output/Run output OUT COM Notes 1: Input common 0 V: Positive logic 24 V: Negative logic 2: Output common KCM-51-1: 0 V and internally short-circuited KCM-51P-1: 24 V and internally short-circuited 70 (with no freezing) 85%RH(with no dewing) Withstand voltage AC500V 50/60 Hz 1 minute (uncharged metallic portion exposed to charged portion and external portion) Noise resistance Between power source terminals: 1 kV (pulse amplitude 1 s rise 1 ns) Between input terminals: 500 kV (pulse amplitude 1 s rise 1 ns) Vibration resistance No malfunction: displacement amplitude 0.5 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes Durability: displacement amplitude 0.75 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes Impact resistance 98m/s2 along three axes Munsell N-4 (dark gray) ABS material 7 4 5 6 RUN 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0V OUT +24V COM COM IN CH COM 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 OR output 1 2 3 Setting 1/3 Setting 2 output C/T input 350g Weight 6 7 8 9 Operational 7 8 9 Predicted output speed Count input Insulation resistance more than 100 M DC500 V 1 minute between power source and input terminals Case packing 5 Model numbers Model number KCM-50 KCM-50-1 KCM-50P KCM-50P-1 4 5 6 RUN 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 7 8 N.C Setting 2 output BA 7 8 B0 C/T input C/T No. Selection input IN B1 B2 COM 0V OUT +24V COM COM 22 25 23 24 26 27 28 KCM-51 KCV 20 45 4 KCN-A Ambient humidity/ storage humidity 3 Counter No. Storage temperature 55 2 3 Equipment 1 2 3 halt Predicted output Count input 5W 10 2 1 Reset Power consumption Ambient temperature 1 KCN-S/W KCM-50 Series Source voltage DC 24 V 15% (20.4-27.6 V) KCM-50-1: DC 24 V 10% (21.6-26.4 V) KCN-B Specification Reset Item Terminal arrangement (names and functions) KCN-T General Specifications (Common to KCM-50-1/51-1 Series) Electronic Counters KCM-50-1/51-1 KCM-51-1 KCM-51P KCY (Accessories) Metal fittings for installation KCM-51P-1 External Dimensions KCX (in mm) Installation panel thickness 1-5 75 3rd KCX-RN Boring dimensions Metal fittings for installation +0.5 68 –0 COUNT SET 67.4 MODE 1st 72 C/T No. +0.5 68 –0 RESET 2nd SET Square hole 9 65 17.5 67.4 KCM 72 KCH-B MODE 75 3rd C/T No. B-141 Electronic Counters Products Related to Electronic Counters Model number Appearance Applicable countents External dimensions KCV 100 22 20 18 17 16 0.2 15 14 13 12 11 60 0.2 84 Sockets for wall surface mounting 119 6 5 4 3 2 1 KCX KCX-B KF-03 100 21 4.5Hole KCH-B 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 72 KCX-RN not included. 8 23 5 4 3 2 1 2– 4.5Hole 2– KCN-A 6.5 3-M4. P=0.7 10 9 8 7 6 KF-12A 7 6 20 22 5 4 2– 4.5Hole KCN-B KF-04 KCY 9 3 10 11 1 26 60 KCN-S/W Selecting Socket 2 48 KCN-T 6.5 28 23 KCH-B 80 4.5 Hole 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 22 119 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 32 84 Sockets for flush mounting KCX KCY 2- KCX KCX-B KB-03 2-M3 Hole 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4.5 22 72 4 5 6 7 8 47 KCX-RN 0.2 100 KB-12-0 6 7 8 9 10 21 0.2 1 2 3 4 5 KB-04 3 KCH-B KCY 9 2 1 11 10 45 31 KCX-RN not included. KCX KCX-B 57 KCX-RN not included. 0.2 61 1.5 10 0.2 KCH-B 7.5 94 7.5 18.3 Multi-purpose connector with keys(120-20 22 )manufactured by Chuo Musen) Support metals Screws External dimensions 6.3 Connectors for flush mounting B-142 KA-12 Connector Support metals Screws Applicable counters 7 13 KA-01 Contents 18 21 KCM Kit model number Electronic Counters Products Related to Electronic Counters CPG-22 Clock-pulse generator CPG-22 Pulse generation Power source Electronic counter Output CPG-22 24V E Specifications CPG-22 Model number The clock-pulse generator (1 Hz, 10 Hz, and 100 Hz) provides high-precision digital control using a liquid crystal oscillator. It can be used as a high-precision timer in combination with preset counters like KCX. Output 10Hz 100Hz Reset input Power source Output resistance Output duration Output resistance Output duration Output resistance Output duration Input resistance IResponsiveness Approx. 1.5 (6-9 V) Approx. 50 ms Approx. 1.5 KCN-T 1Hz (6-9 V) Approx. 50 ms Approx. 1.5 (6-9 V) Approx. 5 ms KCY Operation KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A DC12 KCN-A The clock-pulse-generator provides the pulse which you can use for application requiring high-precision timer for a long period. Approx. 24 Less than 1 ms min. pulse amplitude of 5 ms DC 12/24 V common (DC 10-30 V) Storage temperature 10 50 20 70 Ambient humidity/ storage humidity 35 Accessories None (with no freezing) RH (with no dewing) Terminal arrangement Socket (F) KCH-B External Dimensions (in mm) 85 KCX-RN Ambient temperature KCX Consumption current 30mA KF-02 2 100Hz output 4.5hole 10Hz output 3 4 5 2 1 8 50 80 8.5 40 0.2 50 19 23 E 6 1Hz output 7 Reset imput KCM 60 80 80 108 4 Power source input (DC10 30V) B-143 KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters Products Related to Electronic Counters Pulse Generator FG-01 The pulse generator converts the ON/OFF output of E-01Z (PLC, Add/sub. counter module) to a pulse train for pulsemotor application. The Generator has voltage output to allow high-speed control of DC sensor motors and inverter motors. Settings like low speeds, high speeds, timing related to addition and subtraction, and DC voltage output can be set in a broad range via volume on the front panel. Count output can be switched between positive and negative logic to allow connection to different types of counters. Specifications Item KCN-T KCY Specification Source voltage AC90 High-speed 1 50 High-speed 2 100 Low-speed 15 2000Hz Timing related to addition and subtraction 30 300ms directional input Count mode selection input 264V 50/60Hz 5VA 3500Hz 9000Hz Changed via volume 1000Hz CW/CCW pulse output 5 V positive logic/output current 30 mA/pulse amplitude 50 s CW/CCW count output Open collector output current 30 mA Pulse amplitude 50 s (possible to switch between positive and negative logic) directional input Reduced speed input High-speed selection input Count mode selection input 10 1K 9 V 10 mA Max. (can be changed with volume) Storage temperature KCX 180 ON voltage less than 1.5 V OFF voltage more than 8 V ON current 10 mA High-speed selection input Ambient temperature KCX-RN 132V Negative logic input Reduced speed output DC output 0 50 20 70 (with no freezing) Ambient humidity/ storage humidity 35 Accessories Metal fittings for installation 85 RH(with no dewing) Drive input with an open collector. directional input directional input Reduced speed input KCH-B FG-01 High-speed selection input CW CCW pulse output (Output for a pulse motor driver) 10 5 CW pulse output CW CCW count output (Output for a counter) KCM CCW pulse output CW count output CCW count output 10 CW CCW output Voltage output (+9 V Max.) Voltage output is for positive output only; negative voltage is not output. CW/CCW count output can be switched between positive logic and negative logic. When direction input is entered, switching to high-speed selection input is not possible. B-144 470 When using positive logic, pull up with resistance. Electronic Counters Selecting socket FG-01 Terminal arrangement Terminal number Explanation With this input, CW/CCW pulse 1 Directional outputs and count outputs are input 2 produced. Input common terminal 5 Count mode selection input 6 High-speed selection input Allows switching of positive logic of count output. H: negative logic/L: positive logic Allows selection of high speed 1 and high speed 2. H: high speed 1/L: high speed 2 7 Voltage output Voltage output corresponding to the pulse frequency. 8 CW CCW Pulse output Output to a pulse motor driver. 9 10 CW 11 CCW Count output Output to a counter for pulse setting. 12 AC180 13 AC90 14 AC0V KCN-A 0V KCN-S/W 4 KCN-A With this input, high-speed changes to low-speed. 3 Reduced speed input 264V AC source input KCN-B 132V KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX KCY KCN-T The FG-01's external dimensions and exclusive socket are the same as those of the KCX Series counters. Refer to page B-117. B-145 KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters MEMO B-146 KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCN-A Electronic Counters MEMO B-147 KCM KCH-B KCX-RN KCX KCY KCN-T KCN-B KCN-S/W KCN-A KCV Electronic Counters MEMO B-148 DIGITAL TACHOMETERS How the tachometers work TC-V Series TC Series List of Digital tachometers Eight measurement modes and examples Merits Measurement mode TC-61 TC-6 TC-4L-G/H TC-41 TC-4 TC-4A TC-4B TC-4S/TC-4W Wiring Recommended applications C-1 C-2 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 C-19 C-24 C-27 C-29 C-33 C-36 C-38 C-40 C-42 C-43 How the tachometers work There are two operation principles for measuring revolutional movement. The KOYO tachometers use the cycle period. Pulse count Based on the pulse input from the detector, the tachometer calculates and displays the number of revolutions per minute (rpm). Using the prescale, it converts the number of revolutions to a speed then displays the value. To ensure precision, measurement time or input pulse should be increased. 1 Sec. Cycle period The tachometer calculates the number of revolutions (rpm) by multiplying the inverse of the cycle period (in seconds) by 60 as follows: 1 60 (rpm) cycle period (in seconds) The lower the speed is, the more precisely it is measured. Measurement range: 1 to 9999 pulse cycles/revolution (On TC-4L model, only 1 or 10 cycles/revolution can be 1cycle period selected.) Number of revolutions (rpm) C-1 Digital Tachometers This tachometer is provided with a large display that is easy to read in a small DIN 48 body. Bright character display is with a large red LED and a character height of 10 mm, which makes it easy to read from a distance and at an angle. In addition, a green LED is used for preset values to differentiate from measurement values. Setting of preset values to 0 settings with individual setting keys for digits has the feel of digital switches, and operation is simple. Basic function settings are made with digital switches; detailed settings are selected with digit keys, so operation is easy. Merits CE Marking complied Key protection to lock keys individually Key protection can be set for individual keys to prevent a malfunction or tampering. Battery-less memory retention EEPROM is used to retain values in memory, so there is no need for battery maintenance. Removable terminals Maintenance has been reduced via terminals that can be removed. After wiring, the terminal cover provides a safe surface for worry-free use. Prescaling Prescaling that can convert the speed and flow for the speed of revolution into units of time for the workload is provided. Stable display Time settings can be made during measurement to stabilize the display when high speeds are used.You can choose 0.2/0.5/1.0/2.0s High-speed response The measurement input for this class complies with high speeds at 20 kcps. Free power source for the AC type The source voltage for the AC type covers from AC85264 V; the power source cannot be selected. High precision Cycle measurement is used in measurement format to obtain a high degree of precision at low speeds. IP65 Protective structure The front cover panel uses sheet keys, so operation with wet or dirty hands can be done worry-free. A front cover is also provided as an option to enhance the protective structure. Revolution halt is already at 0 Halt determination times that are already displayed as 0 after revolution halt can be selected from 0.2/0.5/1.0/2.0/6.0 s. Designed in compliance with CE and UL TC-4S/4W TC-4B TC-4A TC-4 TC-41 TC-4L TC-6 TC-61 TC-V Digital Tachometers TC-V Series Equipped with output A single preset type is also offered. It complies with revolution control. With zero halt Unneeded 0s for higher digits are not displayed. List of Models Category Digital tachometer with single preset Digital tachometer for dedicated display Model number system Sensor Source Voltage Model Number Number of Digits Source Voltage DC24V 60mA TC-V6S Price TC-V6 - AC TC-V6S-C DC 6 TC-V6 AC TC-V6-C DC Accessories: Installation Frame C : DC power Blank: AC power S : Single preset Blank: Dedicated display 6 : 6-digit Series Name C-2 Digital Tachometers TC-V General Specifications Specification Item AC power DC power Source voltage AC100 240V Permitted power fluctuation AC85 264V Power consumption Approx. 11 VA Sensor power DC24V (20 Memory Backup upon Power Failure EEPROM Writing Impact resistance TC-V 28V) 60mA (less than 10%p-p ripple) Up to 100,000 times 50 20 70 85 35 (with no freezing) RH (with no dewing) AC 2kV for one minute (for AC input, 0 V, and relay interconnection) (for the DC type, 0 V, and relay interconnection only) Displacement amplitude 0.5 mm No malfunction Displacement amplitude 0.35 mm Frequency 10-55 Hz along three axes Frequency 10-55 Hz along three axes Durable 490 m/s2 11 ms along three axes No malfunction 98 m/s2 11 ms along three axes Noise resistance AC power 1.5 kV between terminals (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns) Protective structure IP65 (front panel only) Weight DC power 1.0 kV between terminals (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns) Approx. 150g Conforming wiring 0.25 Conforming crimped contact R1.25-3 Permitted torque 0.5Nm Approx. 110g 1.65mm 2 TC-41 Terminals TC-6 Durable Item Setting Single with alarm output/without (separate model number) Number of digits 6 digits Display Display of settings: red LED Character height 10 mm Operational format Cycle measurement Set items Speed of revolution only Basic setting range 10 999999 rpm (when prescaling is 1) Prescaling M 10 9 999999 1 M 999999 0 n 9 0.013% excluding selection of low-speed input (10 Hz) ( 0.2 0.5 1.0 0.1% during low-speed input) 2.0s TC-4S/4W Setting duration 10 preset settings: green LED character height 7 mm TC-4B Category TC-4A Specification Tachometer Measurement precision TC-4 Performance Specifications n Input logic: Negative logic (no-load input) / Positive logic (load input) Input Input resistance: Positive logic 15 k (AC power)/1.8 k Negative logic 3.3 k Inpult voltage: L 0 3V H 7 (DC power) 30 V Setting input response Max. signal amplitude 5 ms External reset No-volt output: NPN open collector output 24 V 100 mA Withstand pressure 35 V *Output TC-4L Vibration resistance Approx. 4 W TC-61 10 Storage temperature Withstand voltage 24V 26.4V Memory Duration 10 years Ambient temperature Ambient humidity DC12 DC10 Residual voltage less than 1.5 V Relay output: 1 transformer relay AC220V 2A (resistance load) *Output mode Compared output / Retained output Key protection Setting of arbitrary keys possible Installation Exclusively for embedding (terminal block connection) *means that items do not apply to devices for designated display. C-3 Measurement operations 1) Display of the speed of revolution for one revolution/pulse The reciprocal ( 1T ) of the IN input cycle (T sec) is multiplied by 60 and displayed as the speed of revolution. Display TC-V Digital Tachometers TC-V Pre-revolution values 1 T2 60rpm T2 T3 The range for count input 1 P/R is 10 1 T3 60rpm 1 T4 60rpm T4 999999 rpm during prescaling. 2) Measurement time This item is used for revolution at high speeds and to stabilize display. Displays the average of a pulse as entered in the measurement time; when outside the measurement time, the display is updated with each input pulse. TC-6 TC-61 60rpm IN T1 Pulse average in T1 Display 1 T3 Pulse average in T2 60rpm TC-4L IN Measurement time TC-41 1 T1 T1 Measurement time T2 Measurement time T3 Measurement time Output operations chart (only for devices with output) Compared output TC-4A TC-4 Hold output Preset values Preset values Alarm output Alarm output 0 TC-4S/4W TC-4B ON Reset OFF ON Relay output OFF ON DC output OFF ON Reset OFF ON Relay output OFF ON DC output OFF Alarm settings When alarm settings are 0, DC output is the same as in output operations for relay output. Alarm settings should be smaller values than preset values. Performing alarm setting with values that exceed preset values will result in measurement values of 0; alarm output (DC output) will come ON. Input single pulse width Low-speed (10 Hz) H H L L 50 ms or more C-4 High-speed (20 Hz) 50 ms or more 25 s or more 25 s or more Digital Tachometers TC-V Wiring Diagrams TC-V6 TC-V6S Sensor power Measurement input DC24V60mA Sensor power IN 2 3 0V 4 5 Measurement input DC24V60mA 2 6 IN 0V 3 5 DC output 7 8 9 10 11 12 COM N.C 7 R Reset input R Reset input TC-V 1 11 12 N.O Relay output AC100 240V power AC100 240V power TC-61 OUT TC-V6-C TC-V6S-C Measurement input IN 0V IN 0V 3 5 3 5 TC-6 Measurement input DC output 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 COM N.C N.O Relay output 7 R Reset input R Reset input 11 12 TC-4L OUT + DC12 24V power DC12 24V power Alarm output is used in combination with DC output (OUT terminal). TC-41 Do not connect any of the terminals for the DC input. AC power Internal 24 V 3.3k 3 Internal 24 V ON during negative logic input 9 N.C. 12 5V 8 COM 1.8k 47k 10 N.O. IN 3 22k 47k 10 N.O. 5V 7 5V 1.8k 47k 22k 8 COM 22k 3.3k Reset input 9 N.C. TC-4B 5V 11 TC-4A DC24V 2 ON during negative logic input IN DC power Reset input 1 OUT 5 0V 7 TC-4S/4W Sensor power DC24V TC-4 I/O Circuit Diagrams 47k 22k 1 OUT 5 0V C-5 Digital Tachometers TC-V Input Wiring Examples (Measurement input/Reset input) Proximity switch with NPN open collector output Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output Input logic: Negative logic: (no-volt input) (neg) 2 Input logic: Negative logic: (voltage input) (pos) Sensor source (DC 24V) Brown Setting TC-V IN 7 Reset 5 0V TC-61 Black Blue IN 7 Reset 5 0V Blue Recommended proximity switch: APS TC-6 3 Black 3 Reset Black - -N E DC 2-wire proximity switch Recommended proximity switch: APS TC-4L IN Green (black) White 7 Sensor source (DC 24V) 3 IN 5 0V Reset Black (blue) Black 5 TC-4 2 White 3 Reset -E2 Input logic: Arranged with encoder output and set as positive or negative logic Red (brown) Setting - Rotary encoder Input logic: Negative logic (no-volt input) (neg) TC-41 Sensor source (DC 24V) Setting Black Reset 0V Recommended proximity switch: APS - -Z With the DC type, please supply source voltage above 20 V. Recommended proximity switch: TRD-J -S TRD-N -S Switch or relay Input logic: Negative logic (no-volt input) (neg) Measurement input response: 10 Hz (Dip switch 1 ON) Input logic: Positive logic (voltage input) (pos) Measurement input response: 10 Hz (Dip switch 1 ON) 2 Sensor power source (DC 24 V) TC-4B TC-4A 2 Brown Setting Setting 3 3 IN Reset IN TC-4S/4W Reset 7 Reset 7 Reset 5 0V 5 0V There is no DC power source. Use a separate external power source. Output Wiring Examples NPN open collector output Relay output Relay drive possible OUT 1 0V Load Load power N.C. 9 Load N.O. 10 Load 5 Load for specified DC 24 V power source C-6 COM 8 Digital Tachometers TC-V Front Panel Layout and Description Measurement value (red) Operating mode Displays measurement values. Setup mode Displays setting parameters. With Single preset METER Preset values (green) Operating mode Displays preset values. Setup mode Displays set items. OUT TC-V Output (red) Operating mode Lit when output is ON. Blinks when alarm output is ON. 6 4 5 Digit keys Operating mode Allows changes in preset values for the operating mode. Setup mode Allows selection of setting parameters. 2 3 1 TC-6 RST TC-61 K/P Key protection (red) Operating mode Blinks when key protection is ON (only when the key is ON). Setup Mode Displays key protection settings. RST key Operating mode Turns output OFF. Setup mode Allows selection of set items. 6 4 5 RST The Designated Display panel has several lamps that differ with respect to the Single Preset Counter: Output display Protection Display None Preset values Not displayed in Operating mode. Digit keys RST keys Disabled in Operating mode. 2 3 1 TC-4 METER TC-41 TC-4L Designated display 1. Changing preset values (Single preset only) Press a digit key once to increase the corresponding digit by one: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Example: When the counter is preset to TC-4A Key Operation 123 Press the 1 key and the display changes to 124 2. Output OFF (Single preset only) Press the RST key to reset to turn output OFF (Response time 0.1s). When output is ON, pressing the RST key will turn output OFF. 3. Protecting the keys (Single preset only) Protection of individual keys can be set with operating keys. When Key protection is set in Operating mode, pressing a set key will cause the corresponding LED for the key pushed to blink in order to indicate that operation has been disabled. As the facfory setup, Key protection in Setup mode is completely disabled, so just turning Dip switch 7 ON with power supplied will disable all keys. Press the 3 key and the display changes to 234 METER TC-4S/4W After removing your finder from the key, the settings will be verified after about one second. TC-4B Press the 2 key and the display changes to 134 OUT K/P 6 RST 4 5 2 3 1 C-7 Digital Tachometers TC-V Configure dip switches Use the dip switch on the top of the counter to configure varions parameters and operation mode. Configure dip switches with power off. Operation with power up will have no effect. When dip switches are re-configured, you must press the Reset key in operating mode to reset the count values Dip switch ON TC-V As the factory setups, all switches are OFF. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TC-61 Selection of the operating mode Selection of key protection Selection of halt determination times Selection of measurement times Selection of input frequency TC-6 Input frequency The input frequency is selected with Dip switch 1. TC-4L ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input frequency SW1 10Hz ON 20kHz OFF Factory setup Measurement times TC-41 The measurement times are selected with Dip switches 2 and 3. ON TC-4 OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 With the cycle measurement format, the display will change as pulses are input, and the display may vary during high revolutions. Measurement times SW2 SW3 0.2s OFF OFF 0.5s OFF ON 1.0s ON OFF The average of the pulse input in the measure- 2.0s ON ON ment time can be displayed with setting of the measurement time to stabilize the display during Factory setup high revolutions. Halt determination times TC-4A The halt determination times are selected with Dip switches 4, 5, and 6. ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TC-4B OFF Suspension determination times SW4 SW5 SW6 6.0s(10) OFF OFF OFF 2.0s(30) OFF OFF ON 1.0s(60) OFF ON OFF 0.5s(120) OFF ON ON function will display 0. When setting the halt determination time at 1 P/R to 0.2 s, be aware that the 0.2s(300) ON OFF OFF maximum revolutions will be 300 rpm. Factory setup After the halt determination time is set once measurement input is OFF, the Items in parentheses are maximum revolutions for 1 P/R. TC-4S/4W Key protection With Dip switch 7, [Do not protect keys] can be selected to take effect for keys set in Setup mode using [Protect keys]. Setting for keys to protect can performed in Setup mode. As the factory setups, [Do not protect keys] is set. Key protection ON OFF Settings in Setup mode take effect 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Do not SW7 ON OFF With the Designated display type, this should be OFF. Factory setup Operating mode The operating mode is selected with Dip switch 8. ON OFF C-8 Operating mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW8 Setup mode ON Run mode OFF Factory setup Setup Mode Selection is with the digit key. Digit key: Displays measurement values. Digit key: Displays measurement values. 1 Selects retained output. 2 Selects compared output.* 1 2 Decimal point settings (d. p) Press the Reset key to proceed. The display position of the decimal point is set with the digit key. The decimal place is displayed in accordance with the digit key. Digit key 1 will set no decimal place (*No decimal point). Measurement values for display 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Digit key 6 5 4 3 2 1 RST Press the Reset key to proceed. a Setting is with the digit key. (*0) Alarm output settings (set ) RST Reset key protection (rpro) Setup mode Measurement values for display 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Digit key 6 5 4 3 2 1 Press the Reset key to proceed. Selection of disable or enable to set the Reset key is with the digit key. Digit key: for K/P display RST Setting Dip switch 8 to OFF and turning on the power will start the Run mode. Digit key protection 2. Operations in Setup mode (ppro) *Represents the factory setup. Selection of prescaling values is with the digit key. (*1 ) RST Displays measurement values 1 Digit keys 6 5 4 3 2 1 Settings of 1 RST Prescaling settings 2 (scL2) Press the Reset key to proceed. Digit key: Displays measurement values. 1 The exponent will be 1. Settings of 0 9 are possible. RST Press the Reset key to proceed. (*Disabled/enabled) (*Disabled/enabled) (*Disabled/enabled) (*Disabled/enabled) (*Disabled/enabled) (*Disabled/enabled) Press the Reset key to proceed. Digit key K/P display Not used 1 Disabled with lamp on 1 Enabled with lamp off Used 999999 are possible. Selection of prescaling exponents is with the digit key. (*0 ) Selection of disable or enable to set the Reset key is with the digit key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 follows: (scL1) Press the Reset key to proceed. Digit key: for K/P display In Setup mode, the settings can be initialized using the menu as Prescaling settings 1 (*disabled) (enabled) 1 2 Setting Dip switch 8 to ON and turning on the power will start the Setup mode. • With the Designated display tachometer, items marked with an are skipped. • Setting parameters are rendered effective by pressing the Reset key and proceeding to the next step. • Key protection settings are rendered effective with Dip switch 7 as well as an AND condition. To begin protection, turn Dip switch 7 ON. Operational Example TC-4S/4W Run mode Changing preset values 1. Change the preset value from 120 to 240. Change complete Before changing METER METER METER OUT OUT OUT K/P K/P K/P 6 RST 4 5 2 3 6 1 RST 4 5 2 3 Press Digit key 2 twice. METER OUT K/P 6 1 TC-61 RST TC-V Selection is with the digit key. TC-6 Output mode settings (c-op) Press the Reset key to proceed. TC-4L RST 1. Switching Between Setup mode and Run mode Run mode pos Selects positive logic. neg Selects negative logic.* 1 2 TC-41 Prescaling values (10 999999) are set. Positive or negative logic Compared/Retained Any digit can be set for display of the decimal point. 5) Alarm output Offset values can be set with respect to preset values. 0 999999 6) Resetting key protection Setting to disable the reset key can be performed. 7) Protecting digit keys Setting to disable any digit key can be performed. With a Dedicated Display Tachometer, items 3), 5), 6), and 7) are skipped. TC-4 1) Prescaling 2) Input logic 3) Output mode 4) Decimal place -9 TC-4A Input logic settings (si g) Items that can be configured in Setup Mode TC-4B Settings that cannot be selected with dip switches can be set in Setup mode. Digital Tachometers TC-V RST 4 5 2 3 6 1 RST 4 5 2 3 1 Press Digit key 3 once. C-9 Setting Example for Display of the Speed of Revolution When using a rotary encoder for 100 pulses/revolution, the speed of revolution can be displayed. A measurement time of 1.0 s will be used to stabilize the display during high revolutions. In addition, the decimal place will be after the first digit with the half determination time of 1.0 s. Measurement axis TC-V Digital Tachometers TC-V 2. Switching to Setup mode Turn Dip switch 8 ON and then turn power ON. 3. Changing setting contents The setting screen for the Prescaling mantissa is displayed. TC-V These values are initial values. METER OUT K/P Press the RST key to proceed. OUT TC-61 K/P 6 RST 2 4 5 3 Rotary encoder 100P/R 1 The setting screen for the Prescaling exponent is displayed. TC-41 TC-4L TC-6 Press the 1 key twice and "-2" is set. OUT K/P Press the RST key to proceed. Calculation of prescaling values With the tachometer, prescaling is 1 for 1 pulse/ revolution. Accordingly, prescaling for 100P/R is The setting screen for Input logic is displayed. These values are initial values. OUT K/P 1 100 Press the RST key to proceed. =0.01 Prescaling setting is done with the exponent and mantissa such that 0.01 1 The setting screen for Output mode is displayed. These values are initial values. 2 10 OUT K/P The setting screen for the Decimal point is displayed. Set items TC-4A TC-4 Press the RST key to proceed. Set items Contents Measurement time 1.0s Press the 2 key and the decimal point will be displayed between the first and second digit. Press the RST key and the setting parameters will be written. Halt measurement time 1.0s Prescaling exponent 1 Prescaling mantissa 2 OUT K/P Setting is complete after this step. TC-4S/4W TC-4B 4. Switching to Run mode Turn the power OFF after completing setting in Setup mode and turn Dip switch 8 OFF (Run mode) (When power is OFF, setting contents from Setup mode are written). 1. Setting the dip switch Turn OFF the power, then operate the dip switch. Select the Measurement time of 1.0 s. ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turn Dip switch 2 ON Turn Dip switch 3 OFF Select the half measurement time of 1.0 s. ON OFF C-10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turn Dip switch 4 OFF Turn Dip switch 5 ON Turn Dip switch 6 OFF 5. Starting Run mode Be sure to turn power ON after changing settings in Setup mode and press the RST key to reset count values. Common Errors Error Error Details Overflow Error Data to display exceeds the display range. Underflow Error The position of data to display drops below the display range. Over Input Frequency Memory Data Error Corrective Action Enter measurement values in normal ranges and the device will automatically recover (review settings for prescaling and the decimal point). The input frequency exceeds 20 kHz. Lower the input frequency. Preset/set values and Setup mode items have changed. Press the Reset key to eliminate the error display. Measurement values and timekeeping values will be set to 0, preset and set values will be 5000, and Setup mode parameters will be set to factory setups. TC-6 e01 e02 e04 e21 Error Type TC-61 Error Codes TC-V Digital Tachometers TC-V Model Number Details Rubber Packing KC-48P Prevents water from entering the control panel with installation between the installation panel and TC-V. Front Cover KC-48C TC-41 Option TC-4L Option Protects the front panel from dirt and the like. Material: Soft silicone rubber TC-4S/4W TC-4B TC-4A TC-4 Key operation can be performed with the front cover as-is. C-11 TC-61 TC-V Digital Tachometers TC-V Precautions Precautions for Wiring Precautions for Use (1) With the DC power source, the 0-V terminal and the input common are internally short-circuited. 0-V terminal (2) Apply the rated voltage in one instant, not by gradually raising the voltage. (3) Always use negative input logic to set the DC 2-wire proximity switch. (4) During counting, changes to preset values will take effect about one second after key input of the change. In subtraction mode, key input takes effect when the count is reset Valid preset valve will be saved in the memory of loss of power. (5)It is recommended to use a sheet included in the package to keep the setups for the future maintenance. (6) Use in the following environments should be avoided: TC-6 A location where the ambient temperature is above 50 Keep the wires away from power line. With regard to use in locations where extensive noise is generated, keep the KCV counter and wires away from the noise source to the extent possible. Empty terminals are not to be used as relay terminals. For connection, use of crimped contacts is recommended. When wiring the 1 and 7 terminals, do not install fork-shaped crimped contacts at an angle. Use a round crimped contact for angled installation. Fork-shaped crimped contacts or below 10 . A location where the ambient humidity is above 85% or abrupt temperature changes may cause condensation. A location with dust, iron fillings, corrosive gasses, or the like. For angled installation, connection with the contact is insufficient. Like in the illustration above, install the contact perpendicular to the horizontal. Round crimped contact A location exposed to direct sunlight. A location with significant vibrations or impact. TC-4L (7) When conducting testing of insulation withstand voltage, insulation resistance, or the like, detach the control circuit from the main body. (8) When power is interrupted, writing to the internal EEPROM will take place. The number of times EEPORM writing can be performed is less TC-41 than 100,000, so avoid use with frequent power source operation. Installation and Removal of the Main Body Installation Installation of the Terminal Block and Terminal Cover TC-4A TC-4 Insert the main body through the panel installation port. TC-4B From the rear, mount the installation frame. Main body Terminal block TC-4S/4W Fixing screw Terminal block cover Installation frame: Can be installed vertically or horizontally. Removal Holding the tabs, spread them 2 3 mm. While keeping the tabs spread, pull the device towards you. C-12 Do not use a screw other than the one used to fix the terminal block during shipping. Maintain a permitted torque of 0.3 Nm. Install the terminal block after wiring is complete. (in mm) External Dimensions 63 100 (AC power source) 48 60 (DC power source) Terminal screw M3 4 7.62 7.62 6.5 1.12 10 DC power source 66mm AC power source 106mm TC-6 Depth 5 50 TC-61 44.5 48 Panel thickness 1 6 Detailed Diagram of the Terminal Block TC-V Mounting bracket Boring Dimensions for Installation 1. When the installation handle is horizontal 30.48 Mounting bracket 2. When the installation handle is vertical 48+0.2 0 70 or more TC-41 55 or more 45+0.3 0 70 or more Square hole 45+0.3 0 9.5 TC-4L (Close installation possible) 6.5 Digital Tachometers TC-V TC-4S/4W TC-4B TC-4A TC-4 Complying wiring: 0.25-1.65 mm2 Complying crimped contact: R1.25-3 Permitted torque: 0.5 Nm C-13 Digital Tachometers TC Series Digital Tachometers Merits Prescaling Based on a preset scale, the tachometer converts the number of revolutions to a distance, volume or production per unit time. The prescale function is not included in the TC-4L model. TC-V TC-61 Precision Using a sampling technique, the tachometer precisely measures various speeds and cycles of repeated movements On the TC-41 model, the displayed value is reset to zero if no pulse is entered for one second. The counter displays the previous value if it receives no pulse for six seconds. TC-6 Quick reset (TC-41/TC-61) TC-4L List of Digital Tachometers Signal output None (Display only) Analog Signal input Digital Single preset Dual preset Open collector 12V TC-41 Outside TC TC-4 / TC-6 TC-4A TC-4B TC-4S Mode 1 only TC-4L Functions Pre- Sam- Decimal Error Mode scalling pling point report TC-4W 12V TC-4 8 modes TC-4A TC-4B TC-4S/4W Analog output Digital output TC-4A Singlie preset TC-41 Dual preset TC-4B TC-4S OUT 1 mode 1,3,5,8 Any types of sensors TC-61 Mode 1 only 4 modes TC-41 TC-4W Magnetic sensor General purpose inverter OUT 1 OUT 2 Meter Display C Proximity switch C Recorder Programmable controller Analog output is effective in Mode 1 only. C-14 Open collector DC 2-wire, Namur or voltage output Motor with AC tachometer generator Digital Tachometers TC Series Measurement examples Eight measurement modes and examples m minute Motor INB INA 1m Using two detectors, the tachometer measures the speed of an object passing through a certain point. The prescale can be adjusted to suit the measurement unit. m Min. Cycle time (Mode 3) Sec. Cycle time One cycle of operation The tachometer measures the time for an object to pass through a certain distance. Rotary encoder INA TC-V Using the prescale, it converts the number of revolutions to a speed then displays the value. Speed=number of revolutions 2 r (r is the radius of the roller in meters.) INA TC-61 Speed Based on the pulse input from the detector, the tachometer calculates and displays the number of revolutions per minute (rpm). TC-6 Detector INA Speed (Mode 1) Passing speed (Mode 2) Number of revolutions rpm Cycle measurement range 10ms 140s Time elapsed: lnfinite TC-4L Revolutions (rpm) (Mode 1) Time lag (Mode 4) INB The tachometer measures the time for an object to move from the detector A to the detector B. Its speed can be calculated from the "time lag" between the two sensors and their distance. A INA Sec. B TC-41 Parts feeder Press INA Sec. bject being pressed The tachometer displays the time elapsed after an action is started. For example, it measures the time after a press is started or a valve is opened. TC-4A Process time (Mode 5) Cycle measurement range 10ms 140s Length Measurement cm INA The photoelectric sensor generates pulse when it detects a moving object. The pulse count is converted to the length by the rotary encoder, and displayed on the tachometer. With the prescalling function, the measurement can be converted at a preset scale. INB TC-4B Length (Mode 6) TC-4 Cycle measurement range 10ms 140s Spacing (Mode 7) TC-4S/4W Rotary encoder Measurement cm INA INB The tachometer measures and displays the space between two adjacent objects (in this case holes). With the prescaling function, the measurement can be converted at a preset scale. Space between holes Rotary encoder Accumulate (Mode 8) Acuumulated value Proximity switch INA The tachometer totals individual pulse counts. It can be used also as a preset counter. With the prescaling function, the measurement can be converted at a preset scale. C-15 X1 45 6 45 6 23 23 90 1 23 X10 23 45 6 90 1 23 X1000 45 6 90 1 X 10 -n Rotary switch M X100 45 6 90 1 Prescaled at 555 Sampling This function is available only in Mode 1. The tachometer counts the cycle time of a rotating object. Using this value, it calculates the number of revolutions per minute. When an object rotates fast, one cycle period becomes too short to allow precise measurement. The tachometer samples a specified number of cycles and totals all cycle periods. From this total, it then calculates one cycle period. This averaging technique minimizes errors at high speeds. The times of sampling can be set to 1, 10 or 100. (Only 1 can be selected on the TC-4L model.) Times of sampling: 1 One cycle period Times of sampling: 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Ten cycles' period Times of sampling : 100 TC-V TC-4 0 TC-4A 78 TC-61 Dip switch 78 Measurement Prescale=Value to be displayed Set the scale in the form of "M 10-n" where M is a 4-digit integer and n is a number from 0 to 9. Use the leftmost switch to set the exponent n, and the other four switches to set the value of M. The prescale can range from 1 10-9 to 9999 10-0=9999. Prescaling is not available on the TC-4L model. 78 TC-6 Preset a 4-digit value to determine the scale used to calculate values for display. To preset a scale, use the five small rotary switches on the rear panel. 78 TC-4L Prescaling 78 TC-41 Merits 90 1 Digital Tachometers TC Series 100 Hundred cycles' period Decimal point Selection For the 4-digit display, you can select the location of the decimal point. Measurements are displayed to a precision specified by the decimal point. No decimal point To the first digit after the decimal point TC-4S/4W TC-4B To the second digit To the third digit List of Error Codes An error code is displayed to indicate an overflow, prescale error, or other error as shown on the right. Error code Name Description e01 Overflow Measurement has exceeded upper limit. e02 Underflow Measurement is smaller than the value representable by the lowest digit. e03 Prescale error The integer part (M) is set to zero. e04 Overfrequency Input frequency has exceeded 10 kHz in Mode 1. Note: The errors E01, E02 and E04 are automatically cleared when the value returns to the allowable range. C-16 Measurement modes The following description does not apply to TC-61 and TC-41. The TC-4L model does not have the input terminal IN B. Mode 1: Number of revolutions(rpm) The tachometer calculates the number of revolutions(rpm)by multiplying the inverse of the cycle period(T)of IN A by 60, and displays the result. When IN B turns ON, the tachometer stops measurement and retains the previous value. IN B 1 T2 60rpm 60rpm 1 T3 60rpm Retains 1 T3 60rpm TC-V A 1 T1 T2 T1 T3 TC-61 IN Previous measurement Measurement range: 10 to 9999 rpm(at input rate=1 pulse/revolution, times of sampling=1, and prescale=1) Measurement is made for each cycle only if the cycle period is 300 ms or more. If not, the counter waits for at least one cycle before it restarts measurement. It displays the previous value if no pulse is entered for six seconds. Mode 2: Passing speed (m/min.) The tachometer calculates the speed of an object by multiplying the inverse of the value T by 60. T is time elapsed after the sensor IN A turns ON until the sensor IN B turns ON. The speed is displayed in meters per minute if the distance between the two sensors is 1 m. A IN B Ta T1 T: 10 ms 1 T2 60m/min T2 1 T3 60m/min Ta 60m/min TC-4L IN 1 T1 Previous measurement T3 TC-41 Display TC-6 Display Digital Tachometers TC Series 6 seconds. Ta: 30 ms interval between measurements TC-4 Mode 3: Cycle time (10 ms to 140 s) IN A IN B Previous measurement T1 Ta T1 T2 T2 Ta T3 Retains T3 T3 T4 T4 TC-4B Display TC-4A The tachometer calculates the cycle period (T) of IN A. It measures every other cycles ranging from 10 ms to 140 seconds. When IN B turns ON, the tachometer stops measurement and retains the current value. TC-4S/4W Ta: 30 ms interval between measurements Mode 4: Time lag (10 ms to 140 s) The tachometer measures the time elapsed after the sensor IN A turns ON until the sensor IN B turns ON. Allowable measurements range from 10 ms to 140 seconds. Display IN Previous measurement T2 A T1 IN T1 Ta T2 B Ta: At least 30 ms interval between measurements C-17 Digital Tachometers TC Series Mode 5: Process time (10 ms to 140 s) The tachometer displays the time elapsed after the sensor IN A is activated. Allowable measurements range from 10 ms to 140 seconds. When IN B turns ON, the tachometer stops measurement and retains the current value. TC-6 TC-61 TC-V Display IN A IN B Previous measurement TC-4L Ta T1 T2 T2 T3 Mode 6: Length Response of IN A: 10k cps While IN B is ON, the tachometer counts the frequency of pulse pulse entered to IN A. The value is displayed when IN B turns off. It is reset to zero when a reset signal is entered. Previous count Display IN 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 8 9 10 11 1 2 TC-4 4 5 6 7 0 8 Count in progress Ta T Ta B 1ms 20ms Reset Mode 7: Spacing Response of IN A: 10k cps When IN B turns ON, the tachometer counts the frequency of pulse entered to IN A since the last time IN B turned ON. The value is reset to zero when a reset signal is entered. Display TC-4A 3 8 A T Count in progress IN Previous count 1 IN 2 3 4 5 6 11 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 IN 3 4 5 9 6 7 8 9 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 A Count in progress (at least 20 ms) TC-4B T3 Ta: At least 30 ms interval between measurements 1 TC-41 T1 Count in progress (at least 20 ms) B TC-4S/4W Reset Mode 8: Accumulate Response of IN A: 10k cps (150 cps on TC-4S and 4W in One Shot mode) The tachometer totals and displays pulse counts entered to IN A. The count is suspended when IN B turns ON. The displayed value is reset to zero when a reset signal is entered. Display IN 0 1 2 3 4 5 A Count disable IN Reset C-18 B 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TC-61 Digital Tachometers TC-61 Designated Display (6-digit) Multi-function Input Timer TC-V This unit for designated revolution display is equipped with an input circuit that complies with all types of devices. In addition to pre-zeroed display with revolution suspension (1 or 6 s after revolution suspension), there is only a slight display drift produced by non-uniform revolution in order to display averages of measurement values in 1 s. The device has functions for prescaling, sampling, and decimal point switching. 60 [rpm] Mechanical and Performance Specifications General Specifications Electrical Specifications Specified voltage AC100 120V 200 240V Permitted power fluctuation AC90 132V Specified frequency 50 Power consumption 14VA Withstand voltage AC2000 V 1 minute between power source and external terminals DC500 V more than 20 M 1 minute between power source and external terminals Insulation resistance 180 264V 60Hz Cycle period measurement Function Display only or compatible to various inputs Screen Red 7-segment LED 6-digit Character height 14.2 mm Measurement range 10 600000 rpm 60 600000 rpm (via dip switch switching) 10 ms 140 s 1 999999 count 10 50 Storage temperature 20 70 (with no freezing) (with no freezing) 4 modes (modes 1, 3, 5, and 8) with switching Decimal place With switching function Prescaling M 10-n=10-9 9999 1 M 9999 0 n 9 (M and n are integers) Sampling 1 time, 10 times, and 100 times with switching (mode 1 only) Terminals 10 55 Hz displacement amplitude 0.75 mm along three axes Vibration Durability resistance No malfunction 10 55 Hz displacement amplitude 0.35 mm along three axes Durability 300m s2 11ms along three axes Impact resistance No malfunction 100m s2 11ms along three axes Noise resistance Protective structure IP40 (front panel only) 0.1 ms (modes 3 and 5) with switching Conforming wiring 0.5 1.25mm2 Conforming crimped contact JIS C 2805 Permitted torque 0.6N m 1.25 3 equivalent Sensor power DC12 V 10 14 V 50 mA (less than 10%p-p ripple noise) Power-on reset Time power supply is interrupted 0.5 s/Reset time 0.5 s External dimensions 96W Weight Approx. 450 g 48H 105D (mm) Accessory Metal fittings for installation Conforming Detection Devices (typical examples) Sensor for voltage output (12 24V) General-purpose inverter (5V) TTL (totem pole output 5V) Namur Output TC-6 Rear panel screw terminals 35 90%RH (with no dewing) 1 kV pulse amplitude 1 s rise 1 ns square-wave pulse Between power source terminals 0.01% (mode 1)/ Operating mode Specification Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Measurement method Precision Environmental Specifications Item Specification Item Specification Item TC-4L n Tn TC-41 Pre-revolution values TC-4 Display Tn Tn measurement TC-4A T2 T1 Voltage input 1 Voltage input 2 Namur Input DC 2-wire proximity switch output DC2W input Gear sensor AC tachogenerator Magnetic detection input IN 1 (Switching via dip switches) IN 2 When revolutions of an inverter motor are displayed digitally, the signal for use by an inverter frequency (tachometer) is connected to a TC-61. However, this signal is not connected for analog signals (voltage or current). In addition, set the TC-61 to match the output circuit and signal level when pulse signals are produced. IN 1 and IN 2 are not used at the same time. C-19 TC-4B Operational input T1 The figure on the left is for 1 pulse revolution where sampling=1 and prescaling=1. When a cycle is more than 1 s, measurement is with each pulse. When sampling=10 or 100 or when a cycle of 10 or 100 pulses is less than 1 s, operation is the same as with sampling=1, and cycles of pulses input in 1 s are measured. In addition, cycles of 10 or 100 pulses are measured when a cycle of 10 or 100 pulses is more than 1 s. Forced display of 0 is possible via reset input. 1s Computation 1s TC-4S/4W Example TC-61 Operation Digital Tachometers TC-61 Front/Rear Panel Explanation Terminals for connection and switches for settings are located on the front and rear panels. Dip switches (9-bit) Rotary switches Prescaling TC-V 123456789 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Dip switches (3-bit) TC-61 Terminal Setting Prescaling 23 23 23 23 23 23 90 1 90 1 23 45 6 X1 Setting when prescaling is not used. 90 1 90 1 23 23 23 90 1 TC-4L 90 1 0 45 6 78 0 45 6 78 TC-41 90 1 X 10 1 as shown below. 78 45 6 78 78 90 1 TC-4 90 1 X 100 90 1 X 1000 45 6 At factory setup, prescaling values are set to 0001 10 -0=1. Notes: 1. The range of exponent settings (10 -0) is 0 -9. 2. When prescaling is not used, prescaling settings should be at 1 10 -0 0 -n 45 6 78 X 10 45 6 78 Prescaling values can be set as arbitrary 4-digit values from a minimum of 1 10 -9 to a maximum of 9999 10 -0=9999. 45 6 45 6 78 45 6 prescaling values=display values 78 Measurement values Rotary switch turned by a screwdriver 78 TC-6 Prescaling is used to display values resulting when measurement values obtained are multiplied by fixed constants. 0 1 Configure Rear Panel Dip switches ON Switching sampling (1 time, 10 times, or 100 times) Switching the operating mode (4 modes) Switching the measurement range Switching the decimal place Switching frequency OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TC-4A 1 At factory setup, all dip switches are set to OFF. TC-4B Switch 1 Switching frequency ON position 10 Hz common for IN 1 and IN 2 (low-speed) ON OFF OFF position 10 kHz common for IN 1 and IN 2 (high-speed) 1 TC-4S/4W Switches 2, 3, and 4 Switching the decimal place ON OFF 2 3 Switch 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9. 9 9 9 9 9. 9 9 9 9 9 2 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 3 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 4 Switch 5 Switching the measurement range ON OFF ON position Displays 0 1 s after suspending revolution 60 600000 rpm* OFF position Displays 0 6 s after suspending revolution 10 600000 rpm* When 1 P/R and prescaling=1 5 Switches 6 and 7 Switching the operating mode (4 modes) ON Switch Mode 1 Mode 3 Mode 5 Mode 8 OFF 6 OFF ON OFF ON 7 OFF OFF ON ON 6 C-20 7 Switch 8 9 Switching sampling (effective only in mode 1) ON Switch 1 time 10 times 8 OFF ON OFF ON 9 OFF OFF ON ON Digital Tachometers TC-61 100 times Measurement time 1 s Regardless of the setting of this dip switch, measurement values will OFF be for an average of 1 s. TC-V 9 ON Switch 1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Switch 2 OFF OFF ON OFF Switch 3 OFF OFF OFF ON Namur input NPN open collector input 1 2 3 Input mode Voltage input 1 Voltage input 2 Switching the input mode for IN 1 TC-61 Configure Rear Panel Dip switches TC-4L Voltage input 1: Using a voltage output type with the 12 or 24 V power source of a revolution detection device Voltage input 2: Using a voltage output type with the 5 V power source of a revolution detection device Namur input: Using a Namur proximity switch NPN open collector input: Using the NPN open collector output of a revolution detection device Notes: 1. When a general-purpose inverter is displayed digitally, the connection terminal pulse output of a frequency meter or revolution meter is used, but these specifications may differ among different companies, so verify use with the inverter manufacturer. 2. When inputting with a relay, use the NPN open collector input mode. 3. When operating in modes 3, 5, or 8, use voltage input 1 or 2. Input Specifications Input pulse amplitude Terminal number Specification IN1 IN2 Low-speed Type 15 k 6 15 k 2.5 30 V 0 TC-41 Input voltage ResponInput siveness resistance ON voltage OFF voltage 50 ms or more 4V IN1 IN2 High-speed 4 IN 1 Open collector input (DC 2-wire) IN 2 4 R Gear sensor, AC tachogenerator, etc. Reset input (open collector) 10 kHz switching 10 k 30 ms 1k 2 2 0 1.5 V 6 30 V 0 4V 6 30 V 0 4V 50 s or more 50 s or more with 10 Hz: more than 0.3 V p-p with 100 Hz: more than 0.3 V p-p with 1 kHz: more than 2 V p-p with 10 kHz: more than 20 V p-p 0 4V 10 30 V TC-4B 3 1k 4 Input for a magnetic detection device 10 Hz/ 3 3.3 k 30 V TC-4A Voltage input 2 10 Hz/ (5 V) 10 kHz Namur input switching 1 50 ms or more TC-4 Marking Voltage input 1 (12 24 V) 2 TC-6 8 1 Switching via side panel dip switches. 2 Pulled up to 12 V internally. 3 When using IN2, turn side panel Dip switches 2 and 3 OFF. TC-4S/4W 4 When the input frequency is more than 10 Hz, turn rear panel Dip switch 1 OFF (10 kHz). Structure of the input circuit Namur input Voltage inputs 1 and 2 Open collector input 12V 12V IN 1 3.3k 15k Internal circuit (photoisolate) Internal circuit (photoisolate) 1k 0V Internal circuit (photoisolate) 10k 15k 0V 12V IN 2 IN 1 IN 1 15k 0V Reset input Input for a magnetic detection device 0V Internal circuit (photoisolate) Internal circuit RESET 1k 0V C-21 Digital Tachometers TC-61 Terminal Connection 1 12V 2 IN 1 3 IN 2 4 R 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Terminal number Marking Explanation 1 12V DC output for sensor supply 0V IN1: Voltage inputs 1 and 2, Namur input, and open collector input IN2: Gear sensor and AC tachogenerator Note: IN1 and IN2 cannot be used at the same time. AC100V TC-61 TC-V AC200V Wiring Examples Complying sensor Input mode TC-6 TC-4L Voltage output type sensor (mainly the 5 V power supply of a detection device) IN 1 Input 3 IN 2 Input 4 R Reset input 5 0V Common for input and sensor power 6 Blank Not connected 7 Blank Not connected 8 Blank Not connected 9 AC200V 10 AC100V 11 AC0V Dip switch setting Source input Connection diagram 1 Voltage output type sensor (mainly the 12 or 24 V power supply of a detection device) Voltage output proximity switch or the like Ex.) APS-80A-2T APS-30-2T 2 ON Voltage input 1 12V 12V 24V power source OFF 1 2 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V 3 OUT 1 12V ON Voltage input 2 0V 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V 5V power source OFF OUT 1 2 0V 3 TC-4 TC-41 TTL output encoder or the like 1 Inverter digital display ON Voltage input 1 or 2 TC-4A 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V OFF OUT 1 2 3 In accordance with specifications for inverter pulse output (Connection terminals for a frequency meter) Inverter 1 Namur output proximity switch 12V ON Ex.) NJ0.8-4.5-N CJ1-12GK-N Namur input 1 2 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V 3 1 DC 2-wire proximity switch NPN open collector input 12V ON TC-4B Ex.) APS5-12GK-E/APS3-16F-E TRD-J -S/RZ 2 3 4 5 IN 2 R 0V 3 1 12V NPN open collector input 2 IN 1 OFF 1 NPN open collector type sensor or relay input 0V OFF The NJ type is OFF during detection. Ex.) APS3-12GMC-Z APS5-12GK-Z TC-4S/4W 12V 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V ON Power source OFF OUT 1 2 0V 3 An NPN open collector output type of proximity switch, rotary encoder, etc. 1 Magnetic detection device Input for a magnetic detection device 12V 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V ON OFF 1 2 3 Gear sensor, AC tachogenerator, etc. Notes: When using a sensor power source (+12 V), the consumption current of the connected sensor should be verified to be less than 50 mA. Connection is possible with all of the examples listed above. When using input (IN2) for a magnetic detection device, turn all side dipswitches OFF. Ex.) Gear sensor AC tachogenerator C-22 1 ON 12V OFF 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V (in mm) External Dimensions 5 Panel thickness for installation 48 1 Digital Tachometers TC-61 6 TC-V Bracket (attached) 99 96 Detailed Diagram of the Terminal Block 7.62 7.62 12.5 0.6 0 7 1.3 4.47 TC-4B TC-4A TC-4 TC-41 TC-4L TC-6 6.3 TC-4S/4W 45 92 0.8 0 TC-61 Boring Dimensions for Installation C-23 TC-V Digital Tachometers TC-6 This high-performance unit is for designated revolution display of multiple functions. The display is bright and easy to see thanks to a large LED with character height of 14.2 mm and luminous numerical display in red. The device has 8 modes to allow measurement of revolutions, speed, cycles, time differences, duration, length, intervals, and integration. The device has functions for prescaling, sampling, and decimal point switching. Display cycle TC-61 Designated Display When the impulse pulse cycle is within 0.4 s, the display data changes every 0.4 s. General Specifications Mechanical and Performance Specifications TC-4L TC-6 Electrical Specifications Specified voltage AC100 120V Permitted power fluctuation AC90 132V Specified frequency 50 Power consumption 14VA Withstand voltage AC2000 V 1 minute between power source and external terminals DC500 V more than 20 M 1 minute between power source and external terminals TC-41 Insulation resistance TC-4 200 240V 180 264V Function Display only Screen Red 7-segment LED 6-digit Character height 14.2 mm Measurement range 10 600000 rpm 10 ms 140 s 1 Precision Ambient temperature 10 50 Storage temperature 20 70 (with no freezing) 35 (with no freezing) 1 kV pulse amplitude 1 s rise 1 ns square-wave pulse Between power source terminals Protective structure IP40 (front panel only) mode 1 / 0.1 ms modes 2 and 5 8 modes Decimal place With switching function Prescaling M Sampling 1 time, 10 times, and 100 times with switching (mode 1 only) 1 with switching 10-n=10-9 9999 M 9999 0 n 9 (M and n are integers) Rear panel screw terminals Terminals Vibration Durability 10 55 Hz displacement amplitude 0.75 mm along three axes resistance No malfunction 10 55 Hz displacement amplitude 0.35 mm along three axes Durability 300m s2 11ms along three axes Impact resistance No malfunction 100m s2 11ms along three axes Noise resistance 0.01 999999 count Operating mode 90%RH (with no dewing) Conforming wiring 0.5 1.25 mm2 Conforming crimped contact JIS C 2805 Permitted torque 1.25 3 equivalent 0.6N m Sensor power DC12 V 10 14 V 50 mA (less than 10%p-p ripple noise) Power reset Time power supply is interrupted 0.5 s/Reset time 0.5 s External dimensions 96W 48H 105D (mm) Weight Approx. 450 g Accessory Metal fittings for installation For details related to modes, refer to C-17. Mode 5 Operating time s 8 modes Mode 1 Revolutions rpm Mode 6 Measure length Mode 2 Transit speed m/min. Mode 7 Internal Mode 3 Cycles s Mode 8 Prescaling counter Mode 4 Time difference s TC-4B TC-4S/4W Cycle period measurement Specification Item Specification Measurement method 60Hz Environmental Specifications Ambient humidity TC-4A Item Specification Item Front/Rear Panel Explanation Terminals for connection and groups of switches for settings are concentrated on the rear panel of the case. Dip switches (9-bit) Rotary switches Prescaling 123456789 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Terminal C-24 Digital Tachometers TC-6 Setting Prescaling 23 23 23 23 23 90 1 90 1 X 10 X1 23 23 90 1 90 1 90 1 Setting when prescaling is not used. 0 1 90 1 TC-6 0 TC-61 45 6 90 1 23 90 1 23 90 1 23 90 1 45 6 78 0 X 100 1 as shown below. 78 0 45 6 78 78 78 45 6 X 1000 At the factory setup, prescaling values are set to 0001 10 -0=1. Notes: 1. The range of exponent settings (10 -n ) is 0-9. 2. When prescaling is not used, prescaling settings should be at 1 10 -0 45 6 -n 45 6 78 X 10 45 6 78 Prescaling values can be set as arbitrary 4-digit values from a minimum of 1 10 -9 to a maximum of 9999 10 -0=9999. 45 6 78 prescaling values = display values 45 6 78 45 6 78 Measurement values Rotary switch turned by a screwdriver TC-V Prescaling is used to display values resulting when measurement values obtained are multiplied by fixed constants. ON Switching sampling (1 time, 10 times, or 100 times measurement time: 1s) Switching the operating mode (8 modes) Switching the decimal place Switching frequency OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TC-4L Configure Rear Panel Dip switches 9 TC-41 At factory setup, all dip switches are set to OFF. Switch 1 Switching the input frequency 10 Hz common for IN A and IN B (low-speed) Switches 2, 3, and 4 Switching the decimal place 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9. 9 9 9 9 9. 9 9 9 9 9 ON Switch OFF 2 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 3 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 2 3 4 Switches 5, 6, and 7 Switching the operating mode (8 modes) ON OFF 5 6 7 Switches 8 and 9 Switching sampling (effective only in mode 1) Switch Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 4 5 6 Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON Switch 1 time 10 times 8 OFF ON OFF ON 9 OFF OFF ON ON 100 times Measurement time 1 s ON OFF 8 9 When settings are effective for the TC-6, the measurement time for 1 sampling will be 1-s measurement. C-25 TC-4B 1 TC-4A TC-4 OFF position 10 kHz common for IN A and IN B (high-speed) TC-4S/4W ON position ON OFF Input specifications Input pulse amplitude Specification Terminal number TC-V Digital Tachometers TC-6 Marking Type ResInput voltage Input ponsiveresistance ON voltage OFF voltage ness 2 IN A Input 3 IN B Input 10 Hz/ 10 kHz switching 4 R Reset input 30 ms 1 1k 0 4V 10 INA-INB Low-speed 50 ms or more 30 V 50 ms or more 50 s or more 12V 1 When the input frequency is more than 10 Hz, turn rear panel dip switch 1 OFF (10 kHz). IN A IN B R 0V Internal circuit 1k Terminal Connection TC-4L 1 12V 2 3 IN A IN B 4 R 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Terminal number Marking Explanation 1 12 V DC output for sensor supply 0V 2 IN A Input 3 IN B Input 4 R Reset input 5 0V (Display reset in modes 6, 7, and 8) Common for input and sensor power 6 Blank Not connected 7 Blank Not connected 8 Blank Not connected 9 AC200 V 10 AC100 V 11 AC0 V AC100V TC-41 AC200V Source input (in mm) External Dimensions TC-4A TC-4 50 s or more Structure of the input circuit TC-61 TC-6 INA-INB High-speed 5 Panel thickness for installation 48 1 TC-4B Bracket (attached) 6 99 96 Detailed Diagram of the Terminal Block TC-4S/4W Boring Dimensions for Installation 0.8 0 4.47 7.62 7.62 45 0.6 0 C-26 6.3 12.5 7 1.3 92 TC-4L-G/H Digital Tachometers Power-Saving Small Tachometers for Display Only On the 48 mm square panel, the tachometers displays revolution speeds. The input rate can be set to either one pulse or ten pulses per revolution. TC-V TC-4L-G : AC110V(AC85 115V 50/60Hz) TC-4L-H : AC220V(AC180 240V 50/60Hz) General Specifications Mechanical and Performance Specifications Display interval Every 0.4 second if input pulse cycle is 0.4 second or less. Otherwise, 0.4 second plus cycle period. Previous value is displayed for six seconds after the object stops revolution. Withstand voltage AC2000V 1 Min. (between power and external terminal) Screen Insulaion resistance Min. 20M DC500V (between power and external terminal) Precision Item 10 50 Storage temperature 25 70 Ambient/Storage humidity 35 1 10 9999rpm 1 digit Available measurement Number of revolutions per minute (Mode 1 only) Prescaling 1 or 10 pulses/revolution 2 Times of sampling 1 Specification Ambient temperature 7-segment red LED for 4-digit display(Character height: 8 mm) Measurement range Environment TC-61 Display only (with no freezing) 90%RH(with no dewing) Shock resistance Durable for 11 ms along three axes at 490 m/s2 (50 G) No error for 11 ms along three axes at 98 m/s2 (10 G) Noise resistance 1 kV 1 Installation Socket B or F using optional Sensor power DC12V Power-on reset Shutdown period: 0.5 second Reset period: 0.5 second External dimensions 48W Durable along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude Vibration resistance No error along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude Weight 30mA 48H 95D Approx. 200 g Accessory Metal fitting *1 When prescale is 1. *2 The pulse rate per revolution can be set to either 1 or 10. s between power terminals Input pulse rate Measurement 1 pulse/revolution range 10 pulse/revolution Switch 4 at Position A 10 Position B 999 rpm one tenth ten fold 1 9999rpm Input Input pulse width Specification Terminal Signal Name Voltage Resinumber Response stance ON OFF 6 IN Input 10 cps or 2k cps Input circuit Slow H +12V 0 4V 10 L 30V Internal circuit Other input terminals 1k 50ms 50ms or more or more 1k Input pulse Fast 12mA MAX. 0V H Turns ON when input terminals are short-circuited with the 0 V terminal. L 250 s or more Switches Left side 1 2 3 250 s or more Switch 4 B A Decimal point location TC-6 Power consumption 6VA Function TC-4L 50/60Hz TC-4 Rated frequency Specification Cycle period measurement TC-4A Rated voltage Item Measurement method TC-41 Specification TC-4L-G : AC85 115V TC-4L-H : AC180 240V Used to select at Position A at Position B 2kcps 10cps 1 Count speed 2 Decimal point location 3 Decimal point location 4 Input pulse rate 1 pulse/revolution 10 pulses/revolution See the table below for the locations selected by different combinations of the swithes. Switch 9999 9 9 9. 9 9 9. 9 9 9. 9 9 9 2 A B A B 3 A A B B C-27 TC-4B Item TC-4S/4W Electrical specifications Digital Tachometers TC-4L Terminal Assignment T/N 6 5 7 8 4 TC-V 2 10 Not connected 6 Input Description Not connected 10 11 110 V or 220 V depending on models AC220V AC110V 1 Not connected 8 View for Rear side TC-61 12V(Sensor power) 5 7 11 T/N 9 0V 4 9 3 1 Description 3 Not connected for teminal No.11 2 Wiring examples Rotary encoder Proximity switch DC 2-wire type 6 5 7 TC-6 4 6 5 3 4 TC-4L 9 8 DC 2-wire type 10 2 3 TC-41 8 7 Compatible switches APS series switches having a code ending with E or N Example: APS5-12GK-E NJ series Models having a code ending withe E. Example: NJ2-12GM40-E DC2-wire proximity switches are also connectable. 9 1 2 1 11 TRD-J -S rotary encoder with power consumption of less than 30 mA at 12 V 10 11 External Dimensions (in mm) Boring dimensions for wall surface mounting 28 TC-4 48 TC-4A 60 2 – 4.5 or M4 Socket F(option) TC-4B 40 0.2 80.5 31 Boring dimensions for flush mounting 6 45 48 Bracket for flush mounting +0.3 0 (attached) 45 +0.3 0 TC-4S/4W Socket B (option) Specified sockets (options) For wall surface mounting using Socket F or DIN rails: KF-04 4.5 26 47 60 2– For flush mounting: KB-04 31 40 48 C-28 28 45 TC-41 Digital Tachometers Display Only Tachometers with Flexible Input Circuit TC-V The display only tachometer features a special circuit to allow connection to any input device. Displayed value is reset to zero if no pulse is entered for one second. Revolution speed is calculated from the average cycle period of pulse entered during one second. This minimizes the effect of speed variations. Available options include prescaling, sampling and decimal point display. Operation One second One second Tn When pulse rate per revolution=1, times of sampling=1, and prescale=1. When times of sampling=10 or 100, and 10 or 100 pulse period is shorter than one second. The above averaging is not performed if one cycle period exceeds one second, or if 10 or 100 pulse period is longer than one second. The displayed value can be reset to zero by input of an external signal. General Specifications Mechanical and Performance Specifications Electrical Specification Item Item Specification Reted voltage AC90 Rated frequency 50 132V 180 264V 60Hz Power consumption 14VA Withstand voltage AC 2000 V for one minute between power and external terminal Insulation resistance Min. 20M DC500V (between power and external terminal) Display only, compatible to various inputs Screen 7-segment red LED for 4-digit display(Character height: 14.2 mm) Precision 25 90 (with no freezing) RH(with no dewing) Vibration resistance Durable along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude No error along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude Shock resistance Durable for 11 ms along three axes at 490 ms2(50 G) No error for 11 ms along three axes at 98 ms2(10 G) 1 kV 1 60 9999 rpm Number of revolutions per minute(Mode 1 only) M 1 10-n=10-9 9999 M 9999 0 n 9 (where M and n are integers) Times of sampling 1,10 or 100 (Mode 1 only) 50 70 9999 rpm 1 digit Available measurement Specification 10 Ambient/Storage humidity 35 Noise resistance Function Prescaling Item Storage temp. Cycle period measurement Measurement range 10 Environment Ambient temp. Specification Measurement method Installation Use screws and the terminal block on rear panel Sensor power DC12V 50mA Power-on reset Shutdown period: 0.5 second Reset period: 0.5 second Output dimensions 96W Weight Approx. 450 g Accsessary Metal fiting 48H 105D (mm) Note: Averaging the pulse cycles per second minimizes variations of displayed value. s between power terminals Compatible sensors and switches 12 to 24V DC output sensor Voltage input 1 5V general purpose inverter TTL(5V totem-pole output) Voltage input 2 DC 2-wire proximity switch Gear sensor AC tachometer generator TC-4L TC-6 60 [rpm] TC-41 n Tn Previous value TC-4 Display Calculate TC-4A Measure the periods T1 thorough Tn DC2W input Electromagnetic sensor IN 1 (changed by dip switch) IN 2 TC-4B T2 To digitally display the speed of inverter motor, connect its pulse output to the TC-41 tachometer. Analog (voltage or current) signals cannot be used. The TC-41 circuit should be configured so as to accept the pulse to be counted. IN 1 and IN 2 cannot be used at the same time. C-29 TC-4S/4W T1 TC-61 Pulse input Digital Tachometers TC-41 Switches The terminals and switches are located Eight dip swiches (8-bit) Rotary switches for prescaling on the rear and the side of the tachometer. Rear Panel Side Panel prescale TC-V 12345678 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Prescaling This function allow you to multiply the measured value by any value within the range shown below. Use screwdriver to turn the rotary switches. 23 23 23 23 90 1 90 1 23 90 1 1 90 1 Eight dip switches on the rear panel ON Times of sampling (1, 10, or 100 times) OFF Measurement range 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Decimal point TC-4A Input frequency TC-4B Switch 1: Input frequency (Count speed) ON OFF ON 10 cps (Low speed) for both IN A and IN B OFF 10k cps (High speed) for both IN A and IN B 1 TC-4S/4W Switches 2 and 3: Decimal Point ON OFF 2 9 9 9. 9 9 9. 9 9 9. 9 9 9 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON Switch 9999 2 3 3 Switch 4: Measurement range ON OFF ON 60 to 9999rpm* Reset to zero when pulse input is suspended for 1 second. OFF 10 to 9999rpm* Reset to zero when pulse input is suspended for 6 seconds. 4 *When pulse rate per revolution=1, and prescale=1 Switches 5 and 6: Unassigned Switches 7 and 8: Time of Sampling ON OFF 7 C-30 8 Switch 1 time 10 times 7 OFF ON OFF ON 8 OFF OFF ON ON 100 times X1 The setting when 90 1 0 23 23 23 23 23 90 1 TC-6 90 1 TC-4L 90 1 TC-41 90 1 0 X 10 78 0 78 0 78 78 78 Set the scale in the form of "M 10-9" where M is a 4-digit -n X 10 X 1000 X 100 integer and n is a number from 0 to 9. Use the leftmost switch to set the exponent n, and the other four switches to set the value of M. The prescale can range from 1x10-9 to 9999x10-0=9999. Notes: 1.The exponent (10-n) can be set in a range of to 9. 2.If you do not use a prescale, set the value to 1 (1 10-0) 1 as follows: Prescaled at 1 45 6 45 6 45 6 45 6 45 6 All the settings are 0 by the default. 45 6 78 45 6 78 78 45 6 78 45 6 78 45 6 Measurement Prescale=Value to be displayed TC-4 Dip switch (3-bit) 90 1 TC-61 Terminal block Digital Tachometers TC-41 Dip switches on the side panel ON Switch 1 OFF ON Switch 2 OFF Switch 3 OFF Input mode Voltage 1 (12 24V) OFF 1 2 3 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON Voltage 2 (5V) Current 1 (Namur) Current 2 TC-V Dip switch for selecting IN1 input mode OFF Input Specifications Terminal number IN1 IN2 Low speed Response Resistance ON Voltage input 1 (12 24V) Selected by dip switches 15k 0 TC-61 Voltage OFF 4V 6 1.5V 2.5 0 4V 6 30V 0 4V 6 30V 50 ms or more 50 ms or more 30V IN1 IN2 High speed Voltage input 2 10cps or (5V) 10kcps Current input 1 15k 0 1 3.5k Current input 2 1 1k 3 IN 2 2 Electromagnetic 10cps or detector pulse 10kcps input 4 RESET Reset input (open collector) 1 1k 0 10 s or more 1.Pulled up to 12 V by internal circuit. 2.Use the dip switch 1 on the rear panel. Turn it to OFF to select 10kcps. IN 1 and IN2 cannot be used at the same time. 0.3Vp-p or more 0.3Vp-p or more 2Vp-p or more 20Vp-p or more 4V s or more 50 30V TC-41 30ms 50 10cps: 100cps: 1kcps: 10kcps: 10k 30V TC-6 Function TC-4L Name IN 1 2 Input pulse width Specifications Circuit configuration Current input 1(Namur input) 12V Current input 2 12V +12V 3.3k IN1 Electromagnetic detector pulse input 12V Reset input 12V IN2 TC-4 Voltage inputs 1 and 2 1k IN1 IN1 R 10k 1k 0V Sensor 0V 0V Sensor Input circuit Input circuit Input circuit TC-4B Sensor 0V TC-4A 15k 0V Terminal Assignment 12V 2 IN A 3 IN B 4 R 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0V AC100V AC200V Terminal number Name 1 12V TC-4S/4W 1 Description DC sensor power 2 IN 1 Input 3 IN 2 Input 4 R Reset input 5 0V Common input: voltage and power 6 Not used Not connected 7 Not used Not connected 8 Not used Not connected 9 AC200V 10 AC100V 11 AC0V ACpower C-31 Digital Tachometers TC-41 Wiring Examples Sensor Input Dip switches Proximity switch for voltage output (12 V to 24 V) 12V ON Voltage input 1 1 2 12V ON TC-61 2 12V ON TC-6 2 TC-4L 3 4 5 IN 2 R 0V 0V 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V Brown 3 Blue 1 Sensor for current output 12V ON Current input 2 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V OFF 1 2 3 1 Sensor for NPN open collector output TC-41 2 IN 1 OFF 1 Namur input or Current input Can be connected to Namur or current input Models:APS5-12GK-E/APS3-16F-E TRD-J -S/RZ 0V OUT 1 Open collector and DC 2-wire proximity switch Models: APS3-12GMC-Z APS5-12GK-Z 0V 3 Proximity switch for Namur output Current input 1 (Namur input) 5 R 5 V power source OFF 1 The NJ type is turned OFF at detection time. 4 IN 2 OUT 1 Voltage input 2 3 IN 1 3 General inverter for voltage output(5V) TTL for totem-pole output 2 12V or 24 V power source OFF Models: APS-80A-2T APS-30-2T TC-V Connection 1 12V ON 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V Power source OFF 1 2 3 OUT 0V TC-4 Notes: When using the +12 V sensor power, confirm that the sensor consumes less than 50 mA. This power is applicable to all the models listed above. To use IN 2 for electromagnetic detector, turn all the three switches on the side panel to the OFF positions. 1 ON TC-4A Example Gear sensor, AC tachometer generator, OFF etc. 12V 1 2 2 3 4 5 IN 1 IN 2 R 0V 3 (in mm) TC-4B External Dimensions 5 Thickness of panel 48 1 TC-4S/4W Bracket (attached) 6 99 96 External dimensions of terminals block Boring dimensions 92 0.8 0 7.62 7.62 45 6.3 C-32 12.5 7 0.6 0 1.3 4.47 TC-4 Digital Tachometers Display Only Tachometer TC-V The red LED screen clearly displays character of 14.2 mm in height. Eight modes are available for the following measurements: number of revolutions, speed, cycle time, time lag, process time, length, spacing, and total. Options include prescaling, sampling and decimal point display. Item Specification AC90 Rated frequency 50/60Hz 132V/180 264V Power consumption 14VA Withstand voltage Insulation resistance AC 2000 V for one minute between power and external terminal Measurement method Cycle period based measurement Function Display only Screen 7-segment red LED for 4-digit display (Character height: 14.2mm) Measurement range 10 Precision Min.20M DC500V (between power and external terminal) Available measurements Prescaling Environmental specifications Item Ambient temperature Storage temperature 50 25 70 (with no feezing) Ambient/Storage humidity 35 Vibration resistance Durable along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude No error along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude 90 140s, 1 9999 counts 0.1ms (Modes 2 to 5) 8 modes M 10-n=10-9 9999 1 M 9999 0 n 9 (M and n are integers) Times of sampling 1, 10 or 100 (Available only in Mode 1) Specification 10 9999 rpm, 10ms 1 digit(Mode 1) or TC-4L Rated voltage Specification Installation Use screws and the terminal block on rear panel Sensor power DC12V 50mA Power-on reset Shutdown period: 0.5 second/Reset period: 0.5 second External dimensions 96W RH(with no dewing) Shock resistance Durable for 11 ms along three axes at 490 m/s2(50 G) No error for 11 ms along three axes at 98 m/s2(10 G) Noise resistance 1 kV 1 s between power terminals 48H 105D (mm) Weight Approx. 450 g Accessary Metal fitting The following eight modes are available: Mode 1: Number of revolutions(rpm) Mode 2: Speed(meters/minute) Mode 3: Cycle time(seconds) Mode 4: Time lag(seconds) Mode 5: Process time(seconds) Mode 6: Length Mode 7: Spacing Mode 8: Prescale counter TC-4A Item TC-41 Electrical specifications TC-6 Mechanical and Performance Specifications TC-4B Switches (rear panel) TC-4S/4W The terminals and switches are located on the rear of the tacometer. Eight dip swithes (8-bit) Rotary swithes for prescaling Prescale 12345678 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TC-4 General Specifications TC-61 Displayed value is updated every 0.4 second when input cycle period is 0.4 second or less. 9 10 11 Terminal block C-33 Use screwdriver to turn the rotary switches. 23 23 23 90 1 23 90 1 90 1 0 The setting when not using a prescale 90 1 23 23 90 1 90 1 0 78 TC-6 X1 45 6 78 45 6 78 45 6 78 0 X 10 as follows. 45 6 78 45 6 23 23 23 90 1 23 90 1 Notes: 1.The exponent (10-n) can be set in a range of 0 to 9. 2.If you do not use a prescale, set the value to 1 10-0 X 100 45 6 90 1 -n Set the scale in the form "M 10-n" where M is a 4-digit X 10 X 1000 integer and n is a number from 0 to 9. Use the leftmost switch to set the exponent n, and the other four switches to set the value of M. The prescale can range from 1 10-9 to 9999 10-0=9999. 45 6 90 1 45 6 78 Measurement Prescale=Value to be displayed 45 6 78 45 6 78 TC-V Preset a 4-digit value to determine the scale used to calculate values for display. 78 TC-61 Prescaling 78 Digital Tachometers TC-4 0 1 TC-4L Eight dip switches on the rear panel ON Times of sampling (1, 10, or 100 times) OFF Operation mode selection (8 modes) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Decimal point selection TC-4A TC-4 TC-41 Input frequency Switch 1: Input frequency (Count speed) ON ON 10cps for both IN A and IN B (Low speed) OFF OFF 10kcps for both IN A and IN B (High speed) 1 Switches 2 and 3: Decimal Point ON Switch 9999 9 9 9. 9 9 9. 9 9 9.9 9 9 2 OFF ON OFF ON 3 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 3 TC-4S/4W TC-4B 2 Switches 4, 5 and 6: Measurement range ON Switch Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 OFF 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 4 5 6 Switches 7 and 8: Times of Sampling ON OFF 7 C-34 8 Switch 1 time 7 OFF ON OFF ON 8 OFF OFF ON ON 10 times 100 times Digital Tachometers TC-4 Input specifications Input pulse width 2 IN A 3 IN B 4 R Function Response Resistance Input 10Hz/10kHz selection Input Reset input INA Voltage ON INB low speed INA OFF L 50ms or more 50ms or more 1k 0 4V INB high speed H 10 30V 30ms 50 s or more 50 s or more Circuit configuration TC-V Name INA INB reset Not available in Modes 1 to 5 +12V Input pulse 12mA MAX. Turns ON when input terminals are short-circuited with the 0 V terminal. TC-6 0V TC-61 Internal circuit Other input terminals 1k Terminal Assignment R 6 7 8 9 10 11 Terminal number Name 1 12V 0V Description DC sensor power TC-4L IN B 5 2 IN A Input 3 IN B Input 4 R Reset input 5 0V Common input: voltage and power 6 Not used Not connected 7 Not used Not connected 8 Not used Not connected 9 AC200V 10 AC100V 11 AC0V AC100V AC200V TC-41 IN A 4 AC power TC-4 3 (in mm) External Dimensions Digital switch (TC-4S/4W only) Dust prevention cover (TC-4S/4W only) 1 5 Thickness of panel TC-4A 12V 2 Multi-purpose connector (attached to TC-4B only) 48 TC-4B 1 Bracket (attached) 2 99 104 114 *1 TC-4B only *1 TC-4A/4W only External dimensions of terminal block Boring dimensions 0.8 0 7.62 7.62 1.3 4.47 7 92 0.6 0 6 9.5 45 96 12.5 1 6.3 C-35 TC-4S/4W Terminal number Specifications TC-6 TC-61 TC-V Digital Tachometers TC-4A In addition to the measurement modes of TC-4, this tachometer provides analog output. Prescaling is nothing to do with analog output. Analog output is available only in Mode 1. A rotary encoder is required for slow pulse input. Displayed value is updated every 0.4 second when input cycle period is 0.4 second or less. Analog output value varies as the measured value does. Mechanical and Performance Specifications Item Specification Measurement method Cycle period based measurement Function Analog output(Available only in Mode 1) Screen 7-segment red LED for 4-digit display(Character height: 14.2mm) Measurement range 10 TC-4L Available measurements TC-41 9999rpm, 10ms 1 digit(Mode 1)or Precision TC-4 Digital Tachometer with Analog Output 140s, 1 For the General Specifications, see page C-33. 9999 counts 0.1ms(Modes 2 to 5) 8 modes M Prescaling Times of sampling 10-n=10-9 9999 1 M 9999 0 n 9(M and n are integers) 1, 10 or 100(Available only in Mode 1) Installation Use screws and the terminal block on rear panel Sensor power DC12V 50mA Power-on reset Shutdown period: 0.5 second/Reset period: 0.5 second External dimensions 96W Weight Approx. 450 g Axxsessary Metal fitting 48H 105D Rear panel TC-4A Eight dip switches (8-bit) Five rotary switches for prescaling Analog output adjuster prescale 12345678 TC-4B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 TC-4S/4W Terminal block Analog output selector See page C-34 for how to operate these switches. Input Specifications Input pulse width INA Terminal number Specifications Name 2 IN A Input 3 IN B Input 4 R Function Voltage Response Resistance ON Reset input 10Hz/10kHz selection 1k 0 30ms Not available in analog mode 4V INA 30V 50ms 50ms or more or more 50 s 50 s or more or more Input circuit configuration +12V INA INB Other reset input terminals 1k Input pulse 12mA MAX. 0V C-36 INB high speed L OFF 10 INB low speed H Internal circuit Turns ON when input terminals are short-circuited with the 0 V terminal. Output specifications Output specifications Input frequency 10 Output characteristics Voltage output Current output ON 100Hz 1 10 1kHz 0.1 10V 0.2 20mA 100 10kHz 0.1 10V 0.2 20mA Selected by switches 10V 20mA 2 Switches 2 3 1 Linearity 4 3% Ripple Max. 20mV ON Resonse time (90 ) ON ON Load resistance: Load resistance: Max. 500 Min. 1k " 10 100Hz 2.6 seconds 10 100 1kHz 10kHz 0.6 seconds TC-V Digital Tachometers TC-4A " denotes OFF I/O characteristics Located on the right side ON Switch 3 ON 10Hz 1kHz OFF 1 Switch 4 ON 100Hz 10kHz 4 8 4 VR 10 TC-4L 6 3 Use Switches 1 to 4 to select the maximum input frequency. The dial on the right is used to adjust output voltage and current. The adjustable range is 5 . No adjustment is made before delivery. 2 2 4 Input frequency kHz 2 TC-6 6 Analog output circuit Pulse encoder at 60 pulses/revolution Note: Analog output uses frequency-voltage conversion. Use input frequency of at least 10 Hz. Lower frequency increase voltage or current ripple. At less than 600 rpm, an encoder is required for the input sensor. It should be rated at 60 pulse/revolution to obtain 10Hz at 10 rpm and 10k Hz at 10,000 rpm. 7 Voltage output IN A F/V convertor I/O separator Current convertor 6 Current output 0 20mA R 0 A pulse encoder is required for speeds below 600 rpm. 10V R 8 Common Common terminal 8 is separated from 0 V terminal 5. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Terminal number 12V IN A IN B R 0V Current output Voltage output Analog output common Name 12V 1 AC100V Description Sensor power 2 IN A Input 3 IN B Input 4 R Reset(Available in Modes 6, 7 and 8) 5 0V Common for input and sensor power 6 7 Current output Current output 8 Common analog output TC-4B 1 TC-4A Terminal Assignment TC-41 Output 8 Analog selector and output adjustor TC-4 10 TC-61 Dip switches on the side panel (See below). 9 AC200V 10 AC100V 11 AC0V TC-4S/4W AC200V AC power For the external dimensions, see page C-35. C-37 Digital Tachometers TC-4B Tachometer with Digital Output TC-4B provides features of digital output (BCD) on the base unit of TC-4. TC-V The TC-4B gives the BCD output faster than displaying the value if input cycle period is 0.4 second or less. Mechanical and Performance Specifications TC-6 TC-61 Item Specification Measurement method Cycle period based measurement Function Digital output(BCD 4 digits) Screen 7-segment red LED for 4-digit display(Character height: 14.2mm) Measurement range 10 Precision Available measurements TC-4L TC-41 140s, 1 9999 count 0.1ms(Modes 2 to 5) 8 modes M Prescaling TC-4 9999rpm, 10ms 1 degit(Mode 1)or For the General Specifications, see page C-33. 10-n=10-9 9999 1 M 9999 0 n 9 (M and n are integrers) Times of sampling 1, 10 or 100 (Available only in Mode 1) Installation Use screws and the terminal block on rear panel Sensor power DC12V 50mA Power-on reset Shutdown period: 0.5 second/Reset period: 0.5 second External dimensions 96W Weight Approx. 450 g Accessary Metal fitting (card edge connection) 48H 8 Modes 110D Mode 1 : Number of revolutions (rpm) Mode 2 : Speed (meters/minute) Mode 3 : Cycle time (seconds) Mode 4 : Time lag (seconds) Mode 5 : Process time (seconds) Mode 6 : Length Mode 7 : Spacing Mode 8 : Prescale counter Switches (rear panel) TC-4A Printed circuit board (card edge terminals) Five rotary swithes for prescaling Prescale Eight dip switches 12345678 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Terminal block 9 10 11 See page C-34 for how to operate these switches. Input terminals Input pulse width Specifications Terminal number TC-4S/4W TC-4B 1 Name 2 INA 3 INB Input 10Hz/10kHz selection 4 R HOLD Reset input Hold input 30ms Function INA Voltage Response Resistance ON Input INB low speed INA OFF L 50ms 50ms or more or more 1k 0 4V 10 30V 50 s 50 s or more or more Input circuit configuration INA INB Reset and hold +12V Other input terminals 1k Card edge terminal 10 Input pulse 12mA MAX. 0V C-38 INB high speed H Internal circuit Turns ON when input terminals are short-circuited with the 0 V terminal. Output specifications Timing chart for BCD output with BUSY and HOLD signal. (example for Model 1) Output specifications Open collector Turns on when resultant value is "1" Max. 24V Max. 30mA Max. 2V ON 30ms or less Internal operation OFF BUSY signal 15ms OFF ON HOLD signal 9 5 ON TC-V BCD output BCD and BUSY signals 1, 2, 3, OFF IN A TC-61 Output type Operation Voltage Current Residual voltage Digital Tachometers TC-4B Max. 30 mA, Withstand voltage 30 V BCD value is not updated when HOLD signal is ON and BUSY signal is OFF. Data can be updated as long as BUSY signal is ON. 11 12 BCD output connection PC 1st digit: 1 2 4th digit: 8 11 13 0V BUSY CH O C TC-6 TC-4B 1 1A Input 1B BCD input 4D BUSY input TC-4L Shunt the common input terminal 11 with the CH terminal 13 to separate the terminal 11 from the common output terminal 12. More than one TC-4B tachometer can be connected to a programmable controller(PC). They can share BCD and BUSY terminals so the PC can be configured with 17 input terminals. A diode is required for each of BCD outputs and BUSY outputs. Select 1 TC-4B 2 Select 2 1A 1st digit: 1 11 13 4th digit: 8 0V BUSY CH O C Output 4D TC-41 2 1B PC model: SU-6B IN A 4 IN B 5 R 6 7 8 9 10 11 Terminal number Name 1 12V 0V AC100V AC200V Description DC sensor power 2 IN A Input 3 IN B Input 4 R Reset input 5 0V Common input: voltage and power 6 Not used Not connected 7 Not used Not connected 8 Not used Not connected 9 AC200V 10 AC100V 11 AC0V TC-4A 3 TC-4B 12V 2 ACpower TC-4S/4W 1 TC-4 Terminal Assignment Card edge terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4-digit BCD values are generated through the card edge terminals as follows: Terminal name Signal 1 B 1A A 1C Upper edge(B) Lower edge(A) Destination/function 2 1B 1D 1 2 4 8 1 digit 3 2A 2C 4 2B 2D 1 2 4 8 2 digit 5 3A 3C 6 3B 3D 1 2 4 8 3 digit 7 4A 4C 8 9 10 11 12 13 4B BUSY HOLD 0V O C CH 4D BUSY HOLD 0V O C CH 1 2 4 8 4 digit 14 BUSY HOLD 0V O C CH Unused BUSY HOLD 0V O C CH Unused OUT O C Output Input Common Common swiching Separating Terminal 11 and OUT Terminal 12 These terminals are internally connected. Short circuit the common input terminal 11 with the CH terminal 13 to separate the common input and common output. 0V 11 OUT common 12 Common input Common output CH 13 Card edge terminal 11 is internally connected with Terminal 5 on the internal board. For the External Dimensions, see page C-35. C-39 Single Preset TC-61 TC-V Digital Tachometers TC-4S TC-6 TC-4L Tachometer The TC-4S and TC-4W has a comparator function on the basic unit of TC-4. They are presettable (S for single and W for dual preset) and give output when the current value reaches the preset. TC-4S TC-4W On the TC-4W models, two values can be preset and prescaled. Either OUT1 or OUT 2 signal is generated when the count has reached the corresponding preset value. Mechanical and Performance Specifications Specification For the General Specifications, see page C-33. Measurement method Cycle period based measurement Function TC-4S: Single preset TC-4W: Dual preset Screen 7-segment red LED for 4-digit display (Character height: 14.2mm) Measurement range 10 9999rpm, 10ms 140s, 1 1 degit(Mode 1) or Precision Available measurements 9999 count 0.1ms(Modes 2 to 5) 8 modes M Prescaling TC-41 / TC-4W Tachometer Item TC-4 Dual Preset 10-n=10-9 9999 1 M 9999 0 n 9 (M and n are integers) Times of sampling 1, 10 or 100(Available only in Mode 1) Installation Use screws and the terminal board on rear panel Sensor power DC12V Power-on reset Shutdown period: 0.5 second/Reset period: 0.5 second External dimensions 96W Weight Approx. 450 g Accessary Metal fitting, dustproof cover 8 Modes 50mA 48H 105D Mode 1 : Number of revolutions (rpm) Mode 2 : Speed (meters/minute) Mode 3 : Cycle time (seconds) Mode 4 : Time lag (seconds) Mode 5 : Process time (seconds) Mode 6 : Length Mode 7 : Spacing Mode 8 : Prescale counter Rear panel and Side panel TC-4A Eight dip switches (9-bit) Five rotary switches for prescaling Analog output adjustor (TC-4W) TC-4S/4W TC-4B prescale 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Terminal block See page C-34 for how to operate these switches. Dip switches on the rear panel ON OFF Output mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Times of sampling Measurement mode Decimal point ON Hold OFF Compare or one shot See page C-34 for how to use these switches. Input frequency Reset timer adjustor (TC-4W) Located on the side panel, this dial adjusts the timer used for reset signal output. The timer starts when the power is turned on. Allowable time ranges from one second to ten seconds. C-40 Digital Tachometers TC-4S/ TC-4W Input Specifications Input pulse width INA Input 3 IN B Input 4 R ON 10cps or 10kcps Reset input 1k 0 L OFF 4V 10 50ms 50ms or more or more 50 s 50 s or more or more Input circuit configuration 30V INA INB Reset 30ms +12V Internal circuit Other input terminals 1k Not available in Modes 1 to 5. TC-V IN A Voltage Response Resistance INB high speed Input pulse 12mA MAX. 0V Turns ON when input terminals are short-circuited with the 0 V terminal. TC-61 2 Function INA Output specifications 7 OUT2 Contact output 2 Contact capacity Max. 50ms 200,000 contacts at 220V 2 A(resistance load) OUT1 7 OUT2 OUT2 8 COM OUT1 is available only on TC-4W. Only OUT 2 is available on TC-4S. Terminal Assignment Terminal number Name 12V 1 1 +12V 2 IN A TC-6 OUT1 Contact output 1 6 OUT1 Response 3 IN B 4 R 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0V AC100V OUT2 OUT1 AC200V Description TC-4L 6 Relay output sensor power 2 IN A Input 3 IN B Input 4 R Reset input 5 0V Common for input and sensor power 6 OUT1 (TC-4W only) 7 OUT2 (both TC-4S and TC-4W) 8 Common output 9 AC200V 10 AC100V 11 AC0V AC power TC-4 Terminal number Output circuit Specifications Function Name Timing charts Compare Mode 1 Preset 2 Preset 1 Preset 1 OUT 2 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 1 Reset Reset Generated after a time set on the internal timer. Hold Display TC-4A Display Preset 2 Display The initial status is OFF when powerd-on, it becomes ON after receiving a counting pulse. Compare Modes 2 to 7 Preset 2 Preset 2 Preset 1 Preset 1 OUT 2 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 1 Display TC-4S/4W Hold Reset Reset Generated after a time set on the internal timer. Hold Display One shot Mode 8 Preset 2 Preset 2 Preset 1 Preset 1 OUT 2 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 1 Reset Reset Display Time of OUT 2 40 See page C-35 for the external dimension of the counter. TC-41 Name INB low speed H TC-4B Terminal number Specifications 50ms In the Compare mode, OUT1 or OUT 2 is generated when the display value has reached the preset value 1 or 2. C-41 TC-V Digital Tachometers TC series Wiring 1 Proximity switch 12V 12V IN A Proximity switch TC-61 IN B Proximity switch 3 4 5 IN A IN B R 0V 6 Black (White) 0V Blue (Black) Black (White) 0V Blue (Black) Applicable switches APS series: Models with an output code of N or E, Z Example: APS3-16F-E NJ, RJ, SJ series: Models with an output code of E. Example: NJ2-12GM40-E TC-6 12V TC-41 TC-4L 1 2 3 4 5 IN A IN B R 0V TC-4S/4W TC-4B TC-4A TC-4 12V Red C-42 -RZ 10 11 AC200V Rotary encoder TRD-J 9 AC100V Reset 1 -S 8 Brown (Red) OUT TRD-J 7 Brown (Red) OUT 12V 2 OUT Green 0V Black Shield Digital Tachometers TC series Recommended application 1. Measuring speed between two points The tachometer can measure the speed of an moving object detected by two sensors. With the sensors positioned as shown below, the speed in meters per minute is calculated from their pulse counts and distance. 1m INB TC-V INA meters/minute TC-61 Sensor TC-4 Step 1 Select the model. Step 2 TC-6 Use TC-4 that displays speeds. Install sensors. Set the dip switches. Step 4 Decimal point To select Fast Input frequency OOne digit after decimal point O(000.0) O Operation mode Mode 2 O O Times of sampling: 1 O Number of sampling Set OFF N FF N OFF FF FF FF TC-41 Set to Input frequency TC-4 Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 On the rear panel, set the dip switches as follows: TC-4A Step 3 TC-4L Use photoelectric sensors for inputs to INA and INA. Select a prescale Select "1" by setting the rotary switches as follows (if the prescale has been changed from the initial value): 45 6 TC-4B 0 23 90 1 90 1 0 23 23 23 90 1 23 X1 45 6 78 X 10 45 6 78 X 100 45 6 78 0 0 1 Configure the circuit. 1 2 3 4 5 +12V IN A IN B R 0V 6 7 8 9 10 TC-4S/4W Step 5 X 1000 78 78 45 6 90 1 -n 90 1 X 10 11 AC100V Photoelectric Photoelectric sensor sensor Reset(display reset) IN A IN B C-43 TC-V Digital Tachometers TC series Recommended application 2. Controlling conveyor speed Based on the pulse input from the sensor, the tachometer calculates the number of revolutions of the axis shown below. Using the prescale, it converts the number to a speed then displays the value. It generates an alarm when the value exceeds upper or lower limit. Step 1 Revolution rod Select the model. Step 2 Install a sensor. Install a sensor so it detects the revolution of the pulley axis. Use an APS3-16F-E proximity switch. TC-6 Set the dip switches. On the rear panel, set the dip switches as follows: TC-4L Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 To select Low Input frequency (less than 10 pulses/revolution) Decimal point One digit after decimal point (000.0) Operation mode Mode 1 Sampling mode Times of sampling: 1 Output mode Compare Select a prescale. -n X 1000 X 100 X 10 45 6 23 45 6 23 23 23 23 90 1 X 10 45 6 78 45 6 78 45 6 78 200 Using an exponent, the value is expressed as 6283 10-4 because 0.6283=6283/10000. To select this scale, set the rotary switches as follows: 78 D= 6 2 8 3 X 1 0 -4 78 D 6283 = 6283 X 10-4 0.6283 = 10000 901 TC-4 Calculate the circumference of the pulley axis in meters, then express the value in the form of "M 10-n". M is a 4-digit integer and n is a number of 0 to 9. For example, if the diameter of the pulley axis is 200 mm, its circumference in meters is: 200 3.1416 0.001 = 0.62832 TC-4A Set ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 90 1 Step 4 Set to Input frequency 90 1 Step 3 TC-41 Proximity sensor 90 1 TC-61 Use the TC-4W dual preset tachometer to set upper and lower limits. X1 TC-4B Step 5 Configure the circuit. 1 TC-4S/4W 12V 2 3 4 5 IN A IN B R 0V 6 7 8 9 10 11 Red(Brown) Proximity switch AC100V White(Black) Black(Blue) Common OUT2(upper limit) APS3-16F-E For control output OUT2(lower limit) Notes: Reset(putput reset) 1. Keep unused terminals open. 2. The AC power should be turned on at the same time as the power for the conveyor motor. This allows the internal timer to disable pulse input until the conveyor reaches a specific speed. The timer can be set 0 to 10 seconds. 3. When the AC power is turned on earlier than the motor power, the tachometer generates an alarm indicating that the conveyor speed is below the lower limit. To prevent this, set the internal timer so the output is reset to OFF some time after the AC power is turned on (See below). Step 6 Adjust the reset timer. Set the timer so as to reset the tachometer when the conveyor has reached an operating speed. C-44 DIGITAL TIMERS KT-V Series D-2 D-1 KT-V Digital Timers KT-V Series Digital Timers A large display that is easy to read has been provided in a small DIN48 size. The large red LED is bright with a character height for display of 12 mm, which allows it to be seen easily from a distance and at an angle. In addition, set values use a green LED to differentiate from timekeeping values. Setting of set values with individual setting keys has the feel of digital switches. Basic function settings are made with digital switches; detailed settings are selected with digit keys, so operation is easy. Merits CE Mark Tamper proof Key protection can be set for individual keys to prevent a malfunction or tampering. Various uses with 5 types of operating modes Settings can be made for ondelay, offdelay, one-shot, integration, and flicker. Battery-less memory retention EEPROM is used to retain values in memory, so there is no need for battery maintenance. Display of Elapsed time/Remaining time The time display can be selected to display elapsed time and remaining time. Removable terminals Maintenance has been reduced via terminals that can be removed. After wiring, the terminal cover provides a safe surface for worry-free use. IP65 Protective structure The front cover panel uses sheet keys, so operation with wet or dirty hands can be done worry-free. A front cover is also provided as an option to enhance the protective structure. Power source for a large-capacity sensor You can source the power for sensor from the built-in P/S 24VDC, 60mA. Designed in compliance with CE and UL Free power supply for the AC type The operating AC voltage is wide as 85VAC 264VAC. Various types of time ranges The device covers 10 types of time ranges with times of 0.001 s to 9999 hours. Model number system List of Models Model Number Number of digits Source Voltage Sensor Source Voltage DC24 V 60 mA KT-V4S- AC KT-V4S 4 KT-V4S-C DC S (Accessories) Installation Frame 4 DC power C Blank AC power with output 4 digits Series Name D-2 KT-V Digital Timers General Specifications Specification Item AC power AC100 240 V Permitted power fluctuation AC85 264 V Power consumption Approx. 11 VA DC12 DC10 DC24 V (20-28 V) 60 mA (less than 10%p-p ripple noise) Memory Backup upon Power Failure EEPROM Writing Up to 100,000 times Storage temperature 26.4 V Approx. 4 W Sensor power Ambient temperature 24 V KT-V Source voltage DC power Memory Duration 10 years 10 50 20 70 (with no freezing) Ambient humidity 35 Withstand voltage AC 2kV 1 minute AC 2kV for one minute (for AC input, 0 V, and relay interconnection) (for the DC type, 0 V and relay interconnection only) Vibration resistance Impact resistance Noise resistance 85 RH (with no dewing) Durability Displacement amplitude 0.5 mm 10 No malfunction Displacement amplitude 0.35 mm 10 55 Hz along three axes 55 Hz along three axes 2 Durability 490 m/s along three axes No malfunction 98 m/s2 along three axes AC power between terminals 1.5 kV (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns) DC power between terminals 1.0 kV (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns) Protective structure IP65 (front panel only) Weight Terminals Approx. 150 g Conforming wiring 0.25 Conforming crimped contact R1.25-3 Permitted torque 0.5 Nm 1.65 mm Approx. 110 g 2 Performance Specifications Item Specification Category Timer Operational format Ondelay, offdelay, one-shot, accumulation, and flicker (with alarm output) Number of digits 4 digits Display Display of timekeeping values: red LED, Character height 12 mm, Set display: green LED, Character height: 7 mm Time range 0.001 s /1 h Display Timer precision 9.999 s/0.01 s 9999 h/1 min 99.99 s/0.1 s 99 h 59 min/0.1 min 999.9 s/1 s 9999 s/1 s 999.9 min/0.1 h 99 min 59 s/1 min 9999 min 999.9 h Elapsed time/Remaining time 0.013% or 15 ms (using large values) Input logic: negative logic (no-load input)/ positive logic (voltage input) Input Input resistance: positive logic 15 k Negative logic 3.3 k (AC power)/1.8 k (DC power) Inpult voltage: "L" 0-3 V "H" 7-30 V Start input response Less than 15 ms/5 ms/1 ms External reset Min. signal amplitude 5 ms Output DC output: NPN open collector output / 24 V 100 mA Withstand pressure 35 V Residual voltage less than 1.5 V Relay output: 1 transformer relay AC220V 2A (resistance load) Output duration (flicker) 10-9999 ms variable every 10 ms Key protection Setting of arbitrary keys possible Installation Exclusively for embedding (terminal block connection) D-3 Digital Timers KT-V Output Operation Chart SW Ondelay Alarm setting Remaining time 1 2 OFF OFF Elapsed time Alarm values Alarm values KT-V Set values Reset 0 0 ON ON Start OFF ON Reset Elapsed time OFF ON Relay ON output OFF DC ON output OFF SW One-shot 1 2 Remaining time SW Accumulation ON OFF Elapsed time Set values 1 ON Remaining time 2 ON Elapsed time Set values Alarm values Reset 2 ON OFF OFF ON Relay output OFF ON DC output OFF Start 1 OFF Remaining time Set values Start SW Offdelay Alarm values 0 0 ON ON Start OFF ON Reset OFF ON OFF OFF ON Relay ON output OFF DC ON output OFF Power ON source Relay output OFF DC ON output OFF OFF Flicker (in Setup mode) Remaining time Elapsed time Set values Alarm values 0 Start Reset Alarm settings ON OFF ON OFF t t t t Relay ON output OFF DC ON output OFF Output time of t is 10 D-4 9990 ms variable (100 ms at shipping time) When alarm settings are 0, DC output is the same as in output operations for relay output. Alarm settings should be smaller values than preset values. Performing alarm setting with values that exceed preset values will result in measurement values of 0; alarm output (DC output) will come ON. KT-V Digital Timers Terminal Wiring Diagrams KT-V4S-C KT-V4S Sensor power Start input DC24 V 60 mA IN 0V 3 5 2 Start input OUT 0V 3 5 DC output 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 AC100 7 8 9 10 11 12 COM N.C. N.O. COM N.C. N.O. Relay output 1 OUT R Reset input Relay output 240 V power R Reset input KT-V DC output IN + DC12 24 V power Alarm output is used in combination with DC output (OUT terminal). I/O Circuit Diagrams AC power Sensor 2 power DC24 V Internal 24 V DC power 9 N.C. DC24V 11 Internal 24 V 12 8 COM 8 COM 5V 5V 3.3k Start input 3 1.8k 10 N.O. 47k Start input 3 22k 10 N.O. 47k 22k 1 OUT 1 OUT 5V 5V 3.3k Reset input 7 9 N.C. ON during negative logic input ON during negative logic input 1.8k Reset input 7 47k 22k 47k 22k 5 0V 5 0V D-5 Digital Timers KT-V Input Wiring Examples (Start input/Reset input) Proximity switch with NPN open collector output Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output Input logic: Negative logic: (no-volt input) (neg) 2 Input logic: Negative logic (voltage input) (pos) 2 Sensor source (DC 24V) Sensor source (DC 24V) KT-V Brown Brown Start Start Black Black 3 Start input 7 Reset input 5 0V 3 Start input Reset Reset Black Black Blue 7 Reset input Blue Recommended proximity switch: APS DC 2-wire proximity switch - 5 0V -N E Recommended proximity switch: APS - -E2 Switch or relay Input logic: Negative logic (no-volt input) (neg) Input logic: Negative logic (no-volt input) (neg) Start input response: 15 ms Start Start 3 Start input 7 5 Input logic: Positive logic (voltage input) (pos) Start input response: 15 ms 2 Sensor source (DC 24V) 3 Start input Start 3 Start input Reset input 7 Reset input 7 Reset input 0V 5 0V 5 0V Reset Reset Recommended proximity switch: APS - Reset -Z With the DC type, please supply source voltage above 20 V. Input current is heavy, so this connection is recommended. There is no DC power source. Use a separate external power source. Output Wiring Examples NPN open collector output Relay output Relay drive possible OUT 10 0V Load power N.C. 9 Load N.O. 10 Load 5 Load for specified DC 24 V power source D-6 COM 8 Load KT-V Timekeeping values (red) Operating mode Displays timekeeping values. Setup mode Displays setting parameters. TIMER OUT Units Operating mode Displays units for timekeeping values. H: hours/m: minutes/ s: seconds h :m :s K/P 4 Key protection (red) Operating mode Blinks when key protection is ON (only when the key is ON). Setup Mode Displays key protection settings. 2 3 RST Set values (green) Operating mode Displays set values. Setup mode Displays set items. 1 Digit keys Operating mode Allows changes in set values. After changing set values, total key input is ineffective for about one second. Set values then take effect. Setup mode Allows selection of setting parameters. RST key Operating mode Allows timekeeping values to be reset (0 for Elapsed time and set values for Remaining time). Setup mode Allows selection of set items. Time range Time/Set values 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 Units 9999 9999 9999 99 59 99 59 h :m :s h :m :s h :m :s h :m :s h :m :s Key Operation 1. Changing set values Press a digit key once to increase the corresponding digit by one: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Example: When the current settings are 123 Press the 1 key and the display changes to 124 Press the 2 key and the display changes to 134 Press the 3 key and the display changes to 234 After removing your finder from the key, the settings will be verified after about one second. TIMER When the digit of the display is advanced to 60 (minutes) (seconds) (hours) (minutes) 2. Resetting the timekeeping values Press the RST key to reset the timekeeping values. The count is reset within 0.1 second after the key is pressed. When the Reset key is pressed in the display mode for remaining time, values become set values. In the display mode for elapsed time, they become 0. OUT h :m :s K/P 4 RST 2 3 1 3. Protecting the keys Turning the Dip switch ON disable the reset and digit keys. If disabled keys are pressed, the LED for the corresponding key will blink. If Key protection is selected to disable keys in Setup mode, Dip switch 6 will come ON. As the factory setup, Key protection in Setup mode is completely disabled, so just turning Dip switch 6 ON will disable all keys. D-7 KT-V Output (red) Operating mode Lit when output is ON. Blinks when alarm output is ON. Digital Timers Front Panel Layout and Description Digital Timers KT-V Configure Dip switches Use the dip switch on the top of the counter to configure varions parameters and operation mode. Configure dip switches with power off. Operation with power up will have no effect. When dip switches are re-configured, you must press the Reset key in operating mode to reset the count values. Dipswitch ON At factory setup, all switches are OFF. 2 3 4 5 6 7 KT-V 1 8 Selection of the operating mode Selection of key protection Selection of display format Selection of the time range Selection of the output mode Output mode The output mode is selected with Dip switches 1 and 2. Blink mode for items not present can be selected in Setup mode. Operation ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 SW2 Ondelay OFF OFF Offdelay OFF ON One-shot ON OFF Accumulation ON ON Factory setup Time range The time range is selected with Dip switches 3, 4, and 5. The time range for items not present can be selected in Setup mode. Time range ON . OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 . 8 . SW3 SW4 SW5 s OFF OFF OFF s OFF OFF ON s OFF ON OFF s OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF m ON OFF ON h ON ON OFF ON ON ON m h s m Factory setup h: hours m: minutes s: seconds Display format The display format is selected with Dip switch 6. Input mode SW6 Input for Addition or Subtraction OFF Dual input ON ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Factory setup Key protection With Dips witch 7, [Do not protect keys] can be selected to take effect for keys set in Setup mode using [Protect keys]. Setting for keys to protect can be performed in Setup mode. When this switch is ON, re-supplying power will cause protection to take effect. As the factory setup, [Do not protect keys] is set. Key protection SW7 Settings in Setup mode do not take effect OFF Do ON ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Factory setup Operating mode The operating mode is selected with Dip switch 8. Operating mode ON OFF D-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Run mode OFF Setup mode ON Factory setup KT-V Digital Timers Setup Mode Settings that cannot be selected with dip switches can be set in Setup mode. Output mode settings (t-op) (1) Start input response 1/5/15 ms Positive or negative logic (3) Output mode Flicker mode, dip switch (4) Time range 0.0 m/0.0 h, dip switch (5) Output duration Duration of output in Blink mode can be set from 10 9990 ms (in 10-ms increments) RST Time range settings (rang) RST Output duration settings (outt) (7) Resetting key protection Setting to disable the reset key can be performed. RST Alarm output settings (set Setup mode a 1. Switching Between Setup mode and Run mode ) RST Reset key protection (rpro) Setting Dip switch 8 to ON and turning on the power will start the Setup mode. Setting Dip switch 8 to OFF and turning on the power will start the Run mode. 2. Operations in Setup mode Digit key protection RST Input logic settings (si g) Selection is with the digit key. Digit key: Displays timekeeping values. 1 2 RST pos Selects positive logic. neg Selects negative logic.* Press the Reset key to proceed. * di p Dip switch selection Press the Reset key to proceed. Output duration is set with the digit key. Digit key 1 to set in increments of 10 ms will be rendered ineffective ( *100 ms). 0. 1 0 0 s 4 3 2 1 Can be changed from 10 9990 ms. Press the Reset key to proceed. Setting is with the digit key (*0 ) Timekeeping values for display Digit key 0.0.0.0 4 3 2 1 Press the Reset key to proceed. Selection of disable or enable to set the Reset key is with the digit key. Digit key: for K/P display Disabled * Enabled Press the Reset key to proceed. * * (*Disabled/enabled) (*Disabled/enabled) ( Disabled/enabled) ( Disabled/enabled) Press the Reset key to proceed to the final menu. Digit key Not used 1 1 Used 5 Selects 5-ms input response. 15 Selects 15-ms input response.* Press the Reset key to proceed. m Selects 0.0 m. h Selects 0.0 h. Digit key: for K/P display Digit key: Displays timekeeping values. 1 Selects 1-ms input response. 1 RST 000. 0 000. 0 1 2 3 4 Selection is with the digit key. 2 3 Digit key: Displays timekeeping values. Selection of disable or enable to set the Reset key is with the digit key. (ppro) In Setup mode, the count can be initialized using the menu as follows: Represents factory setups. (int) Selection is with the digit key. 1 2 RST Start input response settings * Dip switch selection Timekeeping values for display Digit key Setting to disable the arbitrary digit key can be performed. Run mode di p Press the Reset key to proceed. 1 2 3 Offset values can be set with respect to preset values. (8) Protecting digit keys Digit key: Displays timekeeping values. 1 f Selects Flicker mode. 2 (2) Input logic (6) Alarm output Selection is with the digit key. K/P display Disabled with lamp on Enabled with lamp off • In Flicker mode, items marked with an are skipped. • After changing the default settings in Setup mode, press the RST key in Run mode and reset timekeeping values. • Setting parameters are rendered effective by pressing the RST key and proceeding to the next step. • Key protection settings are rendered effective with Dip switch 7 as well as an AND condition. To begin protection, turn Dip switch 7 ON. Operational Example Changing preset values 1. Change the preset value from 2:00 to 1:30 Before changing Change complete TIMER TIMER OUT h :m :s K/P OUT h :m :s K/P 4 RST TIMER 2 3 RST OUT h :m :s K/P 4 1 TIMER 2 3 Press Digit key 3 nine times. RST h :m :s K/P 4 1 OUT 2 3 4 1 RST 2 3 1 Press Digit key 2 three times. D-9 KT-V Items that can be contiguned in Setup Mode Digital Timers KT-V Washing Time Control After pressing the start switch, washing will be performed for the set time. The setting screen for Time range is displayed. Set item Output mode Details Time range KT-V Display format Key protection These values are initial values. One-shot m Remaining time Reset key S key Disabled OUT K/P s Press the RST key to proceed. The setting screen for Alarm output is displayed. These values are initial values. OUT K/P 1. Setting Dip switches Press the RST key to proceed. Operate Dip switches with the power off. The setting screen for Reset key protection is displayed. Select Output mode and One-shot. ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Select the time range in 8 Dip switch 1 ON Dip switch 2 OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 m 7 8 s. Dip switch 3 ON Dip switches 4 and 5 OFF Dip switch 7 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press the 4 key and permit key protection. 3 key to OUT K/P Be sure to turn power ON after changing settings in Setup mode and press the RST key to reset count values. Turn Dip switch 8 ON and then turn power ON. 3. Changing setting contents The setting screen for Start input response is displayed. These values are initial values. OUT K/P Press the RST key to proceed. The setting screen for Input logic is displayed. These values are initial values. OUT K/P Press the RST key to proceed. The setting screen for Output mode is displayed. These values are initial values. OUT K/P Press the RST key to proceed. Turn the power OFF after completing setting in Setup mode and turn Dip switch 8 OFF (Run mode); then turn power ON. 5. Starting Run mode 2. Switching to Setup mode D-10 The setting screen for Digit key protection is displayed. 4. Switching to Run mode ON 1 K/P Press the RST key and the setting parameters will be written. Select Key protection. OFF OUT Press the RST key to proceed. ON OFF These values are initial values. KT-V (1) With the DC power source, the 0-V terminal and the input common 0-V terminal are internally short-circuited. (2) Apply the rated voltage in one instant, not by gradually raising the voltage. (3) Always use negative input logic to set the DC 2-wire proximity switch. (4) During counting, changes to preset values will take effect about one second after key input of the change. In subtraction mode, key input takes effect when the count is reset valid preset value will be saved in the memory at loss of power. (5) It is recommended to use a sheet included in the package to keep the setups for the future maintenance. (6) Use in the following environments should be avoided: A location where the ambient temperature is above 50 or below 10 . A location where the ambient humidity is above 85% or abrupt temperature changes may cause condensation. A location with dust, iron fillings, corrosive gasses, or the like. A location exposed to direct sunlight. A location with significant vibrations or impact. (7) When conducting testing of insulation withstand voltage, insulation resistance, or the like, detach the control circuit from the main body. (8) When power is interrupted, writing to the internal EEPROM will take place. The number of times EEPORM writing can be performed is less than 10000, so avoid use with frequent power source operation. Precautions for Wiring Keep the wires away from power line. With regard to use in locations where extensive noise is generated, keep the KCV counter and wires away from the noise source to the extent possible. Empty terminals are not to be used as relay terminals. For connection, use of crimped contacts is recommended. When wiring the 1 and 7 terminals, do not install fork-shaped crimped contacts at an angle. Use a round crimped contact for angled installation. Fork-shaped crimped contacts For angled installation, connection with the contact is insufficient. Like in the illustration above, install the contact perpendicular to the horizontal. Round crimped contact Installation and Removal of the Main Body Installation Insert the main body through the panel installation port. From the rear, mount the installation frame. Installation of the Terminal Block and Terminal Cover Main body Terminal block Fixing screw Terminal block cover Installation frame: Can be installed vertically or horizontally. Removal Do not use a screw other than the one used to fix the terminal block during shipping. Maintain a permitted torque of 0.3 Nm. Install the terminal block after wiring is complete. Holding the tabs, spread them 2 3 mm. While keeping the tabs spread, pull the device towards you. D-11 KT-V Precautions for Use Digital Timers Precautions Error Codes Common Errors Error Error type e21 Memory data error Error details Corrective Action Press the Reset key to eliminate the error display. Measurement values and timekeeping values will be set to 0, preset and set values will be 5000, and Setup mode contents will be set to the factory setups. Preset/set values and Setup mode items have changed. Options Option Model Number Details Rubber packing KC-48P Prevents water from entering the control panel with installation between the installation panel and TC-V or KT-V. Front cover KC-48C Protects the front panel from dirt and the like. Material: Soft silicone rubber Key operation can be performed with the front cover as-is. (in mm) External Dimensions 63 100 (AC power source) 48 60 (DC power source) 48 44.5 Installation frame Depth Panel thickness 1 5 6 Detailed Diagram of the Terminal Block Terminal screw M3 4 7.62 7.62 6.5 1.12 50 10 DC power source 66 mm AC power source 106 mm Boring Dimensions for Installation 30.48 1. When the installation handle is horizontal Installation frame 2. When the installation handle is vertical 48+0.2 0 70 or more 55 or more Complying wiring: 0.25-1.65 mm2 Complying crimped contact: R1.25-3 Permitted torque: 0.5 Nm D-12 45+0.3 0 70 or more Square hole 45+0.3 0 9.5 (Close installation possible) 6.5 KT-V Digital Timers KT-V PROGRAMMABLE CAM SWITCHES List of KOYO Programmable Cam Swithes FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C FC-80-C/FC-160/FC-320 FC-21 E-2 E-3 E-12 E-24 E-1 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches Programmable Cam Swithes List of KOYO Programmable Cam Swithes Model number Appearance Absolute FC-81F-C 95W FC-80-C/160 /320 Encoder 80H Resolution Number of (number of digits) output points 360/720 8 Response time Source voltage Sensor power 300rpm/360 resolution 150rpm/720 resolution DC12/24V E-3 60.5D 1600rpm/360 resolution 800rpm/720 resolution FC-1601F-C Absolute 360/720 16 AC12/24V E-3 FC-21 (No dynamic CAM setting available) 140W 90H Reference page 60.5D 1600rpm/360 resolution 800rpm/720 resolution FC-321F-C Absolute 360/720 32 DC12/24V E-3 E-12 (No dynamic CAM setting available) 140W 90H 60.5D FC-80-C 105W 100H 100H 360/720 8 300rpm/360 resolution DC12/24V 150rpm/720 resolution Absolute 360/720 16 1600rpm/360 resolution 800rpm/720 resolution 66D FC-160 140W Absolute AC85 264V Encoder power source 12V 70mA E-12 66D 1600rpm/360 resolution 800rpm/720 resolution FC-320 195W 100H E-2 162H 360/720 Absolute 360/515/ 720/1024 32 (No dynamic CAM setting available) AC85 264V Encoder power source 12V 70mA AC100/ 200V Encoder power source 12V 70mA E-12 66D FC-21 210W Absolute 80D 24 3600rpm/360 resolution E-24 Programmable Cam Switches FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C FC-21 FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C An embedded installation type, so confirmation can be done in a normal operating state with the control panel screen. Various functions are provided such as timing, irregularity detection, and a multi-purpose communication port. Merits Easy operation Simple key operations with the operating panel installed. Pulse output setting function This determines the number of pulse per revolution. (divided output). Setting changes are possible in Run mode Fine adjustment of the ON/OFF position of output can be performed via adjustment mode without stopping the device. Independent setup The FC-161F-C can register 8 types of programs and the FC321F-C can register 10. Any programs can be selected via switching bank input during setup. Applicable in a broad variety of industries This series is best suited for timing control of individual types of injectors, packaging machines, applicators, bottling, etc., in the food product, packaging, and printing fields. Also provided as an wall-mounting type Wall-mounting types of the FC-80-C/FC-320 cam switches are also provided. Multi-purpose communication port With use of the PLC and a PC, allows reading of operating commands from the PLC, changes in setting values, angles for the PLC, output state, and the like. Quick change to a tachometer after completion of adjustment Switching of the display for the angle/number of revolutions can be easily performed with the sheet key switches on the front panel. Home position adjustment Any angle can be the home position (0) via 2 methods, applying external home position input or key operation. This eliminates the troublesome adjustment of the home position. Automatic timing function (FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C) When controlling timing with a cam switch for a machine so as to change the speed of revolution, the lag in work timing due to a delay in actuator operation becomes a problem. This function, an automatic timing function, corrects the lag in timing. This is done with quick output of only the angle portion calculated from the speed of revolution at the point when the angle corresponds to the lag time for actuator operation. Advanced portion Advanced portion Setting angle Low-speed Mid-speed High-speed Angle setting is easy with the teaching function Cam output of On and Off angle settings is performed while the machine is operating. Users that found program settings for key operation to be a hassle will be able to enjoy setting with the teaching function. Uses Speed changes during start-stop A device with a speed that changes A device where speed adjustment is needed E-3 Programmable Cam Switches FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C General Specifications Source voltage FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C FC-21 DC12 Storage temperature 8W 10 +50 20 +70 35 FC-321F-C 26.4V 5W Ambient temperature Ambient/Storage humidity FC-161F-C 24V Permitted power fluctuation DC10.8 Power consumption FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C Item (with no freezing) 85%RH(with no dewing) Ambient environment No corrosive gas or the like Vibration resistance Durability: displacement amplitude 0.5 mm 10-55 Hz 3 directions Impact resistance Impact resistance Durability: 500 m/s 3 directions Noise resistance 1.5 kV between power terminals 1.0 kV between power terminals Pulse width 1 s/rise 1 s/ square wave pulse Protective structure IP54: Rear panel sheet only Dimensions (W/H/D) 95 Weight 300g 80 60.5(mm) 140 90 60.5(mm) 40 420g 90 60.5(mm) 420g Mechanical and Performance Specifications Item FC-81F-C FC-161F-C Start:1 Protect: 1 Number of input points Home position: 1 Encoder input H 7.5V(OFF) FC-321F-C Start:1 Bank entry: 3 Protect: 1 Home position: 1 L 0 2V(ON) H 7.5 30V(OFF) L 0 Start:1 Bank entry: 4 Protect: 1 Home position: 1 2V(ON) Resolution: 360 or 720 per revolution (output code: gray binary) Control input H Output points 8 7.5 30V(OFF) L 0 2V(ON) 16 32 Output specifications NPN open collector Withstand voltage: Less than 35 V/current less than 0.1 A Total number of output areas 16 64 128 Number of revolutions for response r/min(rpm) 300 at resolution of 360 150 at resolution of 720 1600 at resolution of 360 800 at resolution of 720 1600 at resolution of 360 800 at resolution of 720 Max. 550 Max. 250 Max. 250 Output response time s s Max. 2 s 8 (Banks 0 Source start time 7) 10 (Banks 0 Number of banks Memory EEPROM Resolution 360 or 720 per revolution (selected with a dip switch) CW/CCW directional switching Switching with a dip switch RUN output Normally on in Run/Adjustment mode (switched with a dip switch) Display Angle or rotation speed(selected with a dip switch) Home position adjustment Home position as arbitrary position Protect, copy, pulse output, and communication Special functions Protect RS-232C FC designated protocol Timing function None Present Accessories Metal fittings for installation Communication E-4 s Present 9) Panel Layout and Description Front panel Display status Angle/Speed of revolution Setup status Operating keys Output status Start input FC-21 External home position Normal Mode Dip switch [Rear Panel] Encoder connector Terminal (cover attached) Wiring DC+ DC HOME I.C 1 ST PRO 0 3 5 4 2 7 6 O.C Fuse Output common Power source for cam switch External home position input Load power (less than 35V) Load power source Start input DC12/24V FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C (indicates what is displayed) Programmable Cam Switches FC-81F-C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Output Protection input (connected for protection) 1. The external starting point input is connected for DC output with no chattering. 2. Output common (0.C), input common (1.C), and power source-(DC-) terminals are short-circuited internally. E-5 Programmable Cam Switches FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C Panel Layout and Description Front panel Display status (Indicates what is displayed) Setup status Bank/FUN Operating keys FC-21 FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Angle/speed of revolution Start input External home position FC-161F-C FC-321F-C has 32-point output display. Normal Mode [Rear Panel] Encoder connector Output connector Terminal block (with cover attached) E-6 Transmission connector Dip switch Programmable Cam Switches FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C Wiring DC+ DC ST B1 B0 B2 B3 HOME PRO I.C Input common Power source for cam switch Protection input Start input 0 1 2 3 Bank input FC-80-C/160 /320 power source FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C (connected for protection) DC12/24V External home position 1. Bank input 3 is for FC-321F-C only. 2. The external starting point input is connected for DC output with no chattering. 3. Output common (0.C), input common (1.C), and power source-(DC-) terminals are short-circuited internally. FC-21 Connector Pin-out FC-161F-C Working range 4 5 6 7 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 O.C 8 20 21 22 23 28 29 30 31 FC-321F-C Working range 9 10 11 O.C 16 17 18 19 O.C 24 25 26 27 O.C Fuse Load power (less than 35 V) Load 0 7 8 Output 15 Output 16 23 24 Output 31 Output Switching cam switch output/RUN output is possible only for 31. Only pin-31 can be selected for either CAM output or RUN output. Connector for Connection (optional) Acceptable for use in rose-wire types and terminal unit types to effectively reduce wiring. Terminal unit Cam switch U- JT TF-32D FC-161F-C FC-321F-C Cable connecting the cam switch and terminal unit TF-32D U-30JH (3-m cable) LC-013 (1-m cable) LC-010 (40 P connector) Fujitsu Ltd. Connector FCN-361J040-AU Cover FCN-360C040-J1 E-7 Programmable Cam Switches FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C Initial Settings Initial settings Switch 1: FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Power OFF Switch 2: Setting dip switches FC-80-C/160 /320 CCW 720 RUN ON OFF CW 360 cam Setting for shipment from factory FC-21 Power ON Clear all output settings Clear all output settings in setup or teaching mode. Setting NG ON OFF ENT Clear home position adjustment in FC-161F-C: Banks 0-7 teaching mode. FC-321F-C: Banks 0-9 CLR Initial settings complete Select encoder resolution. 360: When using resolution of 360/revolution for the encoder 720: When using resolution of 720/revolution for the encoder Switch 3: Select when using RUN output. Cam: When using all output as cam output RUN: When using specified output as RUN output* Possible output for RUN output FC-81F-C: Output 7 FC-161F-C: Output 15 FC-321F-C: Output 31 RUN output is ON during normal operation when in Run/Adjustment mode; when an error occurs, it goes OFF. CLR Clear home position adjustment Select the direction of rotation. CW: Angle increase when encoder shaft is rotated in CW direction. CCW: Angle increase when encoder shaft is rotated in CCW direction. HOME ENT Note) Each bank must be cleared. Setups for output and setups, changes and clearance for teaching mode can be done. Verify that output area settings/home position adjustment values are correct. OK Adjustment NG Adjustment mode Performs fine adjustment of output area settings in trial operation (When not needed, Run in Run mode). Verity that output is appropriate. OK Run E-8 Run mode Runs the device. Determine CW or CCW by facing the encoder shaft. List of Operations Operating mode SELECT key alternates the angle and rotational speed in the display. 3 Selecting bank number BANK 4 Selecting output number Select the output number with the push of the OUT key or the OUT key. The lamp position for output display changes with each push of the key. 5 Read-out of output area settings After specifying the bank number 6 Clear 1 output area settings Clear an output area setting that has been read-out with operation of the CLR 7 Clear all output area settings After selecting the bank number Clear all output area settings within the specified bank After selecting the bank number 10 Clear all output area settings Writing output area settings Wrting output area 11 Settings (teaching) The bank number. or READ and output number, the READ key Clear home position adjustment operation of the CLR and output number, clear output area settings with )) ENT keys. (or OUT ( OUT , clear settings with operation of the CLR BANK ENT keys. However, home position adjustment settings are not cleared. Clears settings with operation of the ON CLR OFF Change output area settings adjustment settings are not cleared. Select the bank number* and output number. After displaying the angle to set with the or keys, written with the Select the bank number ON OFF key (ON angle and OFF angle are set in sequence). and output number. After turning the encoder, the position to set is halted and written with the ON OFF key (ON angle and OFF angle are set in sequence). and stop rotating the encoder at the machinery starting point. The home position angle is selected with the Set the bank number CLR HOME HOME key. ON OFF key. . Home position adjustment is erased with operation of the ENT keys and the encoder output angle is displayed as-is. key or key and values to change will be displayed. Then, press the Fine adjustment of the output area settings 15 during operation (only effective when Start input is ON) Note ENT keys. However, home position Read-out values for the ON angle or OFF angle to set. Push the 14 ENT keys when output area to be erased has been read-out. The home position becomes the written zero angle with the 13 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Note key is pushed. Alternates ON and OFF angle. Set the bank number Setting of home 12 position adjustment FC-80-C/160 /320 key enters into the selected mode. FC-21 ENT Selecting display 9 Run MODE key selects the Mode. Selection is in sequence from the current mode Setting Teaching Adjustment Run 2 8 Adjustment Selecting operating mode. Setting 1 Operating procedures Teaching Function ON OFF key to write values that changed. Read-out values for the ON angle or OFF angle to set. The angle is increased via the key and decreased via the key. Changes are complete (fine adjustment) and output operations change at the same time. Note) Corresponds only to FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C. An means that the FC-81F-C does not have BANK , OUT , or For setting operation of special functions, refer to the Operations Manual. READ Programmable Cam Switches FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C keys. E-9 Programmable Cam Switches FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C Error Codes Error code FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C FC-21 Explanation Dip switch settings are incorrect. Verify rotary endocer resolution. Rotary enocder malfunction. Rotary encoder code not continous. Rotary enocder malfunction (not connected). Cut or short of the connection cable for the rotary encoder. Affected by external noise. Memory change error Contents of setting values (output, home position adjustment, or timing) have changed Affected by excessive noise. All clear and then re-input all settings. Rotational speed error Cam switch cannot repsond to the rotary endoeer rotational speed. Verfity rotational speed for the rotary encoder. Verfity rotary encoder resolution. Output area settings overlap. Erase overlapping setting values or reset after changing. Ouput area settings are protected. Verify protection input. Bank input for a bank thta is not present is specified. Verify bank input. E20 Rotary encoder code error E21 E30 Setting LED blinking Cause/Corrective Action Rotary encoder resolution and cam switch resolution specifiecations do not match. Rotary encoder connection error E18 E19 FC-80-C/160 /320 Details Output of a rotary encoder that is not present is detected. Setting value error Bank Display Bank error A F Timing function for the FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C This function adnavces via setting of the output ON/OFF angle in proportion with the encoder's rotational speed. Effective for correction of machinery system delays. 1 Settings/Operation Enter setting mode. Push the FUN key and specify 0. Set the output number with OUT or OUT keys. Set the timing rotational speed with or keys. Write with the Set the timing rotational angle with or keys. Write with the ON ON OFF OFF key. key. Push the BANK key and return to setting mode. 2 Timing operation r Timing angle Timing rotational speed r (rotational speed that the endoder is actiually turning at) Cam output Timing operation angle (Timing at which output is advancing) B r A 0 r B OFF ON A OFF ON r Notes: OFF angle should set to at 2 degrees or more. With a short delay, any change in revolution speed is reflected to the angle for the selected output. Revolution speed is reset to zero if angle is not incremented for 170 ms. As shown in the following table, response speed and time depend on how many dynamic angle are set. Up to eight angles can be set for the outputs 0 to 7. r Rotational speed Timing setting points 1 Output response time (ouptuptu 0-) s 305 Responserotational 360 resolution 1 0 0 0 speed (revoltons/min.) 720 resoltion 500 E-10 2 315 900 450 3 330 800 400 4 350 700 350 5 370 600 300 6 385 500 250 7 415 500 250 8 420 400 200 (in mm) External Dimensions 95 51 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C 9.5 Programmable Cam Switches FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C FC-21 80 FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 140 9.5 51 90 FC-161F-C FC-321F-C Boring Dimensions for Installation FC-81F-C FC-161F-C / FC-321F-C 90 135 0.5 0.5 0.5 85 75 0.5 Panel thickness 0.5-4 mm R0 2.5 R0 2.5 E-11 With their convenience and efficiency, the camoperated switches improve your productivity. The small body allows easy installation and movement. FC-21 FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches FC-80-C/FC-160/FC-320 Merits Easy operation With simple key operation, you can set or check values on the digital display. RUN time change You can reposition the switches during runtime. Easy setup All you need for setup is simply choose programmed procedures. Ten program banks are included in the FC-320, and eight banks in the FC-160 models. Revolution status at a glance The circular window displays both the direction and the position of the revolving axis. Home position calibration Dynamic CAM The FC-320 models provides eight dynamic CAMS witch automatically tune the ON/OFF timing of the CAM switch. Switching timing is automatically controlled according to the actuator response and the cam rotation. Multi-purpose communication port Except FC-80-C, all models integrate a port for connection to a PC. Programs and data can be transferred to and from your desktop. On the FC-160 and 320 models, programs can be copied between two corresponding banks. The absolute encoders for sensor Three models of rotary encoders are available: TRD-NA, TRDKL and TRD-K. The TRD-NA encoder is 35 mm thick, with external diameter of 50 mm. Also available are TRD-K reinforced series and TRD-KL adaptive series. Precise positioning The absolute encoders provides higher precision and linearity than resolvers. They are fully compatible to one another to allow easy replacement. Quick response The switches respond to cam revolving as fast as 1,600 rpm, or 800 rpm at 720 resolution. Protection against errors You can prevent potential errors by short circuiting the protect terminal. E-12 The position and angle of the encoder is automatically adjusted. Applicable to DIN rails The switch can be installed on DIN standard rails, or fixed with screws. Battery-less The counter uses an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells. Item FC-80-C Source voltage DC10.8 Power consumption 5W FC-160 26.4V FC-320 264V AC85 20VA Ambient temperature 10 +50 Storage temperature 20 +70 (with no freezing) Ambient/Storage humidity 35 Withstand voltage Insulation resistance N/A because no insulation is provided AC 2kV for one minute for each of AC input, I/O and frame interconnections between DC power and I/O terminals. 20M for one minute for each of AC input, I/O and frame interconnections Vibration resistance Durable for along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitued No error along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude 85%RH(with no dewing) Shock resistance Durable along three axes at 490 m/s2(50 G) No error along three axes at 98 m/s2 (10 G) Noise resistance* 1.0kV between power terminals 1.5kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1 s width and 1 ns rise time) 105 Weight 300g Accessary None 100 66 140 mm 100 66 195 mm 450g 100 66 mm 550g FC-21 Dimensions Mechanical and Performance Specifications Item FC-80-C FC-160 Number of input points Start: 1 Protect: 1 Start: 1 Resolution 360 or 720 per revolution(selected by dip switch) Encoder voltage H: 7.5V(OFF) Control voltage H: 7.5 Output type 8 L: 0 30V(OFF) L: 0 16 NPN open collector Total 16 CAMS for 8 outputs (If could be 16 CAMS for 1 output) Start: 1 Bank entry: 4 Protect: 1 32 (8 points for Dynamic CAM) Current: Max. 0.1A Residual voltage: Max. 1.5V Withstand voltage: Max. 35V Number of revolutions 300 at 360 resolution for responser/min(rpm) 150 at 720 resolution Total 32 CAMS for 16 outputs (32 times per Bank) Total 64 CAMS for 32 outputs (64 times per Bank) 1600 at 360 resolution 800 at 720 resolution 1600 at 360 resolution (without Dyna800 at 720 resolution mic CAM) Max. 250 Max. 250 Output reseponse Max. 550 Response to power input Max. 2s Number of banks 1 Display Angle or rotation speed (selected by dip switch) Direction CW/CCW (selected by dip switch) s s 8 (banks 0 to 7) s (without Dynamic CAM) 10 (banks 0 to 9) Normally ON(selected by dip switch): TEST mode RUN output Home position calibration Any position can be selected as home. Memory EEPROM Output pulse frequency Protect: 1 2V(ON) Withstand voltage Dynamic CAM FC-320 2V(ON)(open collector withstand voltage: Min. 14V) Total number of output areas Program storage Bank entry: 3 FC-80-C/160 /320 General Specifications FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches FC-80-C/160/320 SRAM memory card Outputs 0 to 7 only Any value allowable for currently selected resolution(one value for each output) Use dip swich to select CAM or RUN as current output. Memory card for FC-320, M-01F has discontinued its production. E-13 Front Panel Description and External Dimensions Output indicators: (Unit: mm) Indicate the currently selected output. Press the OUTPUT key to select the output number. Angle or revolution speed (RPM) display Mode indicators: Angle, RPM, ON/OFF, Setup, Start, and Teaching Revolution direction and angle: Angle is displayed in units of 30 degrees. 66 105 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches FC-80-C 2.3 FC-80-C/160 /320 8 100 Out form center DIN rail center FC-21 Keys Dip switches Terminal block Mode switch: PRG, TEST or RUN Switch 1:Selects revolution direction. Switch 2: Select encoder resolution. Switch 3:Select angle or revolution speed. Rotary encoder connector Home position calibrator Bore dimensions for installation (105) Two M4 screws 94 I.C 0 2 1 4 3 6 5 7 O.C Common Output Load power source (Max. DC35V) Load Start input Cam switch power Source DC10.8 26.4V ST 89 DC+ DC– PRO (100) Wiring Diagram 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Output Protect input (activated when short circuited) List of Error Codes Error code Description/Possible cause(s) Cause/Corrective Acfion E18 Rotary encoder connector error Resolution is different between the rotary encoder and the cam switch. Change the resolution of the rotary encoder or the cam switch. Check Dip switch 2 to confirm the encoder resolution. Repair the rotary encoder. E19 Rotary encoder error or code discontinuity The rotary encoder has counted a false signal. The cam switch does not respond to the rotary encoder. The rotary encoder has generated non-sequential codes. Eliminate the sources of noise. Check Dip switch 2 to confirm the encoder resolution. Repair or re-connect the rotary encoder. Repair or re-connect the rotary encoder cables. E21 Memory error Home position or other setting has been changes. Eliminate the sources of noise. Clear all settings then re-enter the correct values. Value of LED The value is out of allowable range Same output has been selected more than once. blinking E-14 Re-enter the correct value. Cancel the selection then re-select the output number. Initializing Programmable Cam Switches FC-80-C Start Dip switches Switch 1: Revolution direction(viewed from the rotary encoder) Set the switch to ON to select CCW, or OFF to select CW. Turn the power off. Switch 2: Encoder resolution. Set the switch to ON to select 720, or OFF to select 360. Set the dip switches. Dip swich The settings are written to the memory. Turn the power on. FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Switch 3: Angle or revolution speed(RPM) Set the switch to ON to select RPM, or OFF to select angle. ON CLEAR 1 2 FC-80-C/160 /320 OFF Press the following keys to clear all settings. Select PRG mode or Teach mode. 3 ON OFF Press the following keys to cancel the currently selected home position.. Select Teach mode HOME Position ON FC-21 CLEAR End Operating procedures Available modes RUN TEST Teach PROG Step Procedure PRG TEST RUN 1 Selecting mode Using the Mode switch, select PRG, TEST or RUN. 2 Selecting PRG or Teach Press the MODE key to switch the mode between PRG and Teach. 3 Selecting output Press the OUTPUT key to select the output number. Pressing the key once moves to the next output. 4 Reading angle Select the output number then press the READ key. ON angle and OFF angle are read out alternately. 5 Clearing individual settings Select the output number for the settings to be cleard, and press the CLEAR key then the ON key. 6 Clearing all output selections Press the following keys in the order listed: CLEAR OFF ON 7 Clearing all settings (except the home position) Press the following keys in the order listed: CLEAR OFF ON Select the output number for settings to be written. Using the OFF angle. Press the 8 Writing settings ON Teaching the current settings 10 Setting the home position 11 Clearing the home position keys, select the ON angle and the key to write the ON angle, then press the OFF key to write the OFF angle. Writing all possible ON angles Select the "0" (or "0.0") degree, and press the 9 ON key then the OFF key. Select the output number for settings to be written. Start the rotary encoder then stop it at the desired position. Press the ON key to write the ON angle, then press the OFF key to write the OFF angle. Stop the rorary encoder at the desired home position, then press the Press the CLEAR key then the ON key. key to clear the home position. Current angle displayed. Select the ON angle or OFF angle to be changed. Using the 12 Changing settings This does not delete the home positioning set up. selected. Press the ON keys, change the angle key to write the new ON angle, or press the OFF key to write the new OFF angle. The ON/OFF indicator turns on then turns off. Select the ON angle or OFF angle to be adjusted. Using the Adjusting settings 13 during operation keys, adjust the angle selected. The new value becomes effective upon adjustment, and is reflected to the current operation. The ON/OFF indicator flashes during adjustment. E-15 Front Panel Description and External Dimensions Bank indicators: (in mm) Indicates the currently selected bank. Press the BANK key to select the bank number. Angle or revolution speed (RPM) display Status indicators: Angle, RPM, ON/OFF, Setup, Start, and Normal Revolution direction and angle: FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C 140 66 Angle is displayed in units of 30 degrees. 2.3 Communication port connector (RS232C) 100 FC-80-C/160 /320 8 Out form center DIN rail center FC-21 Keys Terminal block Dip switches: Mode indicators: Mode selector: Switch 1: Selects revolution direction. Switch 2: Select encoder resolution. Switch 3: Select angle or revolution speed. Switch 4: Select RUN or CAM. PRG and Teach PRG, TEST or RUN Bore dimensions for installation Rotary encoder connector Output indicators: (140) Four M4 screws 129 Indicate the output number and its ON/OFF status selected 89 by depressing OUTPUT key. Wiring Diagram G B0 ST B2 I.C B1 PRO 1 0 3 2 5 4 7 6 8 O.C 10 9 12 11 14 O.C 13 15 Load power source (Max. DC35V) Load 0 1 2 BANK 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Outputs 8 9 1011 1213 1415 (RUN) Outputs PROTECT (activated when short circuited) E-16 RUN Common output Common input Cam switch power source AC85 264V AC START AC (100) Programmable Cam Switches FC-160 Front Panel Description and External Dimensions (in mm) Bank indicators: Indicates the bank number selected by bank input/The bank number selected by BANK key/Record, Replay or verify selected by + key. Angle or revolution speed(RPM) display: Indication of angle or revolution speed/dynamic CAM angle or revolution speed/Record, Replay or Verify Status indicators: Angle, RPM, ON/OFF, Setup, Start, and Normal 195 Angle is displayed in units of 30 degrees. This window also displays the SAVE, COPY or COMPARE status. 66 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Revolution direction and angle: 100 2.3 FC-80-C/160 /320 8 Communication port connector (RS232C) Programmable Cam Switches FC-320 Center DIN rail center FC-21 Keys Terminal block Dip switches: Mode indicators: Switch 1: Selects revolution direction. Switch 2: Select encoder resolution. Switch 3: Selects angle or revolution speed. Switch 4: Select RUN or CAM. PRG/Teach/Dynamic CAM/Save Bore dimensions for installation Rotary encoder Mode selector: connector Output indicators: PRG, TEST or RUN (195) 184 89 Four M4 screws (100) Indicate the currently selected output. Press the OUTPUT key to select the output number. Wiring Diagram G B0 ST B2 PRO B1 B3 0 I.C 2 1 4 3 6 5 O.C 7 9 8 11 10 13 12 15 14 16 O.C 18 17 20 19 22 21 O.C 23 24 25 27 26 29 28 31 30 RUN O.C 0 1 2 3 BANK Common output Common output Common output Common output Common input Cam switch power source AC85 264V AC START AC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Output Output Outputs Load power source (Max. DC35V) Load 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 (RUN) Outputs PROTECT (activated when short circuited) E-17 Programmable Cam Switches FC-160/FC-320 Initializing Switch 1: Revolution direction(viewed from the rotary encoder) Start Set the switch to ON to select CCW, or OFF to select CW. Switch 2: Encoder resolution. Turn the power off. Set the switch to ON to select 720, or OFF to select 360. Switch 3: Angle or revolution speed(RPM) Set the switch to ON to select RPM, or OFF to select angle. FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Set the dip switches. Switch 4: RUN or CAM Set the switch to ON to select RUN, or OFF to select CAM. Dip switch The settings are written to the memory. Turn the power on. FC-80-C/160 /320 ON OFF Press the following keys to clear all settings. Select PRG mode or Teach mode. CLEAR OFF 1 2 3 4 ON Press the following keys to cancel the home position for the currently selected bank. (FC-160: Banks 0 to 7 FC-320: Banks 0 to 9) Select Teach mode. FC-21 CLEAR Home position ON End Operating procedures Available modes Procedure Model 1 Selecting mode MODE TEST RUN Using the Mode switch, select MODE, TEST or RUN (FC-320 ONLY) (FC-320 ONLY) FC-160 FC-320 FC-160 2 Selecting PRG or Teach Press the MODE key to switch the mode in the following sequence: 3 Selecting bank Press the BANK key to select the bank number. 4 Reading angle Press the OUTPUT key to select the output number. Pressing the key once moves to the next output. FC-160 Select the output number then press the READ key. ON angle and frequency are read out alternately. FC-160 5 Clearing individual settings PRG TEACH D.CAM ON FC-160 Press the following keys in the order listed: 7 Clearing individual bank setting Select the bank number and output number, then preess the following keys in the order listed: 8 Clearing all settings for selected bank Preess the following keys in the order listed: CLEAR OUTPUT 9 Clearing all settings (except the home position) Preess the following keys in the order listed: CLEAR OUTPUT CLEAR ON FC-320 CLEAR OUTPUT Select the bank number and the output number. Using the ON angle and the OFF angle. Press the ON ON ON ON FC-160 FC-320 FC-160 FC-320 FC-160 FC-320 keys, select the key to write the ON angle, FC-160 then press the OFF key to write the OFF angle. Writing ON angle and pulse frequency Select the bank number and the output number. Using the ON angle. Press the Using the ON keys, select the key to write the angle. keys, select the pulse frequency. Press the write the frequency. E-18 FC-320 FC-320 key. Clearing all output selections 10 Writing settings FC-320 FC-160 FC-320 Select the output number for the settings to be cleared, and press the CLEAR key then the 6 SAVE FC-320 ON key to RUN TEST SAVE ANGLE TEACH PRG Step Available modes Procedure Model 13 Clearing the home position ON press the OFF key to write the OFF angle. FC-320 Stop the rotary encoder at the desired home position, then press the FC-160 HOME key. FC-320 Select the bank number then preess the following keys in the order listed: HOME CLEAR ON Current angle is displayed. the angle selected. Press the ON key, chang key to write the new ON angle, or press Adjusting settings during operation 16 Reading dynamic CAM FC-320 Select ON angle OFF angle to be adjusted. Using keys, adjust the angle selected. The new value becomes effective upon adjustment, and is reflected the current operation. Select the bank number and the output number then press the READ key. Dynamic CAM angle and revolution speed are read out altemately. 17 Writing dynamic CAM angle FC-160 the OFF key to write the new OFF angle. The ON/OFF indicator turns on then turns off. 15 FC-160 FC-320 Select the ON angle or OFF angle to be changed. Using the 14 Changing settings FC-160 key to write the ON angle, then FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C the desired position. Press the FC-80-C/160 /320 12 Setting the home position Select the bank number and input number. Start the rotary encoder then stop it at Select the bank number and the output number. Using the control angle and revolution speed. Press the ON FC-21 Teaching the current 11 settings RUN TEST SAVE ANGLE TEACH PRG Step FC-160 FC-320 FC-320 keys, select the FC-320 key to write the settings. Select the bank number and the output number, and prees the CLEAR key then the 18 Clearing dynamic CAM angle ON key. Both the dynamic CAM angle and the revolution speed are set to zero. FC-320 Dynamic CAM angle is cleared also by the CLEAR procedures 6,8 and 9. 19 20 21 Transferring data between memories Select the COPY mode. Using the communication port, connect two FC-160(or FC-320) units. Press the CLEAR key then the MODE key." c0py" is diplayed on the circular window. Press the ON Using the 22 key again to proceed. Bank indicator f l fc-e e-fc -fc- Press the FC-160 key, select one of the following operations. Operation Select SAVE, LOAD or COPY. ON Circular window SAVE: Saving data from the current unit. LOAD: Restoring data to the current unit. COPY: Copying data between two banks of the current unit. key again to proceed. Press the BANK key to display all banks. Using the Select source and destination banks. Programmable Cam Switches FC-160/FC-320 ON key, select the source and the destination. "1" or "2" flashes on the circular window to indicate source or destination as follows: SAVE LOAD COPY Angle/revolution speed display Press the ON Source Destination Source Destination Source Destination FC-320 key again to execute the selected operation. E-19 Programmable Cam Switches FC-160/FC-320 List of Error Codes Error code E18 FC-21 FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C E19 E20 Description Description/Possible cause(s) Rotary encoder connector error Resolution is different between the rotary encoder and the cam switch Rotary encode error Code discontinuity The rotary encoder has counted a false signal. The rotary encoder has generated nonsequential codes. Home position or other setting has been changed. E21 Memory error E30 Revolution speed error E70 E90 99 E80 89 Cause/Corrective Action Note Change the resolution of the rotary encoder or the cam switch. Verify the dip switch 2 to confirm the encoder resolution. Repair the rotary encoder. Repair or re-connect the rotary encoder. Repair or re-connect the rotary encoder cables. Eliminate source of noise Eliminate sources of noise. Clear all settings then re-enter the correct values. The cam switch does not respond to the rotary encoder. Verify the mode and data for errors. Verify that the PROTECT terminal is connected. Check the communication cable, and repair if necessary. Eliminate sources of noise. Communication failed. Communication error COPY operation failed. Value of Value error LED flashing The flashing values is out of allowable range Re-enter the correct value. One of the bank codes A to flashing Same bank has been selected more than once. Selected bank does not exist. Cancel the selection then re-select the bank number. Bank error Dynamic CAM Angle and Speed (specific to FC-320) (1) Setting the dynamic CAM angle Follow the procedure "17. Writing dynamic CAM angle" described earlier. Dynamic CAM angle determines the ON and OFF angles in relation to current revolution speed. Dynamic CAM speed is used for setting the dynamic CAM angle, and specified in 10 rpm. (2) Relation of Dynamic Angle and Speed r Dynamic speed Dynamic angle Notes: r (where r is the current revolution speed.) OFF angle should be set to at least 2 degrees. With a short delay, CAM signal B Angle incremented r any change in revolution speed is reflected to the angle for the B point OFF ON selected output. Revolution speed is reset to zero if angle is not incremented for 170 ms. As shown in the following table, response speed and time A point A O Revolution speed OFF ON r r depend on how many dynamic angles are set. Up to eight angles can be set for the outputs 0 to 7. r Number of settings 1 Response time ( s) 345 Response speed At 360 resolution 1 1 0 0 (rpm) At 720 resolution 5 5 0 2 365 1000 500 3 380 900 450 4 400 800 400 5 420 700 350 6 435 600 300 7 465 500 250 8 470 500 250 Recommended application Blank paper Roller Master Printed paper 1. An FC cam switch is used to control the OFF angle of the rotary press. When mounting the master, use the clamp as the reference position. 2. A rotary encoder is used to control color densities and to position the the drive shaft of the rotary press. It can be positioned to the precision of 1.00 mm in horizontal direction. The system helps minimize adjustments. Absolute rotary encoder E-20 Motor Other applications include control and management of conveyors, multilayered parking lots, and manufacturing processes. KOYO Rotary Encoders Programmable Cam Switches TRD These absolute encoders are ideal for angle control. Combined with the FC series cam switches, they improve precision and efficiency. TRD-NA360NWF TRD-NA720NWF 15 35 2.5 TRD-K360-YC2 TRD-K720-YC2 33 66 13MAX. 10 3 3 5 FC-21 15 1 PC D6 6 20 78 72 56 42 10 1 Robust encoders Four M4 screws (Diameter: 0.7, Length: 12) FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Surface of installation Three M3 tap screws (5 mm log) 90 17 mm or less Oil seal FC-80-C/160 /320 45 30 8 PC D 40 50 0.5 Small encoders with diameter of 50 mm 5 10 120 TRD-KL360-YC2 TRD-KL720-YC2 33 PC 66 10 33 5 Four M4 screws (Diameter: 0.7, Length: 6) 15 1 21 15 90 D6 6 Servo mounting is available. (7) 78 72 56 42 10 1 Adaptive to all environments Servo mounting is available. (27.7) Terminal connection FC-80-C/FC-160/FC-320 FC-81F-C (Rear face) FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C (Rear face) Unlock Lock Ring Pin Assignment of Connector 13 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 GND Viewed from the cam switch Bit location and value Pin Bit location and value 720 360 No. 720 360 1 0V 8 bit6 (25) bit5 (24) 2 12V 9 bit7 (26) bit6 (25) 0 3 bit1 (2 ) Not connected 10 bit8 (27) bit7 (26) 4 bit2 (21) bit1 (20) 11 bit9 (28) bit8 (27) 5 bit3 (22) bit2 (21) 12 bit10(29) bit9 (28) 6 bit4 (23) bit3 (22) 13 Not connected 7 bit5 (24) bit4 (23) Note: 720 and 360 indicate resolution. Pin No. E-21 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches FC-80-C/160/320 Connectors for the rotary encoders Absolute rotary encoder Model Models with standard connectors TRD-NA NWF TRD-NA NWF5M Appearance Appearance Cable length Model Note With connectors for FC connection 2m FC-80-C/160 /320 Connector and cable 5m Models with relays and connectors TRD-NA NWE 3m F-30GF 5m F-50GF 10m F-100GF 360/720 resolution FC-21 (NPN) 2m Models with built-in connectors TRD-K -YC2 Models with built-in connectors TRD-KL -YC2 E-22 2m F-20ANC2 5m F-50ANC2 2m F-20BNC2 5m F-50BNC2 2m F-20ANC2A 5m F-50ANC2A 2m F-20BNC2A 5m F-50BNC2A 360 resolution 720 resolution 360 resolution 720 resolution FC-21 FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches MEMO E-23 FC-21 FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 Using an absolute encoder, these switches can turn twenty four devices on and off at specified angles. Merits Easy to operate programmer Using the E-15PJ cable, the FC-20P programming unit allows both local and remote operations. Up to ten banks for program storage Bank 0 for program 0 Bank 1 for program 1 Bank 9 for program 9 Resolution Times of programmed switching 360 180/device 512 256/device 720 360/device 1024 512/device Angles can be controlled to a precision of one degree. Resolution can be set to 360, 512, 720 or 1,024. Battery-less The switches use an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells. Dynamic programming You can re-program procedures during runtime. Tape storage The FC-models support tapes for storage of programs. Home position calibration The position and angle of the encoder is automatically adjusted. Write-protected programs You can protect your programs from writing, modification and removal. Teach option During setup, you can customize your programs according to your needs. Self diagnosis During operation, any errors are reported with displayed codes. E-24 Front Panel Layout and Description Position display ON or OFF angle, home position, selected key or mode (PRG, TEST or RUN mode) Angle after home position calibration(TEST or RUN mode) Output status display Cam numbers and status (PRG, TEST or RUN mode) Output status after angle input (TEST or RUN mode) FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Revolution speed (TEST or RUN mode) FC-80-C/160 /320 Use SHF key to switch cams between 1 to 16 and 17 to 24. Bank display Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 FC-21 Bank selected by BANK key(PRG or RUN mode) Bank selected by BANK SELECT signal(TEST or RUN mode) 4th digit of position value FC-20P Programmer ON/OFF : Lights when ON angle is displayed. Flashes when OFF angle is displayed. RUN Decimal point key Ten keys : Lights in TEST or RUN mode. SHF : Flashes when SHF key is pressed. POWER : Lights when power is on. CPU : Lights when an error occurred on CPU. BNK key: Selects a bank in PRG or run mode. OUT key: Selects a cam in PRG, TEST or RUN mode. REF key: Reads angle in PRG, TEST or RUN mode. TCH key: Reads home position in PRG, TEST or RUN mode. Select Teach option in PRG mode. C SHF key: Selects a cam range, or selects a specific operation in combination with another key. key: Increments angle by one degree in TEST mode. Increments angle by one degree during output status display in all modes. key: Decrements angle by one degree in TEST mode. Decrements angle by one degree during output status display in all modes. key: Displays ON/OFF angle in PRG, TEST or RUN mode. key: Executes a program. key: Clears a setting, error, cam selection, or previous operation in PRG mode, or clears readout value in TEST or RUN mode. SAVE SHF : Saves program in PRG mode. LOAD SHF : Restores program in PRG mode. VERIFY F key: Selects a function specific to FC-21. SHF : Checks program with tape. E-25 Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 Output status display FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Cam numbers and status (PRG, TEST or RUN mode) Output status after angle input(TEST or RUN mode) START BANK CAM FC-80-C/160 /320 0V Lights in RUN mode FC-21 Lights when an error occurred on CPU Lights when power is on Programmer connector 0V G CAM AC power CAM or RUN AM or BANK 4 Position or revolution speed display Bank display ON/OFF angle, home position or key status (PRG mode) Angle after home position calibration (TEST or RUN mode) Revolution speed (TEST or RUN mode) Bank selected by BANK key (PRG mode) Bank selected by BANK SELECT signal (TEST or RUN mode) Dip switches CW CCW FC-21 Switch number 1 2 3 4 5 Select Direction Resolution Resolution Number of output points CAM 24 512 1024/revolution 720 1024/revolution 24 RUN Enable 360 720/revolution 16 CAM Diable Position ON CCW OFF CW 360 512/revolution 6 7 8 Write protect Allowable range at 720 resolution Reserved 0 0 359.5 719 CW means the current value increases when the switch turns clockwise, viewed from the encoder axis and CCW means the current value increases when the switch turns counter clockwise, viewed from the encoder axis. E-26 Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 General Specifications Items Specification 120V FC-21 : AC90 FC-21-1: AC93 195 264V 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 30VA 50 20 Ambient/Storage humidity 35 70 85 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Ambient temperature 0 Storage temperature 126V 240V (with no freezing) RH (with no dewing) Withstand voltage AC 2kV 1min. Insulation resistance Min. 20M Vibration resistance Durable for along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude No error along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude Shock resistance Durable along three axes at 98 m/s2 (10 G) Noise resistance 1kV between power terminals(square wave pulsa with 1 s width, 1 ns rise time, positive/negative polarity, source synchronization and 0 to 360 phase) Weight 2kg DC500V Each of AC input, I/O and frame interconnections FC-80-C/160 /320 Power consumption 180 FC-21 Source voltage Storage tape interface Item Specification Baud rate 830 Modulation FSK "1" : 2kHz Head/ End Mark 2kHz File numbers 0 to 999 arbitrarily "0" : 1kHz Note: Use data recorder designed for personal computers. Music tape recorder are not recommended. E-27 FC-21 FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 Mechanical and Performance Specifications Specification Item Number of input points Encoder inut FC-21 RUN: 1 BANK: 4 10-bit Gray binary codes Use connector specific to the encoder. Resolution 360, 512, 720 or 1,024 per revolution (selected by dip switch) Number of output points 24 or 16 (selected by dip switch) Output type Photo-isolated transistor open collector Voltage: 30V 0.1A (outputs 1 24) RUN Normally ON in TEST or RUN mode May be switched to CAM 24 by dip switch. Times of ON/ OFF switching 180 at 360 resolution 256 at 512 resolution Max. 360 at 720 resolution 512 at 1,024 resolution Response revolution speed Number of banks/programs ON-OFF interval resolution 360 resolution 512 resolution 720 resolution 1024 Number of banks 10 7 7 4 5 3 3 2 3 3600rpm 2520rpm 1800rpm 1260rpm Resolution 360 512 720 1024 2 1 2400rpm 1200rpm 1680rpm 840rpm 1200rpm 600rpm 840rpm 420rpm Number of outputs 16 24 16 24 16 24 16 24 Direction CW or CCW(viewed from encoder)(selected by dip switch) Write-protect ON or OFF (selected by dip switch) Select ON to disable write, modification and removal. Home position 0 0 0 0 359 at 360 resolution 511 at 512 resolution 719 at 720 resolution 1023 at 1024 resolution Program memory EEPROM Output status display Programmer panel: Red LED for 16 outputs (from 1 to16 or 17 to 24) Main panel: Red LED (for 24 outputs) Bank status display Programmer panel: Red LED for 1-digit numbers with height of 8 mm Main panel: Red LED for 1-digit numbers with height of 8 mm Position display Programmer panel: Red LED for 3- or 4-digit numbers with height of 8 mm Main panel: Red LED for 4-digit numbers with height of 8 mm E-28 FC-21 I/O Circuits BANK Terminal number1 1 2 2 3 4 3 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DC24V L L L L L L L L L L L L 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C START CAM outputs 17 12V 20 C5 21 C4 22 C3 23 C2 24 C1 25 C10 26 C9 27 C8 28 Load current: 0.1A Withstand voltage 30V 1k 2.2 0V 12V 0V 0V 0V 0V 12V 12V 1.2k Same as the circuit on the left 29 C7 0V 300 0V Absolute encoder Load current: 0.1A Withstand voltage 30V FC-80-C/160 /320 1 C6 FC-21 Specified connector C11(C12) Load current: 0.1A Withstand voltage 30V 4.7k C15 2.2 2.2 C16 Shield Encoder connector C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C7 C8 0V C9 C10 Terminal 18 number 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 L L L L L L L L L L L 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 32 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 (Viewed from the FC-21 cam switch) 33 34 L DC24V C1 24 G COM DC24V CAM outputs 100 200 AC power source BANK4 Terminal Assignment No. Name Function Input Specification Description No. Negative common Terminal common to negative I/O 1 0V 2 START START input Disables all CAM outputs when turned off (except in RUN mode) 3 BANK1 4 BANK2 5 BANK3 6 OUT1 Selects a bank. CAM outputs Turn corresponding outputs on or off according to current settings. NPN open collector output: DC24V 0.1A Withstand voltage: Max. 30V OUT23 CAM/BANK Selects BANK 4 when resolution is 360 and number of outputs is 16. Otherwise, selects CAM 23. BANK4 switch 29 OUT24 CAM/RUN switch RUN OUT 24 can be switched to CAM or RUN 30 0V Negative common Terminal common to negative I/O 31 G GND Grounds chassis or transformer shielded cable. 32 COM 33 100 34 200 100V 200V AC power source Input voltage ON ON OFF OFF 28 Encoder input 3mA Max. 0.2mA Max. 2V Min. 10V 12mA Max. 2mA Max. 4V Min. 8V 12mA Max. 2mA Max. 4V Min. 8V C10 2 28 START input Function C1 20 BANK SELECT input 27 OUT22 Name START START input 3 BANK1 4 BANK2 5 BANK3 23 BANK4 BANK input Encoder power source No. C11 C12 Name Function Output voltage tolerance Output capacity 12V Encoder power source DC10.8 13.2V Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 Max. 70mA E-29 I/O signals ENCODER "L" active BANK SELECT ENCODER signal is used to control the absolute encoder and the cam switch. To enter this signal, connect the encoder connector to the cam switch connector. Using Dip switches 2 and 3, set the resolution to 360, 512, 720 or 1,024. This resolution determines the number of banks. For details, refer to the description of the BANK SELECT signal. FC-21 Dip switches FC-21 2 3 Resolution 360 512 720 1024 Dip switch 2 OFF ON OFF ON Dip switch 3 OFF OFF ON ON Applicable models of absolute encoders TRD-K -YCS (Resolution: 360, 512, 720 or 1,024) TRD-K -YPS (Resolution: 360, 512, 720 or 1,024) TRD-K -YC2 (Resolution: 360, 512, 720 or 1,024) TRD-KL -YC2 (Resolution: 360, 512, 720 or 1,024) TRD-NA NW (Resolution: 360, 512, 720 or 1,024) "L" active BANK SELECT signals are used to select a bank (i.e. program). Banks are selected as shown in Tables A below. Tables B show the number of available banks in relation to resolution and the number of outputs. FC-21 BANK SELECT signal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BANK SELECT FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF Number 4 of banks Resolution 10 OFF 360 7 360 OFF 7 512 OFF 4 512 OFF 720 5 OFF 3 720 OFF 1024 3 OFF 1024 2 OFF ON ON Table A The START signal controls the CAM output signals according to programmed instructions. All CAM outputs are turned off when the START signal turns to the HIGH level. Run input OFF ON OFF CAM output OFF ON OFF 200ms MAX. E-30 10ms MAX. Table B As shown below, a bank should be selected before the START signal is turned on. START OFF ON 10ms MIN. "L" active 16 24 16 24 16 24 16 24 BANK 4 is used as an output terminal when the number of outputs is 24. BANKS SELECT START Number of banks CAM signal turns on or off according to programmed angle. Using Dip switch 3 or 4, set the number of outputs to 16 or 24. RUN signal turns on or off to indicate the status in different modes as follows: Status CPU error Memory error Low voltage Other errors Normal Dip swich 4 RUN OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Depending on the error, RUN may not turn off. The following table shows the output numbers selected: OFF ON Mode TEST OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Number of outputs Output numbers Terminal numbers 16 1 16 6 21 6 29 24 1 24 CAM 24 can be switched to RUN by the dip switch 4 or 5. In this case, the number of outputs is reduced to 23. FC-20 In response to ENCODER signal, CAM signal delays as follows: FC-21 FC-21 PRG OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Dip switch ON : RUN ENCODER input OFF :CAM 24 4 CAM output 130 s MAX. FC-21 Dip switch ON : RUN OFF : CAM 2 5 RUN turns on within 35 seconds after PRG mode is switched to RUN mode or TEST mode. Connecting the encoder and the cam switch Programmable cam switch FC-20/FC-21 Absolute encoder TRD-K -Y S 12 1 Encoder power source(12V) 10 0V 12V Angle 15 0V 16 B 32 G 33 34 200 31 0V 100 30 COM Connector A AC power source Keep the encoder cable away from power lines of motors and clutches. The shielded cable of the encoder is not connected to its ground FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C "L" active RUN FC-80-C/160 /320 "L" active CAM Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 Connect the 0 V terminal 30 to the ground terminal 31. Using a cable with a section area of 3 to 5.5 mm2 connect the points A and B as shown. cable or the frame. Using the specified connector, connect it to the 0 V terminal. E-31 FC-21 FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 Initializing the cam switch 1 Turn the power off. Connect the FC-20P programmer and the encoder to the cam switch. Set the dip switches to the desired positions. Write protect should be set to OFF. 2 Select the PRG mode, then turn the power off. 3 According to the dip swich setting, memory allocation. For the code output setting end origirl calibration valve vary. Perform Step 20. Programming procedures Available modes Step Procedure 1 Selecting PRG mode Using the Mode switch, select the PRG mode. 2 Selecting TEST mode Using the Mode switch, select the TEST mode. 3 Selecting RUN mode Using the Mode switch, select the RUN mode. 4 Selecting bank PRG TEST RUN BNK Press the BANK key to select the bank number. 5 6 Clearing all settings for selected bank Intializing the home position Press the following keys in the order listed: C 3 4 8 Except the home position, all settings for the specified bank are cleared. 0 Press the following keys in the order listed: REF OUT 7 Writing cam settings ON angle Cam number Output number OFF angle Omit the cam number if it is already selected. OUT 8 Teaching the cam settings TCH Cam number Run the machine being controlled Current ON angle TCH Run the machine being controlled Current OFF angle Omit the cam number if it is already selected. OUT Cam number 9 Reading ON angle ON angle(may be omitted) ON angle closest to the entered value is read out. If the value is omitted, positive ON angle closest to zero is read out. Using the keys, specify other ON angles to be read. OUT Angle (may be omitted) 10 Reading cam status Cam status at the entered angle is read out. If the angle is omitted, status at the angle zero is read out. Cam number Use the Cam status E-32 keys to increment or decrement angles. FC-21 Available mode Step Procedure FC-21 PRG TEST RUN Follow the step 9 above to read ON angle or OFF angle to be cleared. 11 Clearing angle settings Press the following keys: C The specified ON or OFF angle is cleared, together with the corresponding OFF angle or ON angle. Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 13 Adjusting settings during operation Reading current angle Using the keys, adjust the angle selected. Using the keys to increment or decrement the angle by one degree. FC-80-C/160 /320 12 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Follow the step 9 above to read ON angle or OFF angle to be adjusted. Press the REF key to read the current angle of the cam. 14 Programming the home position FC-21 Stop the machine at its home position. Press the following keys in the order listed: REF TCH Angle(may be omitted) The entered angle is programmed as the home position of the machine. If the angle is omitted, current angle is programmed as home position. Follow the step 9 above to read ON angle or OFF angle to be changed. Press the following keys in the order listed: 15 Changing settings SHF OUT New ON/OFF angle Press the following keys in the order listed: 16 Saving data to tape SHF SAVE Program number All settings and home position are saved. Press the following keys in the order listed: 17 Restoring data from tape SHF LOAD Program number Data for the specified program is restored. Press the following keys in the order listed: 18 Checking data with tape SHF VERIFY Program number Data for the specified program is checked. Follow the step 16, 17 or 18 above. Press the following keys in the order listed: 19 Saving, restoring or checking data for a selected bank. BNK Bank number Data for the specified bank is saved, restored or checked. Press the following keys in the order listed: 20 Clearing all setting and the home position F 9 4 2 All settings for all banks are cleared, and the home position is reset to zero. E-33 Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 Available modes Step FC-21 PRG TEST RUN Press the following keys to display current position: F FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C 21 FC-80-C/160 /320 Procedure Displaying position or revolution speed 1 Press the following keys to display current revolution speed: F 2 F 22 BNK Press the following keys to display current bank number Displaying bank number Press C key and F key at the same to display the previously selected bank. FC-21 Press the following keys to specify the source and destination banks: BNK 23 Transferring data between banks Source bank number F 3 Destination bank number Press the following keys: 24 Setting the frequency (60 pulses) per revolutin OUT Output number F 4 This operation is unavailable for the resolution 512 and 1,024. List of Error Codes Error code Name Possible cause Corrective Action E01 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E21 E22 E25 Key entry error Bank number error Cam number error Angle error Write protect error Duplicate angle Dip switch error BNK SELECT error ENCODER error Data memory error Program memory error Unmatched data Keys were not pressed as required. The entered bank number does not exist. The entered cam number does not exist. The entered angle does not exist. Write was attempted in write-protected mode. Same angle has been set more than once. A dip switch has been repositioned. The selected BANK SELECT number does not exist. The selected ENCODER number does not exist. Data has been changed. Program has been changed. Data in memory does not match data in tape. Check the operating procedures. Check the dip switches 2 and 3 to confirm the correct number. Check the dip switch 3 to confirm the correct number. Check the dip switch 2 to confirm the correct angle. Turn the power off, then turn the dip switch 5 off to enable writing. Follow the step 9, 11 or 7 to clear the setting, then re-enter the value. Turn the power, then set the dip switch to the correct position. Select the PRG mode then turn the power on. Check the dip switch 2 to confirm the current resolution, and check the ENCODER connection. Turn the power off, then check the dip switches. Select the PRG mode, then turn the power on. Turn the power off, then check the program. Select the PRG mode, then turn the power on Clear wrong data, and save or restore correct data to memory or tape. E26 Unmatched data and dip switch setting Data in tape does not match the setting of a dip switch. Turn the power off, then set the dip switch to the correct position. Select the PRG mode, then turn the power on. Note: No error is displayed when the AC power lowers or shuts down. Use the C key to clear error codes. E-34 External Dimensions (in mm) (80) 210 56 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C 162 138 M4 FC-80-C/160 /320 200 (24) Encoder connector Model Models with cables and connectors TRD-K -YPS Connector and cable Appearance Models with standard connectors TRD-K -YCS FC-21 Applicable models of rotary encoders and cables with connectors Absolute rotary encoder Appearance Model 2m F-50J F-150J 5m 15m 2m F-50J F-150J 2m Models with built-in connectors TRD-K -YC2 F-20C2 2m Models with built-in connectors TRD-KL -YC2 Models with built-in cables TRD-NA NW F-20C2A MR-16L 2m Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 MR-16M 5m E-35 FC-21 FC-80-C/160 /320 FC-81F-C 161F/321F-C Programmable Cam Switches FC-21 MEMO E-36 Application Examples Packaging uniform quantities Grouping bars into same quantities Electronic counter Electronic counter Fence Conveyor A Control board Photoelectric sensor Timer Control board Solenoid Proximity switch Shutter Conveyor B Clutch brake Metal fragment Motor Proximity switch The photoelectric sensor generates a pulse signal as it detects each product falling from the conveyor. The electronic counter counts the number or pulses generated. When the count has reached a preset number, the counter generates a signal to open the hopper's shutter. The products are ejected into a box then the next vacant box is conveyed to the same position as the previous one. Partitioning products into same quantities Each bar is brought by the conveyor A to the fence. This make the fence swing toward the proximity sensor and activates the sensor to feed the bar onto the conveyor B. The electronic counter counts pulses generated by the proximity sensor. When the count has reached a preset number, the counter generates a signal to stop the conveyor A. The conveyor B also stops after a time set by the timer. Cutting materials to uniform length Electronic counter Cutter Control board Reflex photoelectric sensor Electronic counter Tact feeder Belt conveyor Stopper Rotary encoder Threaded rod Motor Tact conveyor The electronic counter counts the products fed by the conveyor and detected by the reflex photoelectric sensor. When the count has reached a preset number, the counter activates the tact feeder to advance the conveyor by one step for the next counting cycle. Counting bottles and checking for caps Timer As the threaded rod rotates, the stopper is moved by a preset distance. The number of rotations is converted to the number of pulses by the rotary encoder, and counted by the electronic counter. When the count has reached a preset number, the cutter is activated to cut the material to a fixed length. Sorting materials by length Control gate Multitooth cam Electronic counter Control board Dual preset counter Proximity switch 1 Proximity switch 2 Proximity 1 Metal plate Proximity 2 Rejection signal Accepted material Proximity switch A Proximity switch B Rejected material The proximity switch checks each bottle for a cap. At the same time, it activates the counter to count the bottles and display the count. When no cap is detected within a specified time, the internal timer generates an alarm. The proximity switch A generates pulse signals when it detects the rotation of the multitooth cam. The electronic counter counts the number of pulses while a metal plate is being detected by the proximity switch B. This count is compared with the upper and lower limits that specify acceptable size of plates. Any plate outside the tolerance is rejected. F-1 Application Examples Winding wire for constant turns Proximity switch Wire Marking at same intervals Timer Detect roller Rotary encoder Cutter Disk shaped dog switch Electronic counter Solenoid Brake Reduction gear Stamp Dual preset counter Bobbin Stop signal (second setting) Motor Preset interval Feed roller Feed motor Deceleration signal (first setting) The proximity switch A generates plus signals when it detects the rotation of the bobbin. The pulse count is entered to the counter, and compared with dual preset values: the expected total number of turns of wire, and the total number minus one. When the pulse count has reached the second setting, the reduction gear is activated. The bobbin stops completely when the count equals the first setting. At the same time, the timer activates the cutter to cut the wire. Detecting the center of workpieces As the feed roller rotates, the workpiece is moved to a preset distance. The number of rotations is converted to the number of pulses by the rotary encoder, and counted by the electronic counter. When the count has reached a preset number, the counter generates a signal to activate the stamp. Spacing rolled materials Rotary encoder Frequency demultiplier (1/2) Gate Servo motor Electronic counter Rotary encoder Photoelectric sensor Control board Motor Electronic counter Roller mill The photoelectric sensor generates pulse signals when a workpiece starts to cover its light. The pulse frequency is halved by the frequency demultiplier then processed by the rotary encoder for counting. The workpiece is centered when the count has reached a preset number. Production management As the threaded rod rotates, the material is fed by a preset length. The number of rotations is converted to the number of pulses by the rotary encoder then counted by the electronic counter. When the count has reached a preset number, it stops the motor that controls the spacing. Positioning a grinder Workpiece Clutch Feed motor Photoelectric sensor Clock pulse generator Electronic counter (for product count display) Set to expected production Completion signal Electronic counter Electronic counter (for frequency demultiplier) (for standard production display) The first counter is set to the expected number of products, and the second counter is set to the standard number of products. The third counter works with the frequency demultiplier and the clock pulse generator. The clock controls output rate at ten pulses/second to provide the time required for one product. The third counter counts the time elapsed for the current production. It warns an overtime when this value exceeds the standard production time. F-2 xim ity sw h itc Rotary encoder o Pr Electronic counter 1 Electronic counter 2 Electronic counter 3 When the proximity switch detects a workpiece fed in position, it activates the motor to rotate the workpiece and accelerate the grinder. The electronic counters are used to change the speeds of the motor and the grinder. Application Examples Displaying the total number of packaged products Displaying the speeds of moving objects Four products per package Photoelectric sensor A Photoelectric sensor B Tachometer Package sensor Tachometer The tachometer counts packages containing a fixed number of products. It is to display the total number of products. For example, it should be set to "4" for packages each containing four products. Displaying press process time The tachometer measures the speed of an object moving from the photoelectric sensor A to the sensor B. Using the preset scale, the speed is calculated from the "time lag" between the two sensors and their distance. Displaying flow rates Proximity switch Press Tachometer Flow meter Tachometer A dog switch is installed so it activates the proximity switch when it detects the bottom of the press. The tachometer displays the time elapsed after the proximity switch is activated. Displaying length Tachometer The tachometer counts and displays the number or pulses generated by the flow meter. This number is multiplied by a preset value to display a flow rate in liters or cubic meters. Displaying time for passing through an oven Length Pulley (150 mm in diameter) 10 meter long oven Rotary encoder (60 pulses/rotation) INA INB Photoelectric sensor ON in minutes Pulse waveform Rotary encoder When the photoelectric sensor is activated by an object, the tachometer counts the number of pulses generated by the rotary encoder. This number is converted to the length. Tachometer The tachometer displays the time elapsed after each piece of bread enters into the oven. The time is calculated from the diameter of the pulley, the number of pulses generated by rotary encoder and the length of the oven. F-3 Application Examples Controlling filling timing Positioning a numerically controlled machine Filler Rotary encoder Rotary encoder Programmable cam switch Programmable cam switch Motor Along with the programmable cam switch, the rotary encoder controls the timing of filling containers, their positions and the timing of transferring filled containers. The use of the cam switch and the encoder allows easy positioning and quick adjustment of machines. Controlling a bottling machine Capping Filling Programmable cam switch Labeler Rotary encoder The programmable cam switch and the rotary encoder provide overall control of the entire bottling processes. Filling bottles, capping and labeling can be controlled from a single turn table. The table can be also controlled to avoid angular deviations. F-4 The programmable cam switch and the rotary encoder can be used to control the position of a numerically controlled machine. Modifying the cam switch configuration allows you to use different types of workpieces. Glossary Multi-counter Glossary Preset counter Counts input pulses, and generates a signal when the count has reached a preset value. The following diagram shows its circuit configuration: Multiple counter functions are built in this counter. It outputs the count when either of the counter has attained to the preset value. It is best-suited for maintaining and controlling multiple tools at a machining center or NC machine tool during tool change. Type A operation (One Shot output) Block Diagram (KCX series) Preset counter Count input Reset input Input circuit First digit display circuit Second digit display circuit nth digit display circuit First digit count circuit Second digit count circuit nth digit count circuit Auto reset for repeated operations Generates a signal during a specified time when the number of input pulses has reached a preset value. The internal count circuit is automatically reset upon countup to allow both the next counting cycle and signal output. Current count can be reset either by activating the reset terminal (external reset) or by temporarily shutting the power down (power reset). Reset circuit Set value Value setting units Count input AND circuit Output circuit Power source Output signal Relay output One shot output Sensor power Dual preset counter Using pairs of preset values and output circuits, the counter generates a signal when the count has reached lower or upper value. Total counter Only displays counts, and generates no control signal. Type B operation (Hold output signal) Generates and hold a signal when the number of input pulses has reached a preset value. The internal count circuit and the hold circuit can be reset either by activating the reset terminal (external reset) or by temporarily shutting the power down (power reset). Batch counter It contains two preset counters: one counts the number of batches, and the other generates a signal according to the setting. External counter The counter do not have a setting unit at the main body and allows external connection of a digital switch, rotary switch, card reader, etc. KCX- RX series are included in this type. Set value Count input Output signal Signal held External reset All-output counter (Read-out counter) This counter outputs the count value as a signal to an external source at any time. KCX- RN series have this function. F-5 Glossary DC and relay signal inputs Open collector output DC signal input is invoked by output from a proximity switch, photoelectric sensor, rotary encoder, or other transistor or semiconductor circuit. Relay signal input is controlled by a microswitch, limit switch, push button switch, or relay. An open collector gate is not connected with the internal power source. Therefore, it should be connected with an external power and load. You can choose any voltage or current(negative load) levels within the counter specification. DC signal input Load Open collector output +12 V sensor power OUT Sensor L OUT Input terminal E Counter E Relay signal input N.C From previous step DC power +12 V sensor power C E Input terminal N.O E Sensor Counter Totem-pole output DC and Relay signal outputs DC signal output means the signal generated by a semiconductor circuit. Relay signal output is the signal generated by an internal relay contact. Preset electronic counter A DC output circuit configured like a totem-pole. As shown below, an output line is located between the serially connected output transistors Q1 and Q2. It provides higher current than conventional DC output, using the same positive and negative loads. The circuit can directly drive a relay. V +Power Q1 N.C C Relay signal output OUT From previous step N.O. Relay Q2 E E OUT E Grounded DC signal output Maximum counting speed Expressed in counts per second (cps), the maximum counting speed indicates how many pulses the unit can count at the makebreak ratio of 1 to 1(Ta=Tb). If the ratio is not 1:1, counting is restricted by the pulse width in relation to the minimum Ta or Tb as shown in Paragraphs (2) and (3) below. Ta MIN. 1 Tb MIN. maximum counting speed 1 (s) 2 (Each model has specific values for these items) (1) When Ta=Tb Ta or Tb must be longer than Ta MIN or Tb MIN for the counter to count pulse. Input pulse Ta Tb Ta F-6 Tb Ta MIN. Tb MIN. Glossary (2)When Ta Tb Ta must be longer than Ta MIN. for the counter to count pulses. Input pulse Ta Tb Ta Ta MIN. (3)When Ta Tb Tb must be longer than Tb MIN. for for the counter to count pulses. Input pulse Ta Tb Tb Tb MIN. If you wish to add static signal input, select appropriate input terminal for desired counting speed or frequency. You should choose a terminal with the lowest maximum counting speed. Resets Power-on reset: Resets the count when power is turned on. To reset the count, turn the power off then turn it on at any time. Auto reset: Resets the A type operation upon countup. The reset duration is shorter than the counter's input cycle at maximum counting speed. This enables the unit to restart counting from zero during cycle. External reset: The count is reset when specific voltage is applied to the reset input terminal. Some models reset to the Low level. Manual reset: The count is reset when you press the button on the front panel. Sensor power source It supplies power to an external device such as a proximity switch, photoelectric sensor or rotary encoder. All KOYO counters include a sensor power source. (DC type is not included.) Glossary for specifications Count input disable gate (response) ON DELAY time: The time until input is disabled after turning ON the disable gate. OFF DELAY time: The time until input is enabled after turning OFF the disable gate. External set input (response) ON DELAY time: Time for the set gate to be activated. OFF DELAY time: Time for the set gate to be deactivated. External reset (response) ON DELAY time: Time for the counter to be reset. OFF DELAY time: Time for the counter to be restarted. Power reset (time) Time for the counter to be restarted by power input. Auto reset (time) Time for the counter to be restarted by countup. DC output (response) Time for the DC output terminal to be activated by input of a preset number of pulses. Relay output (response) Time for the output relay's N.O. contact to be closed by input of a preset number of pulses. Output disable gate (response) ON DELAY time: The time until output is disabled after turning ON the disable gate. OFF DELAY time: The time until output is enabled after turning OFF the disable gate. Bank Number of programs. Programs (operation) can be set for each bank. F-7 F-8 Model Number Index C CPG-22 E E-15PJ F F-100GF F-150J F-20ANC2 F-20ANC2A F-20BNC2 F-20BNC2A F-20C2 F-20C2A F-30GF F-50ANC2 F-50ANC2A F-50BNC2 F-50BNC2A F-50GF F-50J FC-160 FC-20P FC-21 FC-21-1 FC-320 FC-80-C FC-81F-C FC-161F-C FC-321F-C FG-01 K KA-01 KA-12 KB-03 KB-04 KB-12-0 KC-48C KC-48P KCH-B4RN KCH-B6RN KCM-50 KCM-50-1 KCM-50P KCM-50P-1 KCM-51 KCM-51-1 KCM-51P KCM-51P-1 KCN-4SR KCN-4SR-C KCN-4ST KCN-4ST-C KCN-4T B-143 E-24 E-22 E-35 E-22 E-22 E-22 E-22 E-35 E-35 E-22 E-22 E-22 E-22 E-22 E-22 E-35 E-12 E-24, E-25 E-24 E-24, E-27 E-12 E-12 E-3 E-3 E-3 B-144 B-117, B-142 B-142 B-117, B-142 B-76, B-142 B-132, B-142 C-11, D-12 C-11, D-12 B-129 B-129 B-134 B-134 B-134 B-134 B-134 B-134 B-134 B-134 B-32 B-32 B-32 B-32 B-63 KCN-4T-C KCN-4WR KCN-4WR-C KCN-4WT KCN-4WT-C KCN-6BR KCN-6BT KCN-6SR KCN-6SR-C KCN-6ST KCN-6ST-C KCN-6T KCN-6T-C KCN-6WR KCN-6WR-C KCN-6WT KCN-6WT-C KCN-A4SR KCN-A4SR-C KCN-A4ST KCN-A4ST-C KCN-A6SR KCN-A6SR-C KCN-A6ST KCN-A6ST-C KCV-4S KCV-4S-C KCV-6S KCV-6S-C KCV-4T KCV-4T-C KCV-6T KCV-6T-C KCX-1 KCX-1D KCX-2 KCX-2D KCX-2DM KCX-3 KCX-3D KCX-3DM KCX-3W KCX-4 KCX-4D KCX-4DM KCX-4RN KCX-4T KCX-4W KCX-4WM KCX-5D KCX-5DM KCX-5W KCX-6D B-63 B-32 B-32 B-32 B-32 B-54 B-54 B-32 B-32 B-32 B-32 B-63 B-63 B-32 B-32 B-32 B-32 B-19 B-19 B-19 B-19 B-19 B-19 B-19 B-19 B-5 B-5 B-5 B-5 B-5 B-5 B-5 B-5 B-78 B-78 B-78 B-78 B-78 B-78 B-78 B-78 B-86 B-78 B-78 B-78 B-118 B-92 B-86 B-86 B-78 B-78 B-86 B-78 F-9 KCX-6DM KCX-6RN KCX-6T KCX-6W KCX-6WM KCX-8T KCX-B4 KCX-B4M KCX-B4T KCX-B4W KCX-B4WM KCX-B6 KCX-B6M KCX-B6T KCX-B6W KCX-B6WM KCY-2-G KCY-2-H KCY-2D-G KCY-2D-H KCY-4-G KCY-4-H KCY-4D-G KCY-4D-H KF-02 KF-03 KF-04 KF-12A KT-V4S KT-V4S-C T TC-4 TC-41 TC-6 TC-61 TC-4A TC-4B TC-4L-G TC-4L-H TC-4S TC-V6 TC-V6-C TC-V6S TC-V6S-C TC-4W F-10 B-78 B-118 B-92 B-86 B-86 B-92 B-96 B-96 B-108 B-96 B-96 B-96 B-96 B-108 B-96 B-96 B-67 B-67 B-67 B-67 B-67 B-67 B-67 B-67 B-143 B-117, B-142 B-76, B-142 B-132, B-142 D-2 D-2 C-14, C-33 C-14, C-29 C-14, C-24 C-14, C-19 C-14, C-36 C-14, C-38 C-14, C-27 C-14, C-27 C-14, C-40 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-14, C-40 F-11 For your orders The following applies to the customer's purchase order and requests for quotations, unless otherwise specified in quotations, purchase agreement, catalogs, specifications or other related documents: 1. Warranty [Period] KOYO provides one-year warranty for the product delivered to a location specified by the customer [Scope] KOYO replaces or repairs at its expense any parts found to be defective during the above period unless such defect proves to be caused by: (1) Abuse or inappropriate use by customer, (2) What is not part of the product purchased, (3) Modification or repair done by a person not authorized by KOYO, or (4) Act of God, or natural disaster or calamity. This warranty applies to the delivered product itself. KOYO does not assume any loss or expense deriving from any defect of the product. 2. Services Services are not included in the purchase agreement. The customer may request the following services at its expenses: (1) Installation and testing (2) Maintenance, check, adjustment and repair (3) Technical training and education Each product is packaged according to KOYO's specifications. GENERAL CATALOG for KOYO Counters and Controllers 1996 to 2001 Published: August 2001 Written and edited by: Design Center, KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. Copyright by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied or duplicated. Information contained in this book is subject to change without prior notice. KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. OVERSEAS SALES DEPARTMENT 171 1-CHOME, TENJIN-CHO, KODAIRA, TOKYO 187-0004 JAPAN PHONE: TOKYO +81-42-341-7711 / FAX: +81-42-342-6871 E-mail : [email protected] ẓ㥔䦸㉧傈Ụ㛰昷⅓⏟ High Potential TECH. Co., Ltd. 䶙✧http://www.hpt.com.tw ⅓⏟⏗⋾ⷩ⾐凯⋾巖181噆12㧺Ḳ1 曢婘(02)2719-4662
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
advertisement
© 2021